En500-600 Manual

Print version: V4.
0-A2
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing EN500/EN600 series inverter developed and produced
by Shenzhen Encom Electric Technologies CO., LTD.
EN500/EN600 series hi-performance flux vector inverter adopt advanced control

mode to achieve high torque, high precision and wide-range speed regulation
drive, and it also support speed sensorless torque control and PG control torque.
It can meet customer all kinds of requirement to universal inverter. EN500/EN600
inverter is a organic combination for customer’s universal and industrial control
purpose and provide practical main-auxiliary frequency provision, run channel
frequency binding, PID regulator, simple PLC, spinning traverse, programmable
input&output terminal control, pulse frequency provision and inbuilt Modbus,
Can bus, Profibus, 485 freedom protocol and other function and platform. It
provide high integration solution for most manufacturing and automation
C
customer and EN500/EN600 inbuilt input phase loss function, output phase loss
function, short circuit to earth grounding function and many other protective
function to improve effectively the system reliability and safety.
This brochure provide the installation and wiring, settings, fault check and
N
methods, maintenance and other relative issues to customer. To make inverter
assemble and operate rightly, and use its high performance to best, please read this
brochure carefully before installation usage and keep them well to the final users
of inverter.
E
Please contact our office or dealer anywhere at any moment when you have any
doubts or special demands in using these inverters, and you can also contact our
after service center in our Headquarters directly. We will serve you with all our
heart.
We reserve our right to notice you if we change contents of this manual.
　
Content
1 Safety information and use notice points …………………………………1
1.1 Safety precautions……………………………………………………1
1.2 Application range ……………………………………………………3
1.3 Use notice points ……………………………………………………3
1.4 Scraping handling notice ……………………………………………4
2 Inverter type and specification ……………………………………………5
2.1 Incoming inverter inspect ……………………………………………5
2.2 Type explanation ……………………………………………………5
2.3 Nameplate explanation ………………………………………………5
2.4 Inverter type explanation ……………………………………………6
2.5 Appearance and parts name explanation ……………………………7
C
2.6 Outer size ……………………………………………………………8
2.7 EN500 optional base …………………………………………………10
2.8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box………………………………12
N
2.9 Product technic index and spec ………………………………………13
3 Installation and wiring ……………………………………………………16
3.1 Installation ambient …………………………………………………16
3.1.1 The demands for installation ambient…………………………16
E
3.1.2 Installation direction and space ………………………………16

3.2 Parts disassembly and installation ……………………………………17
3.2.1 Keyboard disassembly and installation ………………………17
3.2.2 Cover disassembly and installation……………………………17
3.3 Wiring notice points …………………………………………………18
3.4 Main loop terminal wiring ……………………………………………19
3.4.1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts…………………21
3.4.2 Main loop terminal wiring ……………………………………22
3.5 Basic running wiring diagram…………………………………………25
3.6 Control loop collocation and wiring …………………………………25
3.6.1 Relative location and function for control
board terminal and slide switch ………………………………25
3.6.2 Descriptions for control board terminal ………………………27
3.6.3 Analog input&output terminal wiring…………………………29
3.6.4 Digital input terminal wiring …………………………………30
3.6.5 Communication terminal wiring………………………………32
4 EMC（Electromagnetic compatibility）explanation ……………………34
4.1 Noise interference restraining…………………………………………34
4.1.1 Interference noise type …………………………………………34
4.1.2 Basic countermeasure for restrain interference ………………35
4.2 Field wiring and earth grounding ……………………………………36
4.3 Leak current and countermeasure ……………………………………36
4.4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on-off electronic device……37
4.5 Noise filter installation instructions …………………………………37
5 C
Run and operation explanation for inverter ………………………………38
5.1 Run of inverter ………………………………………………………38
5.1.1 Running order channels ………………………………………38
N
5.1.2 Frequency-provision channel …………………………………38
5.1.3 Work state ……………………………………………………39
5.1.4 Run mode ……………………………………………………40
5.2 Operation and use of key board ………………………………………42
E
5.2.1 Keypad layout …………………………………………………42

5.2.2 Keypad function description …………………………………42
5.2.3 LED and indicator light ………………………………………43
5.2.4 Key board display status ………………………………………43
5.2.5 User Management Parameters…………………………………46
5.2.6 Method for operating keypad …………………………………46
5.3 Inverter electrification ………………………………………………49
5.3.1 Check before electrification …………………………………49
5.3.2 First electrification……………………………………………49
6 Function parameter schedule graph ………………………………………50
6.1 Symbol description……………………………………………………50
6.2 Function parameter schedule graph …………………………………50
7 Detailed function specification ……………………………………………93
7.1 System Parameter Group: F00 ………………………………………93
7.2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group:F01 …………………………102
7.3 Start, stop, forward/reverse,
brake function parameter group: F02…………………………………111
7.4 V/F control parameter group: F03 ……………………………………117
7.5 Auxiliary running parameter group: F04 ……………………………119
7.6 Communication control parameter group: F05 ………………………125
7.7 Setting curve parameter group: F06 …………………………………130
7.8 Analog quantity, Pulse input function parameter group: F07…………133
7.9 On-off input function parameter group: F08 …………………………137
7.10 Switch output function parameter group: F09 ………………………152
C
7.11 Simple PLC/Multi-speed function parameters Group:F10 …………164
7.12 Closed-Loop PID operation Parameters Group:F11…………………170
7.13 Constant pressure water supply function parameters Group: F12…………177
N
7.14 Traverse, Fixed-length control Function Parameters Group: F13……180
7.15 Vector Control parameters Group: F14 ………………………………184
7.16 Motor parameters Group: F15 ………………………………………190
7.17 Closed-loop encoder parameters Group: F16 ………………………192
E
7.18 Reserved parameters Group1:F17……………………………………195

7.19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group: F18 ………………196
7.20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group:F19 ………………201
7.21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group: F20 …………212
7.22 Reserved parameter group 2:F21 ……………………………………214
7.26 User Definition Display Parameter Group: F25 ……………………215
7.27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group: F26 ………………………217
7.28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group: F27 ………219
8 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………………220
8.1 Failure and countermeasure …………………………………………220
8.2 Failure record lookup …………………………………………………225
8.3 Failure reset …………………………………………………………226
8.4 Alarm reset ……………………………………………………………226
9 Maintenance ………………………………………………………………227
9.1 Routine maintenance …………………………………………………227
9.2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts ……………………227
9.3 Repair guarantee………………………………………………………228
9.4 Storage ………………………………………………………………229
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol ………………………………230
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol ……………………………244
Appendix C Keyboard ………………………………………………………256
C
C.1 Keyboard selection …………………………………………………256
C.2 LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard
C.3 LCD keyboard ………………………………………………………257
………………256
N
C.4 LED single-display keyboard…………………………………………262
C.5 Communication Component …………………………………………263
Appendix D Communication extension card ………………………………264
D.1 Communication card selection ………………………………………264
E
D.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card ………………………………264

D.3 CANopen communication card………………………………………267
D.4 CANlink communication card ………………………………………269
Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card………………………………271
Appendix F Integration expansion card ……………………………………274
Appendix G Braking unit and braking resistance ……………………………276
1 Safety information and use notice points

To make ensure personal & equipment safety, this chapter must be read carefully
before the inverter come into use.
1.1 Safety precautions
There are three kinds of safety warnings in this manual as below:
Symbol Symbol description
It may cause human death, serious injury or heavy property loss

! with wrong operation.
! C
It may result body or device damage with wrong and timeless
precautions under operation.
N
Should pay extra cautions when inverter in use under this
Note symbol
E
1
Forbid to cut off the power source directly when inverter under
running, acceleration or deceleration status. Power source could
! cut off when inverter completely in halt and standby status.
Otherwise user should be responsible for inverter and device
damage and human injury.
(1) Forbid to connect AC power source to output terminal U,V,W,

otherwise it could cause inverter completely damage.
(2) Not allow for short circuit between(-)and(+)，otherwise it could
cause inverter damage and power source short circuit.
(3) Forbid to install inverter on flammable objects, otherwise it
may cause fire.
(4) Do not install inverter in a environment with explosive gas, it
may cause explosion.
!
C
(5) Bare connection terminal should be insulation treatment after
main loop connection, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
(6) Do not operate inverter with wet hands when inverter power
on, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
N
(7) Inverter earth terminal should be well grounding connection.
(8) Do not open the front cover for wiring when inverter power on.
Inverter wiring and check must handle after 10 minutes of
inverter power off.
(9) Wiring connection should handle by qualified person and not
allow to slip any conductive objects inside inverter, otherwise it
E
may cause a electric shock or inverter damage.

(10) when inverter stocked for more than 6 months, using voltage
regulator to boost voltage up and keep inverter in standy status
for 1 hour, otherwise it may cause electric shock and explosion.
(1) Forbid to connect control terminals except TA, TB, TC to AC

220V/380V signal, otherwise it may cause inverter completely
damage.
! (2) Do not install and run inverter when inverter damage or spare
part less, otherwise it may cause fire or human injury.
(3) inverter should install in a place where can accept itself weight,
otherwise it may cause inverter drop down or belongings damage.
2
1.2 Application range

(1) This kind of inverter apply to 3 phase ac asynchronous motor only for general
industry.
(2) It should handle cautiously and consult with manufacturer when inverter apply
to high reliability required equipment which relevant to life, properties and safety
device.
(3) This kind of inverter is the general motor control device in industry. When
inverter apply to dangerous equipment, safeguard should be considerable in case
of inverter failure.
1.3 Use notice points
(1) EN500/EN600 series inverter belong to voltage type inverter, and it is normal
with up temperature, noise and vibration of motor increasing over power
frequency run slightly.
C
(2) It is required to match inverter with variable frequency motor running at low
speed with constant torque for long time. When match inverter with general
asynchronous motor running at low speed, it should take measures to make motor
heat dissipation or monitoring motor temperature in avoid of motor flash.
N
(3) It is necessary to take measures in advance for the damage caused for the bad
lubrication of the reduction box and wheel gear mechanical devices running at
low speed for long time.
(4) It is necessary to assure at first that the use speed range of motor bearings and
mechanical devices, also the increasing of motor vibration and noise should be
E
considered, when motor run over rated frequency.

(5) It is necessary to select the suitable brake assembly for hoisting device and big
inertia load to make sure the normal work when inverter stripping from power
grid for the overcurrent or overvoltage failure.
(6) Inverter start and stop control through terminal or other normal command
channel, otherwise it may cause inverter damage via connecting inverter input
terminal to big current switch just like contactor direct to start and stop inverter
frequently.
(7) It is necessary to make sure inverter cut off from operation without output,
when inverter and motor connect through switch components just like contactor
etc. Otherwise it will cause inverter damage.
(8) When inverter output frequency within some range, it may meet mechanical
resonance point of load device, through setting jump frequency to avoid it.
(9) Checking power supply voltage within allowed working range before usage,
otherwise, it need to change voltage or custom special voltage inverter.
3
(10)When inverter usage site altitude over1000 meters，inverter should derate

current to use, output current decrease about 10% of rated current per 1000 meters
increase.
(11)Motor should do insulation check before first usage or reusage after lay aside
for long time. Checking method show as graph 1-1 below with 500V voltage type
megohm meter , insulation resistance should not smaller than 5 MΩ，otherwise
inverter maybe damaged.
(12)Forbid inverter output side to assemble capacitor to improve power factor or
anti-thunder dependent resistor etc, otherwise it may cause inverter fault trip or
component damage show as graph 1-2.
EN500/EN600
After wiring finish, short-circuit U,V,W

to measure insulation resistance
U
U VW C
motor EN500/EN600 V
EDS1000
W
M
N
Ground
Megohmmeter
Fig.1-1 motor insulation check Fig.1-2 capacitor at output side forbidden
1.4 Scraping handling notice:

E
Notices when handling with scrapped inverter and components:

(1) The unit: dispose the inverter as industrial waste.
(2) Electrolytic capacitor: It may cause explosion when electrolytic capacitor
under burning.
(3)Plastic: it may result in harmful and poisonous gas when plastic and rubber of
inverter burning, and safeguard preparations should be taken before burning.
4
2 Inverter type and specification

2.1 Incoming inverter inspect
(1) Check if there is damage during transportation and inverter itself has damage
or fall-off parts.
(2) Check if parts presented in packing list are all ready.
(3) Please confirm nameplate data of the inverter is in line with your order
requirement.
Our product is guaranteed by strict quality system during manufacturing, packing,
transportation etc., please contact our company or local agent rapidly
if some careless omission or mistake arise, we’ll deal with it as soon as
possible.
2.2 Type explanation
EN600 – 4T 0015G / 0022P B
Code
EN500
EN600
Code
Name
Series No.
Series No.
Volt. grade
C Code
Code
accessories
Inbuilt brake unit
Dedicated fan
&pump
motor power
N
2S 1 phase 220V
(KW)
4T 3 phase 380V 0015P 1.5
Constant torque 0022P 2.2
general type
Code motor power … …
(KW)
6300P 630
0004 0.4
E
0007 0.75
… …
5600G 560
6300G 630 Fig.2-1 Type description
2.3 Nameplate explanation
Nameplate presented as figure 2-2 with type and rating data at the bottom of
inverter right side.
Series No.
Type
Rated input vol. And freq.
Motor power and output current
Serial No.
Manufacturer and origin
Fig.2-2 Nameplate
5
2.4 Inverter type explanation

Input Rated output Adaptable motor
Inverter type
Voltage Current(A) (KW)
EN600-2S0004 2.5 0.4
EN600-2S0007 4 0.75
1 phase
EN600-2S0015 7 1.5
220V
EN600-2S0022 10 2.2
EN600-2S0037 15 3.7
EN600-4T0007G/0015P 2.3/3.7 0.75/1.5
EN600-4T0015G/0022P 3.7/5 1.5/2.2
EN600-4T0022G/0037P 5/8.5 2.2/3.7
EN600-4T0037G/0055P 8.5/13 3.7/5.5
EN600-4T0055G/0075P 13/17 5.5/7.5
EN600-4T0075G/0110P 17/25 7.5/11
EN600-4T0110G/0150P
EN600-4T0150G/0185P
EN600-4T0185G/0220P
EN600-4T0220G/0300P
C 25/33
33/39
39/45
45/60
11/15
15/18.5
18.5/22
22/30
N
EN600-4T0300G/0370P 60/75 30/37
EN600-4T0370G/0450P 75/91 37/45
EN600-4T0450G/0550P 91/112 45/55
3 phase EN600-4T0550G/0750P 112/150 55/75
E
380V EN500-4T0750G/0900P 150/176 75/90

EN500-4T0900G/1100P 176/210 90/110
EN500-4T1100G/1320P 210/253 110/132
EN500-4T1320G/1600P 253/304 132/160
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 304/380 160/200
EN500-4T2000G/2200P 380/426 200/220
EN500-4T2200G/2500P 426/474 220/250
EN500-4T2500G/2800P 474/520 250/280
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 520/600 280/315
EN500-4T3150G/3550P 600/650 315/355
EN500-4T3550G/3750P 650/680 355/375
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 680/750 375/400
EN500-4T4000G/4500P 750/800 400/450
EN500-4T4500G/5000P 800/870 450/500
6
EN500-4T5000G/5600P 870/940 500/560

EN500-4T5600G/6300P 940/1100 560/630
EN500-4T6300G 1100 630
2.5 Appearance and parts name explanation

2.5.1 EN600 Appearance and parts name explanation
Upcover上面盖
plate digital tube
LED数码管 digital tube
LED数码管
Upcover上面盖
plate
Operation
操作键盘 keyboard
Operation
操作键盘 keyboard
Down cover下面盖
plate
Down cover下面盖
plate
Control cable inlet

控制电缆入口
Nameplate
变频器铭牌 Control cable
控制电缆入口
inlet Nameplate
变频器铭牌
Fan风扇孔
hole C
Input
inlet
& output
输入、输出电
源电缆线入口
power cable
Fig.2-3 EN600 Parts name sketch

Fan通风孔
hole Input
输入、输出电
power
源电缆线入口
& output
cable inlet
N
2.5.2 EN500 Appearance and parts name explanation
Operation keyboard
Cover door
Operation keyboard
Upcover plate
E
Input & output

power cable inlet Control cable inlet Input & output
power cable
Bottom installation inlet Control cable inlet
hole Bottom installation hole
Fig.2-4 EN500 Parts name sketch
7
2.6 Outer size
B
B
H
A
W D A
W D
D2 D1
D2
Fig.a Fig.b
W
W1 A细节
detail
C D2
D
W
W1 A detail
A细节
D2
D
N
H1
H
H1
H
W2 B细节
B detail
N1 B细节
B detail N1 N2
1 M1
M
M1 M1
N2 M
2
M2 A detail
A细节 B detail
B细节
A detail
A细节 BB细节
detail
Fig.c Fig.d
8
Ｄ２
ＨＷＤ
Ｗ１
Ｄ１
Ｍ２
Ｍ１
Fig.e
C
Fig.2-5 Outer dimension
Table 2-1 EN600 mounting size
N
A B W H D D1 D2 Fix Hole
Inverter type Fig. No.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
EN600-2S0004
EN600-2S0007
104 186 115 200 151 - 164 5 Fig.a
EN600-2S0015
E
EN600-2S0022
EN600-2S0037 129 227 140 240 175 - 188 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0007G/0015P
EN600-4T0015G/0022P
104 186 115 200 151 - 164 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0022G/0037P
EN600-4T0037G/0055P
EN600-4T0055G/0075P
129 227 140 240 175 - 188 5 Fig.a
EN600-4T0075G/0110P
EN600-4T0110G/0150P
165 281 180 304 189 - 202 6 Fig.a
EN600-4T0150G/0185P
EN600-4T0185G/0220P
180 382 250 398 210 214 223 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0220G/0300P
EN600-4T0300G/0370P
180 434 280 450 240 244 253 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0370G/0450P
EN600-4T0450G/0550P
190 504.5 290 530 250 254 263 9 Fig.b
EN600-4T0550G/0750P
9
Table 2-2 EN500 mounting size

H H1 W W1 W2 D D1 D2 N1 N2 M1 M2 Fig.
Inverter type
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) No.
EN500-4T0750G/0900P
570 546 340 237 - 320 - 333 - - Φ12 Φ18
EN500-4T0900G/1100P
EN500-4T1100G/1320P 650 628 400 297 - 340 - 353 - - Φ12 Φ18
EN500-4T1320G/1600P 650 628 420 297 - 340 - 353 - - Φ12 Φ18 Fig.c
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 980 953 480 370 - 400 - 413 Φ38 Φ19 Φ9 Φ18
EN500-4T2000G/2200P
1030 1003 500 370 - 400 - 413 Φ38 Φ19 Φ9 Φ18
EN500-4T2200G/2500P
EN500-4T2500G/2800P
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 1368 1322 700 500 440 430 - 443 Φ52 Φ19 Φ12 Φ22
EN500-4T3150G/3550P
Fig.d
EN500-4T3550G/3750P
OB
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 1518 1483 700 500 500 430 - 443 Φ19 Φ12 Φ22
77*47
EN500-4T4000G/4500P
EN500-4T4500G/5000P
EN500-4T5000G/5600P
EN500-4T5600G/6300P
EN500-4T6300G
1650
1700
-
-
C
850
900
700
750
-
-
550
550
490
490
563
563
-
-
-
-
40
40
Φ13
Φ13
Fig.e
N
2.7 EN500 optional base
2.7.1 EN500 inverter and base selection table
Base model
Type base with Input Base with base with DC
E
Standard base
reactor output reactor reactor
EN500-4T0750G/0900P SP-BS-0750-LI SP-BS-0900-LO SP-BS-0750-LD
SP-BS-0900
EN500-4T0900G/1100P SP-BS-0900-LI SP-BS-0900-LO -
EN500-4T1100G/1320P SP-BS-1100 SP-BS-1100-LI SP-BS-1100-LO -
SP-BS-2200
SP-BS-4000
10
2.7.2 Base outer dimension
Ho
Ho
W D1 W D1
Fig.a
C
Fig.2-6 base dimension
Fig.b
N
Table 2-3 base size
W D1 Ho
Base model Fig.
（mm）（mm）（mm）
SP-BS-0900 340 300 180
E
SP-BS-0750-LI
SP-BS-0750-LD
340 300 350
SP-BS-0900-LI
SP-BS-0900-LO
SP-BS-1100 400 320 180
SP-BS-1100-LI
400 320 380
SP-BS-1100-LO Fig.a
SP-BS-1320 420 320 180
SP-BS-1320-LI
420 320 380
SP-BS-1320-LO
SP-BS-1600 480 380 180
SP-BS-1600-LI
480 380 400
SP-BS-1600-LO
SP-BS-2200 500 380 200
11
SP-BS-2000-LI
SP-BS-2000-LO
500 380 400
SP-BS-2200-LI
SP-BS-2200-LO
SP-BS-4000 700 430 204
SP-BS-2500-LI
SP-BS-2500-LO
SP-BS-2800-LI
700 430 400
SP-BS-2800-LO Fig.b
SP-BS-3150-LI
SP-BS-3150-LO
SP-BS-4000-LI
700 430 450
SP-BS-4000-LO
67 16 64.5
C
2.8 Outer size of keypad and its fixing box(unit:mm)
88 17.9 82.8
N
7.1
140
134.5
109.5
107.5
E
Fig.2-7 Mounting size of keypad Fig.2-8 Hole size of keypad
1. EN-LCD2 long-distance keypad outer lead, do not support

keypad holder installed, only keypad installed support, mounting
size refer to Fig.2-7.
2. Except EN-LCD2 long-distance keypad, when other keypad
Note outer lead, user can adjust the hole size under actual situation on
keypad or keypad holder; thickness of install board between 1.0～
1.5mm is suggested.
3. When installed with keypad holder, it need to buy extra.
12
2.9 Product technic index and spec

Item Item description
1 phase 220V Grade：1 phase 220V, 50Hz/60Hz
Rating volt., frequency
Input
3 phase 380V Grade：3 phase 380V, 50Hz/60Hz

1 phase 220V Grade：200～260V
Allowed volt. range
3 phase 380V Grade：320～460V
Voltage 0～380V
Frequency 0～600Hz
Output
G type：150% of rated current for 1 minute;

Over loading capacity
P type：120% of rated current for 1 minute.
vector control, PG vector control, open-loop V/F control, torque
Control mode
control, PG torque control
±0.5% rated synchronous speed（vector control）；
Velocity control
±0.1% rated synchronous speed（PG vector control）；
precision
±1% rated synchronous speed（V/F control）；
1：2000（PG vector control）
Speed regulation range 1：100（vector control）；
Start-up torque
C
1：50（V/F control）；
1.0Hz：150% rated torque（V/F control）；
0.5Hz：150% rated torque (vector control)；
0Hz：180% rated torque（PG vector control）；
±0.3% rated synchronous speed（vector control）；
N
Speed fluctuation
±0.1% rated synchronous speed（PG vector control）；
Torque control ±10% rated torque（vector control，torque control）；
precision ±5% rated torque（PG vector control，PG torque control）.
Control Performance
≤20ms（vector control）；
Torque response
≤10ms（PG vector control）；
E
Digital setting：max. frequency×±0.01%；Analog setting：max.

Frequency precision
frequency×±0.5%
Analog
0.1% of max. frequency
setting
Digital
Freq.
setting 0.01Hz
resolution
precision
Exterior
0.1% of max. frequency
impulse
Torque boost Automatic torque boost；manual torque boost 0.1～12.0%
V/F curve(volt. Setting rated frequency at the range of 5～650Hz，by choosing
Frequency constant torque, degressive torque 1, degressive torque 2,
characteristic) degressive torque 3, self-defined V/F total 5 kinds of curve.
Two modes：straight line acceleration and deceleration; S curve
Acceleration acceleration and deceleration; 15 kinds of acceleration and
Deceleration curve deceleration time，time unit (0.01s, 0.1s, 1s) for option ，max. time
for 1000 minutes.
13
EN600 3 phase 15KW & under power range with inbuilt brake
unit，only add brake resistor between（+）and PB.
Power
18.5KW & up power range is possible to add brake unit between
consumption
（+）and（-）outside; or extra connect brake unit with adding brake
brake brake
resistor between（+）and PB.
EN500 series can connect brake unit between（+）and（-）outside.
Start, stop action for option, action frequency 0～15Hz，action
DC brake
current 0～100% of rated current，action time 0～30.0s
Jog frequency range：0Hz～up limit frequency；jog acceleration
jog
and deceleration time 0.1～6000.0 seconds for setting.
Realized by inbuilt PLC or control terminal; with 15 section speed,
Multi-section speed
each section speed with separately acceleration and deceleration
run
time; with inbuilt PLC can achieve reserve when power down.
Inbuilt PID controller Convenient to make closed-loop control system
Automatic energy Optimize V/F curve automatically to achieve power saving run
saving run according to the load status.
Automatic voltage Automatically keep output voltage constant, when the power grid
regulate(AVR) voltage fluctuation
Automatic current Current limited automatically under run mode in avoid of inverter
limiting
carrier modulation
C
over-current frequently to trip.
Modulate carrier wave automatically according to the load
characteristic.
Speed tracking restart Make rotating motor smoothly start without shocking
N
running command Keypad specified, control terminal specified, communication
specified channel specified can switch through various means.
Running function
Main & auxiliary specified to a realize one main adjusting and one
Running frequency fine control. Digital specified, analog specified, pulse specified,
specified channel pulse width specified, communication specified and others, which
can be switched by many means at any time.
E
Run command channel and frequency specified channel can bind

Binding function
together randomly and switch synchronously
Channel 8 for universal digital input, max. Frequency 1KHz,
Digital input channel channel 1 can be used as pulse input channel, max. Input 50KHz，
which can be expanded to channel 14 .
Input output characteristic
Channel 2 for analog input channel, AI1 can choose 4～20mA or

0～10V output，AI2 is differential input channel，4～20mA or
Analog input channel
-10～10V for option，which can be expanded to channel 4 analog
input.
0.1 ～ 20KHz pulse square signal output to achieve setting
Pulse output channel
frequency, output frequency and other physical quantity output.
Channel 2 for analog signal output, AO1 can choose 4～20mA or
0～10V，AO2 can choose 4～20mA or 0～10Vto achieve setting
Analog output channel
frequency, output frequency and other physical quantity output,
which can be expanded to channel 4 analog output.
14
Limit inverter over current to the greatest point, and make it run
Rapid current limit
more stably
Suitable for working site where need one button to control inverter
Unique function
Monopulse control start and stop, first press to start, then press to stop, and that cycle
repeats. Its very simple and reliable.
Fixed length control Realize fixed length control
Timing control Timing control function: setting time range 0.1Min ～ 6500.0Min
Five group virtual input & output IO can realize simply logical
Virtual terminal
control
The parameters as setting frequency, output frequency, output
Keypad display
keypad
voltage, output current can be displayed

Button Locked Lock all or part of the buttons
Motor power on Shot circuit test, input & output phase loss
protection, over-current protection, over voltage protection, under
Protection function voltage protection, over heat protection, overload protection, under
load protection, relay absorption protection, terminal protection
and no stop protection under power off.
Indoor, not bare to sunlight, no dust, no corrosive gas, no
Application site
Altitude
C
flammable gas, no vapor, no water drop or salt etc.
Under 1000 meter.（above 1000 meter require to reduce volume to
use, output current reduce about 10% of rated currenvolt per 1000
Environment
meter high）
Environment -10℃～+40℃ ( environment temperature between 40℃～50℃,
N
temperature need to reduce volume or strengthen heat sink )
Environment humidity Smaller than 95%RH，no drop condenses
Vibration Smaller than 5.9 M/S²(0.6g)
Storage temperature -40℃～+70℃
E
Protection grade IP20

structure
Cooling mode Forced air cooling and natural
Installation mode Wall hanging and cabinet installation
To get a perfect usage performance of the inverter, Please check and

select right type according to this chapter before wiring.
Note
It is necessary to select right type, otherwise it may cause motor

! abnormal run or inverter damage.
15
3 Installation and wiring

3.1 Installation ambient
3.1.1 The demands for installation ambient
(1) Installed in drafty indoor place，the ambient temperature should be within
-10ºC~40ºC，it needs external compulsory heat sink or reduce the volume if
temperature is over than 40ºC; when temperature under -10℃, please preheat
inverter first.
(2) Avoid installing in places with direct sunlight, much dust, floating fiber and
metal powder.
(3) Don’t install in place with corrosive, explosive gas.
(4) The humidity should be smaller than 95%RH，without condensation water.
(5) Installed in place of plane fixing vibration smaller than 5.9m/s²(0.6g).
(6) Keep away from electromagnetic disturbance source and other electronic
apparatus sensible to electromagnetic disturbance.
C
3.1.2 Installation direction and space
(1) Normally the inverter should be mounted vertically, horizontal mounting will
seriously affect heat dissipation and the inverter must be used in lower volume.
(2) Demand for minimum mounting space and distance，please see Fig.3-1.
N
(3) When installing multiple inverters up and down, leading divider must be
applied between them, see fig. 3-2.
风扇
Fan排气
exhaust 200mmabove
200mm 以上
风扇
E
Fan exhaust
排气 110mm above
110mm以上
100mm 100mm
50mm 50mm 100mm 100mm
50mm 50mm 以上以上
以上以上 above above
above above
110mm above
110mm以上
200mmabove
200mm 以上
a：15KW & down power b：18.5KW & up power

Fig.3-1 mounting space
16
Leading divider
Fig.3-2 mounting of multiple inverters
3.2 Parts disassembly and installation

3.2.1 C
Keyboard disassembly and installation
(1) Disassembly
Let the forefinger press finger inlet on the keypad，
depress fixing flexible plate on the top lightly, Assemble
Assemble
安安安
N
hook
hook
draw it outward, then you can disassemble
the keypad.
(2) Assembly Assemble
钩钩
hook mouth
First interface the fixed hook of on the bottom hook
安安安
of keyboard with the keyboard installation claw
E
of inverter, then press the fixed shrapnel on the top

of keyboard to push it assemble well properly
(keyboard assemble well when sounding of crisp)，
show as Fig.3-3. Fig.3-3 Keypad assembly
3.2.2 Cover disassembly and installation
3.2.2.1 Cover disassembly and installation
(1) Disassembly
Located the thumbs to the side bayonet,
the ring fingers on the joint of the up and
down cover, with thumbs press inside and
pull upside at the same time until the bayonet snap
卡扣
joint
open between cover and whole case, then pull
back cover to make it off the inverter.
Fig.3-4 metal cover disassemble and assembly
17
(2) Assembly
1) tilt cover at 5~10 degree；
2) interface installation claw with hook on the top of inverter, press down heavily till
cover bayonet enter into the holes of two side completely, show as Fig.3-4.
3.2.2.2 Metal cover disassembly and installation:
(1) Disassembly
First take off 2 screws at the side of the cover
and move it a bit outward horizontally, then tilt
it at 15 degree and draw it outward at the direction
shown in right figure, now you can take the cover off.
(2) Assembly
First put down the cover in parallel with unit body
and make it just locked at two sides of the inverter,
secondly force it ahead and make fixing part on its
top inserted into fixing slot of unit body, at last screw
As shown in Fig.3-5
3.3 Wiring notice points
C
the cover and finish assembly for the cover. Fig.3-5 metal cover disassemble
and assembly
N
⑴Assure power be cut off completely for above 10 minutes before
wiring, otherwise there is danger of getting electric shock.
⑵ Forbid connecting power wire to output U, V, W of the inverter.
⑶ If there is current leakage inside inverter, inverter and motor must be
earth grounding for safety assurance, please refer to clause 8 in Chapter
E
3.4.1 for grounding wiring.

⑷ Before shipment compression resistance test of the inverter is
Passed, so users should not conduct compression resistance test again.
⑸ Do not add absorbing capacitor or other resistance-capacitor
! absorbing device between inverter and motor; also do not add
electromagnetic contact. If contactor and other switch component
needed to add, please make sure inverter suspended without output,
show as Fig.3-6
⑹ To provide inverter over-current protection in output side and
convenient maintenance under power off, it should be connected to
power source through air switch and contactor.
⑺ Control signal wire should select multicore stranded wire or
shielding wire. One end of the shielding layer hang in the air, and the
other end connect to inverter earth grounding terminal, connection wire
shorter than 20m.
18
⑴Before wiring, assure power supply is cut off completely for 10

minutes and all LED or LCD indicator light extinguished.
⑵ Before inverter internal wiring, confirm that DC volt. Between main
loop end P+ and P- fall down to below DC36V.
! ⑶ Wiring can only be done by professional person trained and qualified.
⑷ Before power on, check if voltage grade of the inverter is in line with
that of power supply volt., otherwise will cause personnel injured and
device damaged.
U
inverter V M
W
Fig.3-6
C
Forbid to use contactor and absorbing capacitor
3.4 Main loop terminal wiring
N
Air switch
空气开关 contactor
breaker
（断路器）接触器
R
EN500/ U
3三相 EN600
M
phase
V
交流 S W
E
AC
电源
power T
Fig.3-7 main loop simple wiring

To keep user power grid safety, please choose proper air switch, breaker, wiring at
power input side，parameter recommended show as Table 3-1（Remark：wire
must choose PVC insulation copper conductor).
19
Table 3-1 parameter recommended for air switch（breaker), contactor and

wire selection
Air switch Contactor Input Output Control
Type or breaker （A） power wire motor cable signal wire
（A） mm2 mm2 mm2
EN600-2S0004 6 9 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-2S0007 10 12 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-2S0015 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-2S0022 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-2S0037 20 25 2.5 2.5 0.75
EN600-4T0007G/0015P 6 9 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-4T0015G/0022P 10 12 0.75 0.75 0.5
EN600-4T0022G/0037P 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-4T0037G/0055P 16 18 1.5 1.5 0.5
EN600-4T0055G/0075P 20 25 2.5 2.5 0.75
EN600-4T0075G/0110P 25 25 4.0 4.0 0.75
EN600-4T0110G/0150P 32 32 6.0 6.0 0.75
EN600-4T0150G/0185P 40 40 6.0 6.0 0.75
EN600-4T0185G/0220P
EN600-4T0220G/0300P
EN600-4T0300G/0370P
EN600-4T0370G/0450P
EN600-4T0450G/0550P
C
50
50
63
80
100
50
50
63
80
115
10
10
16
25
35
10
10
16
25
35
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
N
EN600-4T0550G/0750P 125 125 50 50 1.0
EN500-4T0750G/0900P 250 160 70 70 1.5
EN500-4T0900G/1100P 250 160 75 75 1.5
EN500-4T1100G/1320P 350 350 120 120 1.5
EN500-4T1320G/1600P 400 400 120 120 1.5
E
EN500-4T1600G/2000P 500 500 150 150 1.5

EN500-4T2000G/2200P 630 630 185 185 1.5
EN500-4T2200G/2500P 700 700 240 240 1.5
EN500-4T2500G/2800P 800 800 120*2 120*2 1.5
EN500-4T2800G/3150P 800 800 120*2 120*2 1.5
EN500-4T3150G/3550P 1000 1000 150*2 150*2 1.5
EN500-4T3550G/3750P 1000 1000 185*2 185*2 1.5
EN500-4T3750G/4000P 1250 1250 240*2 240*2 1.5
EN500-4T4000G/4500P 1250 1250 240*2 240*2 1.5
EN500-4T4500G/5000P 1250 1250 270*2 270*2 1.5
EN500-4T5000G/5600P 1600 1600 270*2 270*2 1.5
EN500-4T5600G/6300P 1600 1600 300*2 300*2 1.5
EN500-4T6300G 2000 2000 300*2 300*2 1.5
20
3.4.1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts

(1) Breaking device like isolation R
S
Switch must assemble between power T
N
source and inverter to keep persona
safety under repairing and
inverter requirement for compulsory power off. 空气开关
Isolation switch
(2) There must be over-current
Protection breaker or fuse in inverter 断路器或熔断器
Breaker or fuse
power supply circuit to avoid failure
expanding because of the second device failure. Ac input reactor( In option)
交流输入电抗器(可选)
(3) AC input reactor
Contactor
接触器
When high harmonics between inverter
and power supply is strong which cannot Input EMI filter( In option)
输入EMI滤波器(可选)
meet system requirement or input side
power factor need to improve, ac input reactor
can be added. R S T
(4) Contactor is used to power supply only, EN500/EN600
(+) 制动单元(可选)
hoosing optionally EMI filter to

C
do not use it to control inverter start and stop.
(5) Input side EMI filter
restrain high frequency transduction

interference and radio-frequency
U V W
(-)
Brake unit( In option)
Output EMI filter( In option)

输出EMI滤波器(可选)
N
interference from inverter power line. 交流输出电抗器(可选)
Ac output reactor( In option)
(6) Output side EMI filter
Choosing optionally EMI filter to M
restrain radio-frequency Interference
and wire leakage current from inverter Fig.3-8 connection of inverter and
E
output side.
fitting parts
(7) AC output reactor
Installing AC output reactor is suggested
to avoid motor insulation damage, oversize current leakage and inverter frequent
protection when connecting wire between inverter and motor exceeds 50m.
(8) Safety earth ground wire
Inverter and motor must be earth ground connection, connection wire should
select as shorter and thicker as above 3.5mm² multicore copper wire, and earth
grounding resistance smaller than10Ω.
21
3.4.2 Main loop terminal wiring

（1）Main loop input output terminal show as table 3-2, 3-3.
Table 3-2 EN600 main loop input output terminal description
Terminal
Adapted type Main loop terminal Function description
name
1 phase AC input terminal,
L1、L2
connect power source
（+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-2S0004 External connect to brake
PB
～ resistor reverse terminal
EN600-2S0037 （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
EN600-4T0007G/0015P
～
EN600-4T0150G/0185P
R S
C
T (+) PB (-) U V W
PB
（-）
U、V、W
External connect to brake
resistor reverse terminal
DC volt. Negative terminal
connect to motor
N
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
Terminal 1： connect power source
P、（+） External connect to DC reactor
E
EN600-4T0185G/0220P PB
EN600-4T0220G/0300P Terminal 2：（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
R S T (+) PB (-) U V W U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
Terminal 1： connect power source
PB
R S T P (+) (-) U V W
EN600-4T0300G/0370P （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-4T0370G/0450P Terminal 2：（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
U、V、W
connect to motor
R S T PB (+) (-) U V W
Grounding terminal
22

Terminal 1： R、S、T
PB
R S T P (+) (-) U V W
EN600-4T0450G/0550P （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN600-4T0550G/0750P
Terminal 2：（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
U、V、W
connect to motor
R S T PB (+) (-) U V W
Grounding terminal
Note：
① EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P there are two kinds
of sort order for main loop terminal, terminal 2 remove “P”，add “PB” terminal.
② EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P（terminal 1）short circuit
diagram of copper bar assembly on main loop terminal
C edgefold assembly in up direction for short
circuit copper bar
短接铜排折边向上安装
Short circuit copper bar
短接铜排
N
edgefold
折边 in up
direction
Table 3-3 EN500 main loop input output terminal description

Terminal
E
Adapted type Main loop terminal Function description

name
R、S、T
（-） DC volt. Negative terminal
External connect to DC
EN500-4T0750G/0900P P、（+）
reactor
R S T P （+）
（-） U V W （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
EN500-4T0900G/1100P （-） DC volt. Negative terminal
～（+）、（-）External connect brake unit
EN500-4T1320G/1600P
R S T （+）（-）U V W 3 phase AC output terminal，
U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
23

R、S、T
R S T （+） U V W
～
EN500-4T2200G/2500P （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
(-)
U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
R S T (+) U V W （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
～ (-) （+）、（-）External connect brake unit
EN500-4T4000G/4500P
U、V、W
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
R、S、T
R S T （+） (－) （+） DC volt. Positive terminal
EN500-4T4500G/5000P
～
EN500-4T6300G
U
C V W
（-）
U、V、W
DC volt. Negative terminal
connect to motor
Grounding terminal
N
1. The wiring of main loop must connect right according to the
description above. Wrong wiring will cause device damage and personal
injury.
! 2. Short circuit copper bar assembly for 18.5KW and up power (terminal
E
1) for EN600 must be edgefold in up direction，or it will cause device

damage and personal injury in the reverse direction.
24
3.5 Basic running wiring diagram
Brake resistance(External connect fitting part)

Brake unit(External connect fitting part)
(L1 220V AC)

(L2 220V AC) EN500/ EN600
multi-function input
internal optocoupler isolation input

X terminal active, electric level
support high level and low level Relay load
Lower level valid---short circuit
C
slice connect PW and +24V,
external wiring show as solid line
high level valid---short circuit slice
connect PW and COM, external
wiring show as dotted line
(Used as hi-speed pulse input

Analog output type
AO1 switch SW3
Do: Frequency meter
24V pulse
N
terminal DI) voltmeter
AO2 switch SW4
amperemeter
Short when external power source used,
circuit remove the short circuit slice
slice
RLY1 output（F09.04）
Open open
E
Close close
Analog input type SW1 switch(AI1 valid) Com-mon
Analog input type SW2 switch(AI2 valid)
voltage input
current input Twisted-pair cable
voltage input communication port
current input
Must set parameter F00.20 when SW2 switch
Fig.3-9 basic wiring diagram

Note：When connect to external DC reactor, it need to remove the short-circuit
copper bar between P and（+）.
3.6 Control loop collocation and wiring
3.6.1 Relative location and function for control board terminal and slide
switch：
Control board terminal and slide switch location show as Fig 3-10.
The terminal CN1 and CN7 are used by the manufacturers，CN2 is extended
25
interface，CN5 is for keypad，The CN3,CN4 and CN6 for users can be seen in
table 3-4，The setting description and function of slide switch check table3-5.
Please read the following descriptions carefully before using inverter.
C
N
E
Fig.3-10 sketch map of CPU board

Table 3-4 function description of terminal provided for user
No. Function Description
Input and output control To use when inverter run under external terminal control ,
CN3 of external terminal refer to 3.6.2
TA-TC is normal open contact；TB-TC is normal closed

CN4 Signal output of RLY1
contact，refer to 3.6.2
26
CrystalRS485communicat To use when inverter through 485 communication can

CN6
ion interface achieve cascade connection and other control, refer to 3.6.2
Table 3-5 Slide switch function description for users

No. Function Setting Default value
V：F00.20 be XXX0
AI1 Analog input signal 0～+10V voltage signal input F00.20 be 0000
SW1
selection 0～+10V
I：F00.20 be XXX1
4～20mA current signal input
V： F00.20 be XX0X，
AI2 Analog input signal -10V～+10V voltage signal input F00.20 be 0000
SW2
selection -10V～+10V
I：F00.20 be XX1X，
4～20mA current signal input
SW3
SW4
AO1 Analog output signal
selection
AO2 Analog output signal

C V：F00.21 be XX00
0～+10V voltage signal output
I：F00.21 be XX11
F00.21 be 0000
0～+10V
N
selection
4～20mA current signal output
EMI inhibition for selection ：earth grounding

SW5 suspending
terminal
：suspending
E
(1) In the graphic of slide switch, black square means switch

slidable location.
(2) Only when heavy interfering exist on working site, it’s
Note suggested to put EMI dial switch to earth grounding location, and
should connect to the earth.
3.6.2 Descriptions for control board terminal

⑴ CN3 and CN4 terminal layout as following
ＣＮ４
ＣＮ３
27
⑵ CN3 and CN4 terminal function description show as Table 3-6

Table 3-6 function table for control board terminal
Type Symbol Description Terminal Function and specification
X1 Multifunction input 1
Multfunction input terminal
X2 Multifunction input 2 Input voltage range：15～30V；

X3 Multifunction input 3 Opto coupler isolation, Compatible with bipolar
X4 Multifunction input 4 input；
X5 Multifunction input 5 Input impedance：4.7KΩ
X6 Multifunction input 6 max input frequency：1KHz
X7 Multifunction input 7
Except for X1～X7 function，it can be used as
Multifunction input 8/
hi-speed pulse input.
X8/DI high-speed pulse
Input impedance：2.2KΩ
input
max input frequency：50KHz
Provide +24V power to external device（24±4V）
+24V +24V power source
Max output current：200mA
factory default connect to +24V；when use external
PW
C
External power source signal to drive X terminal，it need to connect to
Power source
input external power source and cut off with +24V

power terminal.
Provide +10Vpower to external device（10±0.5V）
+10V +10V power source
Max output current:50mA
N
Reference ground for digital signal and +24V
COM Common interface
power
Reference ground for analog signal and +10V
GND Common interface
power
Input range：DC 0V～10V/4～20mA，selected by
SW1 dial switch on control board.
E
AI1 Analog input 1 Input impedance：voltage input at 20KΩ； current

Analog input
input at 250Ω.
resolution：1/4000
Input range：DC-10V～10V/4～20mA，selected by
the second figure of F00.20 and SW2 dial switch
on control board.
AI2 Analog input 2
Input impedance：voltage input at 20KΩ；current
input at 250Ω.
resolution：1/2000
Voltage or current output is selected by SW3
AO1 Analog output 1
（AO1）and SW4（AO2） dial switch on control
Analog
board.
output
AO2 Analog output 2 Output voltage range：0～10V
Output current range：4～20mA
Open circuit collector
Y1
Multi- output 1 Opto coupler isolation output ， unipolar Open
function Open circuit collector circuit collector output
Y2
output output 2 Max voltage output：30V
terminal Open circuit collector Max current output：50mA
Y3
output 3
28
Function code F00.22 to select terminal output

Open circuit collector mode
output 4/ When Open circuit collector output, with the same
Y4/DO
High-speed impulse spec as terminal Y.
output When High-speed impulse
output，the max frequency is 20KHz.
Normal closed
TB—TC Contact capacity：AC250V/2A（cosφ=1）
RLY1 terminal
AC250V/1A（cosφ=0.4）
output Normal open
TA—TC DC30V/1A
terminal
Communi 485+ 485 differential signal positive terminal
485 differential
cation
485- signal interface 485 differential signal negative terminal
interface
CN2 retain
Auxiliary StandardRS485
interface CN6 communication Twisted-pair cable or shield wire to connect
interface
⑶ RS485 crystal outlet CN6 layout as following
1 2345 678 Name

No. 1
C
485+
2
485-
RS485 terminal CN6 layout
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
N
3.6.3 Analog input&output terminal wiring
(1) AI1 receive analog voltage or current signal single-ended input, switch
through SW1, wire as below：
E
AI1 voltage input
+10V SW1
EN500/
0～+10V
+ 或4～20mA AI1 EN600
0～10V
or
- Shield cable near-end earth GND AI1 current input
屏蔽线近端接地
grounding
SW1
4～20mA
Fig.3-11 AI1 terminal wiring diagram
29
(2) AI2 receive analog voltage or current signal single-ended input, switch through
SW2，and should match it with exact second figure of F00.20 setting, wire as
below：
AI2 voltage input
+10V SW2
EN500/
EN600
-10V～+10V
+ or或4～20mA AI2
-10～10V
- GND
AI2 current input
屏蔽线近端接地
Shield cable near-end
earth grounding
SW2
4～20mA
Fig.3-12 AI2 terminal wiring diagram
(3) AO1,AO2 terminal can connect to external analog meter, which can indicate
C
several physical quantity，it can select analog voltage or current signal output，and
switch through SW3 and SW4，wire as below：
AO1,AO2 voltage output

N
模拟表
Analog meter
SW3,SW4
AO1
模拟表
Analog meter
AO2 0～10V
EN600
EN500/EN600
AO1,AO2 current output
E
GND
SW3,SW4
4～20mA
Fig.3-13 AO1,AO2 terminal wiring diagram
(1) Under analog input mode, filter capacitor or common mode

choke can be installed between AI1 and GND or AI2 and GND.
(2) Analog input and output signal can be interfered easily by
Note ambient environment, it need use shield cable for connection and
earth grounding well as short as possible.
3.6.4 Digital input terminal wiring

⑴ To use inverter inbuilt +24V power supply, and NPN source type external
controller connection mode.
30
COM
EN500/EN600
+24V
External controller PW
外 Signal wire
信号线 X1
部
控 R
制
器 COM
Fig.3-14 inbuilt 24V source type connection mode

⑵ To use inverter inbuilt +24V power supply, and PNP drain type external
controller connection mode.
+24V
COM EN500/EN600
C
External controller
PW
外
部 VCC
控
制 X1
器 COM R
N
Fig.3-15 inbuilt 24V drain type connection mode
⑶ To use external DC 15～30V power supply，and NPN source type external
controller connection mode.（remove the short circuit slice between PW and
E
+24V）.
COM
EN500/EN600
+24V
PW
+
External controller
-
外 Signal wire
信号线 X1
部
控 R
制
器 COM
Fig.3-16 external power supply source type connection mode
31
⑷ To use external DC 15～30V power supply，and PNP drain type external

controller connection mode.（remove the short circuit slice between PW and
+24V)
+24V
COM EN500/EN600
PW
External controller
外 -
部 VCC +
控
制 X1
器 COM R
Fig.3-17 External power supply drain type connection mode
3.6.5 Communication terminal wiring

C
EN500/EN600 inverter provide RS485 serial communication interface to user.
The following wire connection can make up of single-main single-sub control
system or single-main multi-sub control system. To use host computer softwar（PC
or PLC controller）can realize real time monitoring and operation to inverter，and
to achieve complicated run control like long-distance control, high degree
N
automation. It can also use a host inverter and the other slave inverter to make up
of the cascade or synchronous control inverter network.
⑴ Inverter RS485 interface and other device with RS485 interface wire connection
show as following
E
EN500/ A(485+) A(485+) Device with

RS485
EN600 B(485-) B(485-) or
RS485 EN500/EN600
Fig.3-18 Communication terminal wiring
32
⑵ Inverter RS485 interface and host computer (device with RS232 interface)
connection：
RS232/RS485 transverter Host computer
EN500/EN600 inverter name description Shield cable signal Pin No.
description name +5V shell

B
Signal negative B TXD RXD 2
Signal positive A RXD TXD 3

A
GND GND 5
DTR 4
DSR 6
RI 9
CD 1
Fig.3-19
C
RS485 communication wiring
RTS
CTS
7
8
N
E
33
4 EMC（Electromagnetic Compatibility）Explanation
4 EMC（Electromagnetic compatibility）explanation
Because of inverter working principal resulting in electromagnetic noise, and to
avoid or reduce inverter interference to ambient environment, this chapter
introduce installation means to restrain interference from aspect of interference
restrain, field wiring, system earth grounding, leakage current and power filter
usage. Inverter will have good electromagnetic compatibility under general
industrial environment, when user install the inverter according to this chapter.
4.1 Noise interference restraining
Inverter interference generating for run may have effect to nearby electronic
device and the effect depend on the inverter installation surrounding
electromagnetic environment and the restrain interference ability of the device.
4.1.1 Interference noise type
Becuase of inverter working principle, there are mainly 3 kinds of noise
interference source:：
⑴ circuit conduction interference；
⑵ space emission interference；
C
⑶ electromagnetic induction interference；
N
Interference Type
E
Circuit conduction Space emission Electromagnetic

interference interference induction interference
Leak current Power wire high 输入线

Input wire Inverter
变频器功率 power 输出线
Output wire
漏电流接电源线高次
earth grounding harmonic current induction
感应 component
部件感应 induction
感应
地线回路谐波电流传 induction
wire loop conduction
干扰
interference 导干扰
interference
路径⑥
route 路径⑦
route 路径⑧
route
路径①
route 路径②
route
Inverter main circuit
变频器的主回路 Motor
电机线 wire 电源线
Power wire
switch and switch U,V,W radio R,S,T radio
开关与开关电源 U、V、W R、S、T
power radio inteference interference
的射频干扰
interference 的射频干扰的射频干扰
路径③
route 路径④
route 路径⑤
route
Fig.4-1 interference noise type
34
4.1.2 Basic countermeasure for restrain interference

Table 4-1 interference restrain countermeasure
Noise
spread Countermeasure of weakening effect
road
Earth grounding cable of peripheral device and inverter wiring make
up of the closed-loop and leakage current of inverter earth grounding
①
cable will make device perform wrong action. It will decrease wrong
action when device not connect to earth grounding.
When the power of peripheral device and inverter power belong to the
same power source, high harmonic gererating from inverter will
transmit the voltage and current along with the power line which will
interfere other devices within the same power source system. Take
② some restraining measures as below：install electromagnetic noise
filter at inverter input end; use isolation transformer to isolate other
devices; connect power end of peripheral device to remote power
grid；add power ferrite filter magnetic ring to inverter R、S、T three
C
phase wire to restrain high harmonic current conduction
Keep other sensitive devices and signal wire installed away from
inverterr. it should use shield wire and make the shield layer single
end earth grounding. Besides keep distance from inverter and its
input & output wire as possible as. When signal wire need to
N
intersect with strong current cable, it should make them orthogonal
crossing not parallel.
Install high frequency noise filter (ferrite common code choke,
also called magnetic ring) at the bottom end of the inverter input &
③④⑤
output to restrain radio frequency interference of dynamic wire
effectively.
E
Motor cable should be placed in protective object with large

thickness, such as placed in larger thickness(over 2mm) pipeline or
buried in cemented tank. Putting dynamic wire in metal tube and
connect to earth grounding with shield wire (motor cable use 4-core
cable, one side is earthed through the inverter, the other side
connected to motor casing).
To prevent wire parallel or bundled of strong and weak current, it
should keep away from inverter assemble device, and wiring should
away from inverter R,S,T,U,V,W equipower line. Devices with
⑥⑥⑥
highfield and high magnetic field should notice the corresponding
installation position of inverter and keep distance and orthogonal
crossing.
35
4.2 Field wiring and earth grounding

⑴ inverter terminal motor connection wire （U,V,W terminal output wire）and
inverter terminal power connection wire（R,S,T terminal input wire）should keep
distance enough as possible as can.
⑵ U,V,W terminal 3 motor wires should be placed in metal tube or metal wiring
tank as possible as.
⑶ Generally control signal wire should use shield cable, when shield layer
connect to inverter terminal, it should be the single end earth grounding which
closed to inverter side.
⑷ Inverter terminal earth grounding cable must directly connect to floor, it cannot
connect to earth grounding through other device, and the location of earth grounding
should close to inverter as possible as.
⑸ strong current cable(R,S,T,U,V,W) cannot parallel wiring closely with control
signal wire, and bundled together is prohibited. It should keep distance from over
20～60 cm（relative to strong current size). When it’s necessary to intersect, it
C
should be orthogonal crossing, show as Fig.4-2.
N
电源线或电动机线
Power wire or motor cable
控制信号线
Control signal wire
E
Fig.4-2 system wiring demand

⑹earth grounding wire for strong current should separately connect to earth
grounding with control signal and sensor earth grounding wire for weak current.
⑺ Forbid to connect inverter input terminal(R,S,T) to other devices.
4.3 Leak current and countermeasure

The leak current flows through inverter input and output terminal for wire
capacitance and motor capacitance, and its size decided by the distributed
capacitance and carrier frequency. There are two kinds of leak current: leak
current to earth and wire-to-wire. Restraining methods as below:
⑴ diminish the cable length between inverter and motor.
⑵ install ferrite magnetic ring or output reactor at the inverter output terminal.
36
When reactor installed with rated voltage drop more 5% and long
wiring to U, V, W terminal ， it would reduce motor’s voltage
! apparently. When motor run at full load, it is possible to flash
motor, and it should be used by derating or boosting input and
output voltage.
⑶ as carrier frequency low, the motor noise would increase accordingly.

4.4 Installation demand for electromagnetic on-off electronic device
It should pay attention that surge absorber must be installed when electromagnetic
on-off electronic device like relay, electromagnetic contactor and electromagnetic
iron generating noise easily and largely installed near to inverter or in the same
control cabinet, show as Fig. 4-3.
二极管
diode
C 压敏电阻器
varistor
24VDC
+
_
N
Inverter or
变频器或其
other devices
～
它电气设备
220VAC
～
RC-滤波器
filter
E
～
220VAC
～
Fig.4-3 install demand for electromagnetic on-off device

4.5 Noise filter installation instructions
⑴ To use strictly as per the rated value；filter metal casing grounding must
connect reliably to assemble cabinet metal grounding in large scale and it required
good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it may cause electric shock and influence
the EMC effect seriously.
⑵ Filter grounding terminal and inverter terminal must connect to the same
common earth grounding, otherwise it will influence the EMC effect seriously.
⑶ Filter installed as close as possible to inverter power input terminal.
37
5 Run and operation explanation for inverter

5.1 Run of inverter
5.1.1 Running order channels
There are 3 kinds of order channel for controlling run action of the inverter such as
run, stop, jog etc.
0：keypad
Control by key , , on keypad (factory default).
1：Control terminal
Use control terminal FWD,REV,COM to make of double-line control， or use
one terminal of X1～X8 and FWD or REV to make of three-line control.
2：Communication port
Control run and stop of the inverter through upper machine or other device which
can communicate with the inverter.
C
Choose order channel by setting function code F01.15；and also can choose by
multi-function input terminal (F08.18~F08.25 choose function 49,50,51,52,53).
Also can reach switch the command channel through multi-function key
(Only parts of optional keyboards are equipped with multi-functional key).
N
Please make switching debugging in advance when switch the order
! channel to check if it can fulfill system requirement， otherwise have
danger of damaging device and injuring personal.
5.1.2 Frequency-provision channel

E
EN500/EN600 includes main frequency provision and assist frequency provision：

Main frequency provision：
0: keypad analog potentiometer provision；
1: AI1 analog setting；
3: terminal UP/DOWN adjustment provision；
4: communication provision(Modbus and external bus share a main frequency
memory);
5: EAI1 analog setting(extend effective)；
7: high speed pulse provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding function)；
8: terminal pulse width provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding
function)；
9: terminal encoder provision(X1,X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal
input)
38
10～14：Reserved
Assist frequency provision：

0: keypad analog potentiometer provision；
3: terminal UP/DOWN adjustment provision；
4: communication provision(Modbus and external bus share a main frequency
memory);
7: high speed pulse provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding function)；
8: terminal pulse width provision(X8 terminal need select the corresponding
function)；
9: terminal encoder provision(X1,X2 terminal connect to the encoder orthogonal
input)
10～20：Reserved
5.1.3 Work state

C
Work state of EN500/EN600 includes of Waiting state, Running state and
N
Parameter setting state.
Waiting state :
If there is no running command after the inverter electrified or after stop command
during running state, the inverter enters into waiting state.
E
Running state:
The inverter enters into running state after receiving run command.
Parameter setting state:
After receiving the parameter identification command, enter the parameter setting
state, after turning into the shutdown state.
39
5.1.4 Run mode

EN500/EN600 inverter have 6 kinds of run mode, following is in turn according
to their priority, jog run →closed-loop run →PLC run →multi-section speed run→
swing frequency run →common run. Shown as Fig.5-1.
Electrification
Waiting
state
Any jog command？

Y
High priority Jog run
N
N
Run command effective？
Closed-loop effective？
N Y
C Y
Closed-loop invalidation N
terminal closed？
Closed-loop
run
N
Y
PLC effective？
Y PLC invalidation N
N terminal closed？ PLC run
Y Multi-section
Multi-section terminal effective?
E
run
N
Y Traverse
Traverse run?
run
low priority
N
Y Common
Common run? run
N
Fig.5-1 Run mode

0：Jog run
Upon receiving jog run command (for instance, press the key on keypad)
during waiting state, the inverter run at jog frequency (see function code
F01.25~F01.29).
1：Closed-loop run
The inverter will come into closed-loop run mode when closed –loop run control
40
effective parameter is set(F11.00=1or F12.00≥1). Namely carry on PID adjustment

to specified value and feedback value(proportion integral differential calculation,
see F11 group function code) and PID adjuster output is inverter output frequency.
Can make closed-loop run mode ineffective and switch to lower level run mode by
multi-function terminal (function 31).
2：PLC run
The inverter will enter into PLC run mode and run according to run mode preset(see
F10 group function code description) through setting PLC function effective
parameter(F10.00 last bit≠0). Can make PLC run mode ineffective and switch to
lower level run mode by multi-function terminal (function 36).
3：multi-section speed run
By nonzero combination of multi-function terminal(5,6,7,8,function)，choose
multi-section frequency 1~15(F10.31~F10.45) to run at multi-section speed.
4：swing frequency run
The inverter will enter into swing frequency run mode when swing frequency
C
function effective parameter(F13.00=1)is set. Set relevant swing frequency run
special parameter according to textile swing frequency craft to realize swing
frequency run.
N
5：common run
Common open loop run mode of general inverter.
In above 6 kinds of run mode except “jog run” the inverter can run according to
kinds of frequency setting method.
E
41
5.2 Operation and use of key board

5.2.1 Keypad layout
The operating keyboard is the main unit of frequency inverter to accept commands,
display parameters. Keyboard outline diagram shown in Figure 5-2.
显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light
显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light 显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light
变频器故障报警指示灯
Failure alarm indicator light 变频器正转指示灯
Forward run indicator light
模式指示灯
Mode indicator light 变频器反转指示灯
Reverse run indicator light
Increase
递增键 key
编程/退出键
Exit/Program
移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision
Reverse/Jog
反转/点动键
key
key
key
C 数字电位器
Digital potentiometer
确认/数据键
Confirm/Data key
递减键
Decrease key
停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
N
正转运行键
Forward run key
Fig.5-2 keypad layout sketch

5.2.2 Keypad function description
E
There are 9 key-presses on inverter keypad， and function definition of each key is
as shown in table 5-1.
Table 5-1 keypad function table
Key Name Function description
Program/Exit
Enter into or exit programming state
key
Shift/Supervisi Can choose modification digit of set data under editor state；
on key can switch display status supervision parameter under other state
Function/Data
Enter into or exit programming state
key
Under keypad mode: to press this key can set reverse run or Jog run
Rev/Jog key
according to the 1st bit of parameter F00.15
Run key Enter into forward run under keypad mode
42
In common run status the inverter will be stopped according to set mode
after pressing this key if run command channel is set as keypad stop
Stop/reset key
effective mode. The inverter will be reset and resume normal stop status
after pressing this key when the inverter is in malfunction status.
Digital It is the same as the function of increase and decrease key，rotate to the
potentiometer left means decrease，rotate to the right means increase.
Increasing To increase data or function code (to press it continuously can
button improve increasing speed)
Decreasing To decrease data or function code (to press it continuously can

button improve decreasing speed)
5.2.3 LED and indicator light

4 status indicator light: they are MOD(mode):ALM(alarm):FWD(forward run):
REV(reverse run)from left to right on the LED: their respective indicating meaning
is as shown in table 5-2.
Table 5-2 status indicator light description
Item
Digital display
C Function description
Display current run status parameter and set parameter

N
Unit for relevant current digital displayed physical parameter(for
A, Hz, V
current is A:for voltage is V:for frequency is Hz)
This indicator light is lit in non-supervision status and extinguished
MOD
if no key pressed for a minute: then come back to supervision status
Display function
Status indicator light
Alarm indicator light: indicate that the inverter is in over current or over
ALM
E
voltage suppressing status or failure alarm status currently

Forward run indicator light, indicate
that the inverter output forward phase
FWD
order and the connected motor rotate in The inverter work in DC
forward direction brake status if FWD,REV
Reverse run indicator light: indicate that indicator light is lit at the
the inverter output reverse phase order same time
REV
and the connected motor rotate in
reverse direction
5.2.4 Key board display status

EN500/EN600 keypad display status is classified as Waiting status parameter display;
Function code parameter editing status display; Malfunction alarm status display; Run
status parameter display; Alarm state display in total 5 kinds of status. LED indicator
light will all be lit after the inverter electrified. Then enter into set frequency display. As
shown in Fig.5-3 a
43
(1) Waiting parameter display status

The inverter is in waiting status and waiting status supervision parameter is
displayed on keyboard: normally parameter F00.13 decide which status supervision
parameter to be displayed. As shown in Fig.5-3 b， the indicator light shows the unit of
the parameter.
To press key, it can display different waiting status supervision parameter
circularly: for detail please see C-00 to C-05 group supervision parameter details
decide by F00.07~F00.12.
(2) Run parameter display status
The inverter enters into run status when receiving effective run command and
normally parameter F00.13 decide which status supervision parameter to be displayed
on the keypad. As shown in Fig.5-3 c， the indicator light shows the unit of the
parameter.
To press key can display run status supervision parameter circularly. For
detail please see C-00 To C-05 group supervision parameter details decide by
F00.01～F00.06 . C
N
Set frequency Output frequency
E
Fig.a Electrification， Fig.b waiting status, display Fig.c run status: display run
display 8.8.8.8.8. waiting status parameter status parameter
Fig.5-3 inverter electrification: waiting: run status display

(3) Failure alarm display status
The inverter enters into failure alarm display
status upon detecting failure signal and display
failure code sparklingly(as shown in Fig.5-4);
To press key can look over relative
parameter after stopping running；
over current in accelerating
Can press key to enter into program status
to see about F26 group parameter if want to search Fig.5-4
44
failure information.
Can carry on failure restoration by key: control terminal or
communication command on the keypad after troubleshooting. Keep displaying
failure code if failure exist continuously.
For some serious failure, such as The earthing short circuit, Inverter
modules protect, over current, over voltage etc., must not carry on
! failure reset forcibly to make the inverter run again without failure
elimination confirmed. Otherwise have danger of damaging the
inverter！
(4) Function code editing status

Under waiting, run or failure alarm status, press key, can enter into editing
status(If user password is set, can enter into editing status after inputting the
password, see also F27.00 description and Fig.5-10)，and editing status is
displayed according to three classes menu mode, as shown in Fig. 5-5. To press
C
key can enter into one class by one class. Under function parameter display
status, to press key to carry on parameter storage operation; To press
key can only come back to upper class menu without storing modified parameter.
Second-class menu
N
ESC/MENU First class menu ENTER/DATA
electrificati
Output freq.switch display Para. group Display control
ESC/MENU
ESC/MENU
Waiting status parameter Display
or run status parameter display
or failure alarm display
Fig.5-5 keypad display status switching
(5) Alarm state display
When under running and standby situation:
It means enter failure alarm display status upon
detecting failure signal and display failure
code sparklingly (Fig5-6）Inverter keeping
running state But this alarm display can not
be reset button eliminated: After only find Same main/assist frequency channel
the cause of the alarm: in order to eliminate

Fig.5-6
45
this factor Normal.

5.2.5 User Management Parameters
In order to facilitate the user parameter management: EN500/EN600 component
model parameter menu for display management. The parameters do not need to be
displayed can be shielded.
⑴ Method parameter setting mode display.
By setting F00.00 = 0,1,2,3 respectively parameter mode is set: Basic menu mode:
menu mode Intermediate: Advanced menu mode and user menu mode.
Basic menu F00,F01,F02,F03,F26

F00,F01,F02,F03,F04,F05,F06,F07,F08,F09,F10,F11,F12,F13,F14,
Middle menu
F15,F16,F18,F19,F26
Advance F00,F01,F02,F03,F04,F05,F06,F07,F08,F09,F10,F11,F12,F13,F14,
menu F15,F16,F17,F18,F19,F20,F21,F22,F23,F24,F25,F26,F27
User custom F00.00 and F25 parameters group
5.2.6 Method for operating keypad

C
Can carry on various operation to the inverter through keypad， for example:
(1) Status parameter display switching：
N
After pressing key ，display C group status supervision parameter; after
displaying one supervision parameter code for 1 second will display this parameter
value automatically. Press key will go back to supervision interface.
1s 1s
E
LED displayed content 0.00 C-01 Para. C-02 Para.
Key-press operation
order
1s 1s
C-00 Para. C-05 Para. C-03
∫…∫
Fig.5-7 waiting status parameter display operating example
46
(2) Function code parameter setting

Take function code F01.01 modified from 5.00Hz to 6.00Hz as example.
Boldface in Fig.5-8 shows flickering digit.
LED displayed
content
0.00 F00.00 F01.00 F01.00 F01.01
Key-press
peration order …
Enter into Choose Move to the Choose
editing Status F01 group position to function
Exit editing
display first-class function code be adjusted code F01.01
status
menu
F01.02 006.00 005.00 005.00
…
Store modified Parameter Parameter Function code
value: back to modification, modification, confirmation,
first -class menu Choose Enter into
5→6
Display next parameter digit second-class
function code
C
Fig.5-8 example for parameter setting and modification
Description: under second -class menu: if the parameter has no blinking digit, this
function code can’t be modified, possible reasons are as follows:
1> This function code shouldn’t be modified: for example actual detected status
N
parameter: run record parameter etc.;
2> This function code can’t be modified under run status and can be changed
after stopping running;
3> Parameter protected. All the function code can’t be modified when function
code F00.14=1 or 2，in order to avoid wrong operation. Need to set the
E
function code F00.14 to 0 if you want to edit function code parameter.

(3) Specified frequency adjustment for common run
Take example modifying specified frequency from 50.00Hz to 40.00Hz at
F01.06=1，F01.03=0 during running for explanation.
LED displayed content 50.00 49.99 45.00 40.00

Key-press …
operation order Stop pressing after set
Press decreasing Adjust frequency value reached: go back
button for one based on to normal display status
time requirement after 1s
Fig.5-9 set frequency adjustment operation example
(4) Jog run operation
For example: keypad as current run command channel: jog run frequency 5Hz:
waiting status.
47
LED displayed
0.00 0.01 5.00 0.01 0.00
content
Press Release
Key-press Waiting Keep
operation order … Waiting
Display Display run Output frequency
Output frequency
set frequency output frequency Fall down to 0Hz
Increased by 5Hz
Stop running
Fig.5-10 Jog run operating example

(5) Operation for entering to function code editing status after setting user
password
For example :“User password” F27 is set to“12345”. Boldfaced digit in Fig.5-11
shows blinking bit.
LED displayed
content 0.00 00000 10000 10000 12000
Key-press
operation order None-editing Move cursor Increase
At first last
status
12340
C
User password
effective: go into
password validation
status
12340
Digit flash,
Increase to“1”
12300
position to
forth digit
12300 12000
to“2”
N
Move to
Increase Move to Increase
the unit Move to third
to“4” second digit to“3”
12345
E
F27.00
Increase to“5” Press confirmation
Key: pass validation,
Go into editing status
Fig.5-11 Inputting password to go into function code operation

(6) See about failure parameter under failure status：
If press key under failure status the user can quickly locate to the F26 group
function code parameter. Press can quickly switch value between F26.04 ~
F26.10 parameters and fault alarm, easy to view the fault records.
(7) Keypad key-press locking operation
Under monitoring situation, To press for 5s,the keyboard will display
‘LOCH1’，now the buttons on the keyboard are under locked. The detailed locked
situation is decided by the value of hundred unit of F00.14.
(8) Keypad key-press unlocking operation
Under keypad-locked situation, press key for more than 5s to unlock the
48
keypad.
5.3 Inverter electrification
5.3.1 Check before electrification
Please carry on wiring based on operation requirement provided in “inverter
wiring” of this Service manual.
5.3.2 First electrification
Close input side AC power supply switch after correct wiring and power supply
confirmed: electrify the inverter and keypad LED display “8.8.8.8.8”,
contactor closed normally: LED displayed set frequency shows that electrification
is finished. First electrification operation process is shown as Fig.5-12：
Start
Wiring based on 3.5 section
N
N C
Wiring correct?
Input voltage correct?

N
Y
Electrify
Y
E
N
Display 8.8.8.8.8.？
Y
N
Hear contactor closed sound？
Y
N
Display 0.00Hz？
Y
Failure
Success
Cut off power
check reason
Fig.5-12 first electrification operation flow
49
6 Function parameter schedule graph

6.1 Symbol description
× ---- parameter can’t be changed in process of running
○ ---- parameter can be changed in process of running
* ---- read-only parameter, unmodifiable
6.2 Function parameter schedule graph
F00－System Parameter Group
Function Min. Factory Modifi

Name Set range
code unit Default -cation
F00.00 Parameter group 0: Basic list mode(only displayF00~F03 basic control 1 2 ○
display control parameter group and F26 fault record parameter
group.)
1: Middle list mode. Display all parameter except for
extension: virtual and reserve parameter group.
2: Senior list mode. All parameter display.
3: User list mode. Display parameter defined by user:
F00.01 C-00 display
when operation
C
and monitor parameter: F00.00 display all the time.
0: main setup frequency（0.01Hz）
parameter selection 1: auxiliary setup frequency（0.01Hz）
2: setup frequency（0.01Hz）
3: output frequency（0.01Hz）
4: output current(0.1A)
1 51 ○
N
5: output voltage(1V)
6: DC busbar voltage(0.1V)
7: motor speed(1 circle/min)
8: motor line velocity(1 circle/min)
9: inverter temperature(1℃)
10: run time already this time(0.1min)
11: current accumulate run time(1h)
E
12: current accumulate power-on time(1h)

13: inverter status
14: input terminal status
15: output terminal status
16: extension output terminal status
17: extension input terminal status
18: communication virtual input terminal status
19: internal virtual input node status
20: analog input AI1(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
21: analog input AI2(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
22: extension analog input EAI1(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
23: extension analog input EAI2(after checkout)
(0.01V / 0.01mA)
24: analog AO1 output(after checkout)
(0.01V /0.01mA)
25: analog AO2 output(after checkout)
(0.01V /0.01mA)
26: extension analog EAO1 output
(0.01V /0.01mA)
50
27: extension analog EAO2 output(0.01V /0.01mA)

28: external pulse input frequency(before checkout)
(1Hz)
29: Reserved
30: process PID provide(0.01V)
31: process PID feedback(0.01V)
32: process PID deviation（0.01V）
33: process PID output（0.01Hz）
34: simple PLC current segment No.
35: external multi-speed current segment No.
36: constant pressure water supply provide pressure
(0.001Mpa)
37: constant pressure water supply feedback pressure
(0.001Mpa)
38: constant pressure water supply relay status
39: current length(m/cm/mm)
40: accumulate length(m/cm/mm)
41: current internal count value
42: current internal time value(0.1s)
43: run command setup channel(0：keyboard
1: terminal 2: communication)
44: main frequency provide channel
C
45: auxiliary frequency provide channel
46: rated current(0.1A)
47: rated voltage(1V)
48: rated power(0.1KW)
49:Electric torque limit（0.1% Rated torque of motor）
50: Brake torque limit (0.1% motor rated torque)
51: frequency after Acce/Dece(0.01Hz)
N
52: motor rotor frequency(0.01Hz)
53: current given torque（percentage relative to rated
torque, with direction）
54: current output torque(percentage relative to rated
torque, with direction)
55: torque current at present(0.1A)
56: flux current at present(0.1A)
E
57: Setting motor rotate speed（r/min）

58: Output power（active power）（0.1KW）
59: the low digit of Total power consumption（1 kwh）
60: the high digit of Total power consumption(1
represents 10000 kwh)
61～65: Reserved
F00.02 C-01 display Same as above 1 2 ○
parameter selection
when operation
parameter selection
when operation
parameter selection
when operation
parameter selection
when operation
parameter selection
when operation
51

parameter selection
when stop
parameter selection
when stop
parameter selection
when stop
parameter selection
when stop
parameter selection
when
stop
parameter selection
when stop
F00.13 Power-on fault 0～5 1 0 ○
monitor parameter
selection
F00.14 Parameter
operation control
C
Units digit: Parameter modification operations
0: All parameters are allowed to be modified
1: Except current parameter, all other parameters are
not allowed to modify the
2: ExceptF01.01,F01.04and current parameter， all
other parameters are not allowed to be modified
1 000 ×
N
Tens digit: Reset to factory defaults
0: No action.
1: All parameters return to default.(not include fault
record parameter group(F26 group) parameter).
2: Except for motor parameter: all parameters return
to default.(not include F15 and F26 group parameter).
3: Extension parameter return to default.(only
E
F21~F24 group parameter return to default).

4: Virtual parameter return to default.(only F20 group
parameter return to default).
5: Fault record return to default.(only fault record
parameter group(F26 group)parameter return to
default)
Hundreds digit: Key operation
0: All locked
1: Except button: the others locked
2: Except ， button: the others locked
52
F00.15 Button function Units digit: panel button selection 1 0001 ○

selection
0: Reversal command action button
1: Jog action button
Tens digit: multi-function button function
selection
0: Invalid.
1: Jog run.
2: For/rev switching.
3: Free stop.
4: Switching to run command provide mode as the
setup order of F00.16.
5: Forward/Reverse Torque Switching
6～9: Reserved
Hundreds digit: terminal run command control
0: Keyboard button invalid
1: Keyboard button valid
Thousands digit: communication run command control
0: Keyboard button invalid
1: Keyboard button valid
F00.16 Multi-function key 0: Keyboard control→ terminal control→ 1 0 ○
F00.17
run command
channel switching
order selection
Motor speed
display coefficient
C
communication control
1: Keyboard control←→terminal control
2: Keyboard control←→communication control
3: Terminal control←→communication control
0.1～999.9% 0.1% 100.0% ○
N
F00.18 Line velocity 0.1～999.9% 0.1% 1.0% ○
display coefficient
F00.19 Extended Port Parts 0: Invalid 1 0 ×
set 1: Reserved
2: Multi pump water supply card
3: Incremental PG encoder
4～10: Reserved
E
F00.20 Analog input Units digit:AI1 configuration 1 0000 ×

terminal 0: 0~10V input
configuration 1: 4~20mA input
Tens digit: AI2 configuration
0: -10~10V input
1: 4~20mA input
Hundreds digit: EAI1 configuration
0: 0~10V input
1: -10~10V input
2: 4~20mA input
Thousands digit: EAI2 configuration
0: 0~10V input
1: -10~10V input
2: 4~20mA input
F00.21 Analog output Units digit: AO1 configuration 1 0000 ×
terminal 0: 0~10V output
configuration 1: 4~20mA output
Tens digit: AO2 configuration
0: 0~10V output
1: 4~20mA output
Hundreds digit: EAO1 configuration
0: 0~10V output
53
1: 4~20mA output
Thousands digit: EAO2 configuration
0: 0~10V output
1: 4~20mA output
F00.22 Y output Units digit~ Hundreds digit: reserved 1 0000 ×
terminal Thousands digit: Y4 output configuration
configuration 0: Open collector output
1: DO output
F00.23 G/P type setup 0: G type. 1 0 ×
1: P type.
Note: P type is only for V/F control
F00.24 Motor control mode 0: V/F control（object to torque control） 1 0 ×
1: speed less sensor vector control 1（compare to
speed less sensor vector control 2，this control mode
is more suitable for asynchronous motor≤160KW，
support speed and vector control）
2: speed sensor vector control（support asynchronous
motor speed and torque control）
3: speed less sensor vector control 2（only support
asynchronous motor speed control，this control mode
is more suitable for motor ≥185KW）
F00.25 Monitor parameter The same as parameter F00.01 1 4 ○
F00.26
F00.27
2 selection
Busbar voltage
adjustment
coefficient
C
0.900～1.100
Parameters copying Units digit: Language(only valid for LCD keypad)

and Language 0: Chinese
1
1
1.000
00
○
×
N
selection 1: English
2: Reserved
Tens digit: parameter upload and download
0: Inaction
1: parameter upload
2: parameter download 1(without motor parameter)
3: parameter download 2(with motor parameter)
E
F01－Basic Run Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
Code Unit Default -cation
F01.00 Main frequency 0: Operation keyboard digital setup 1 0 ○
input channel 1: AI1 analog setup
selection 2: AI2 analog setup
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
4:Communication provide( Communication address:
1E01).
5:EAI1 analog setup.
6:EAI2 analog setup
7:High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
8:Terminal pulse setup(X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
9:Terminal encoder setup(X1:X2 connect the encoder
punctuation input)
10～14: Reserved
F01.01 Main frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
54
digital setup
F01.02 Main frequency Only when parameter F01.00=0:3:4 valid. 1 00 ○
digital control Units digit: power down reserve setup
0:Main frequency power down reserve.
1:Main frequency power down no reserve.
Tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt main frequency hold
1:Halt main frequency recovery F01.01
Hundreds digit: Set of communication presetting
frequency dimension
0:Preset of absolute frequency mode(preset 5000
represent 50.00Hz).
1:Preset 10000 represent upper limit frequency
(F01.11).
F01.03 Auxiliary 0: Operation keyboard digital setup 1 20 ○
frequency input 1: AI1 analog setup
channel select 2: AI2 analog setup
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
4:Communication provide( Communication address:
1E01).
5:EAI1 analog setup.
6:EAI2 analog setup
C
7:High speed pulse setup X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
8:Terminal pulse setup(X8 terminal need choose the
suitable function)
9:Terminal encoder setup(X1:X2 connect the encoder
punctuation input)
10: Reserved
N
11: process PID Setting
12～20: Reserved
F01.04 Auxiliary 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency digital
setup
F01.05 Auxiliary Units digit: power down reserve setup 1 11 ○
E
frequency digital 0:Auxiliary frequency power down reserve.

control 1:Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve.
0:Halt auxiliary frequency hold.
1:Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter F01.04
F01.06 Main and 0:Main frequency (complex frequency of current is 1 0 ○
auxiliary provide main frequency).
calculating setup 1: Auxiliary frequency(complex frequency of current
is auxiliary frequency.)
2: Plus(polarity oppose of complex and main
frequency，complex frequency is zero).
3:Minus(polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary
frequency，complex frequency is zero).
4:Multiplication(polarity opposed of main and
auxiliary frequency: complex frequency is zero).
5:Max(the max frequency of main and auxiliary
absolute value).
6:Min(the min frequency of main and auxiliary
absolute value).
7:Selection no-zero value(auxiliary is not negative，
main frequency prior；auxiliary is negative，complex
frequency is zero).
8:main frequency×Auxiliary frequency×2/F01.11
55
(polarity opposed of main and auxiliary frequency

,complex frequency is zero)
F01.07 Auxiliary 0.00～10.00 0.01 1.00 ○
frequency provide
coefficient
F01.08 Coefficient after 0.00～10.00 0.01 1.00 ○
complex of main
and auxiliary
frequency
F01.09 Auxiliary 0:Relative upper limit frequency. 1 0 ○
frequency range 1:Relative main frequency.
selection
F01.10 Auxiliary 0.00～1.00 0.01 1.00 ○
frequency source
scope
F01.11 upper limit Low limit frequency～600.00Hz 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ×
frequency
F01.12 Low limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.40Hz ×
frequency
F01.13 Low limit 0:As low limit frequency run. 1 2 ×
frequency run 1:As setting frequency run.
mode 2:As zero frequency run.
F01.14
frequency
C
3:Sleep: PWM clocked at sleep mode.
Sleep run hysteresis 0.01Hz～upper limit frequency（This function can be 0.01Hz 0.01Hz
used to finish the sleep mode function, realizing
energy-saving operation process, and the hysteresis
width can avoid inverter starting frequently in
threshold）
○
N
F01.15 Run command 0:Operation keyboard run control. 1 0 ○
channel selection 1:Terminal run command control
2:Communication run command control.
F01.16 Run direction Units digit: Keyboard command for/rev setup(only 1 1000 ○
setup valid to keyboard inching command)
0:Forward
1:Reverse
E
Tens digit: for/rev forbid(suitable for all command

channel，not include inching function)
0:For/rev available.
1:Reverse not available( imposing on reverse，stop as
the halt mode).
2:Forward not available( imposing on
forward，stop as the halt mode)
Hundreds digit: Reverse running direction (only valid
for keyboard and communication channel)
0:invalid
1: valid
Thousands digit: Terminal multi-section speed
acceleration and deceleration time control
0:Respectively, corresponding to acceleration and
deceleration 1～15
1:Determined by F01.17 and F01.18
F01.17 Acceleration time 1 1~60000(Acceleration time is interval accelerate from Base on
zero frequency to upper limit frequency) 1 motor ○
type
F01.18 Deceleration time 1 1～60000(deceleration time is the interval decelerate Base on
from upper limit frequency to zero frequency.) 1 motor ○
type
56
F01.19 Acc/Dece time unit 0：0.01s 1 1 ×

1：0.1s
2：1s
F01.20 Acc/Dece mode 0:Line acc/Dece mode. 1 0 ×
selection 1:S curve acc/Dece mode.
F01.21 S curve 10.0%～50.0%（(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 20.0% ○
acceleration S curve deceleration start time+ S curve deceleration
initiation segment raise time ≤90% )
time
F01.22 S curve 10.0%～70.0%(Acceleration/deceleration time) 0.1% 60.0% ○
acceleration up S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
segment time raise time ≤90% )
deceleration S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
initiation segment raise time ≤90% )
time
deceleration up S curve acceleration start time+ S curve acceleration
segment time raise time ≤90% )
F01.25 Keyboard jog run 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
frequency
F01.26 Terminal jog run 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F01.27
F01.28
F01.29
frequency
Jog interval time
Jog acceleration
time
Jog deceleration
time
C
0.0～100.0s
0.1～6000.0s
0.1～6000.0s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.0s
20.0s
20.0s
○
○
○
N
F02－Start, stop, forward/reverse, brake function parameter group
Name Set Range
F02.00 Start running 0: Start from starting frequency 1 0 ×
mode 1: First brake and then start from starting
E
frequency
2: Start by revolving speed tracking
F02.01 Starting delay 0.0～60.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F02.02 Starting frequency 0.0～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F02.03 Starting frequency 0.0～60.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
duration time
F02.04 DC braking 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 30.0% ×
current when
starting
F02.05 DC braking 0.0～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time when
starting
F02.06 Speed track 0: Current setting frequency. 1 2 ×
starting frequency 1: Running frequency before power down.
selection 2:Speed track auxiliary starting frequency.
F02.07 Speed track 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ×
auxiliary starting
frequency
F02.08 Speed track 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
starting waiting
57
time
F02.09 Speed track current 1～20 1 2 ×
control coefficient
F02.10 Speed track 0.1～30.0（V/F control unit is 1 second；SVC 0.1 4.0 ×
searching speed control unit is 0.1 second）
time
F02.11 Stop mode 0: Deceleration stop. 1 0 ○
1: Free stop
2: Deceleration + DC braking stop.
F02.12 Deceleration stop 0.00～upper limit frequency（This parameter is 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
holding frequency only valid for stop mode 0.）
F02.13 Deceleration stop 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.00s ×
holding time
F02.14 Stop DC braking starting 0.00～15.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.50Hz ×
frequency
F02.15 stop DC braking waiting 0.00～30.00s 0.01s 0.00s ×
time
F02.16 Stop DC braking current 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 0.0% ×
F02.17 Stop DC braking time 0.0～30.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
F02.18 Stop auxiliary braking 0.0～100.0%（G type inverter rated current） 0.1% 0.0% ×
current
F02.19 Stop auxiliary braking 0.0～100.0s 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F02.20 Forward/reverse dead
zone time
F02.21 Forward/reverse switching
mode
F02.22 Energy consumption
C
0.0～3600.0s
0: Over zero switchover

1: Over starting frequency switchover
0:No energy consumption braking
0.1s
1
0.0s
0
×
○
N
braking selection 1:Energy consumption braking 1(No braking
while halting).
2: Energy consumption braking 2(Braking while
halting).
F02.23 Energy consumption 100.0～145.0%（rated busbar voltage） 0.1% 125.0% ○
braking voltage
F02.24 Energy consumption 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
E
braking use rate

F02.25 Encryption time 0～65535h 1 0 ○
F02.26 Over debugging 95%~115% (only when F00.24=1 valid)
1% 100% ○
coefficient
F03－V/F control parameter group

Name Set Range
F03.00 V/F curve set 0: Constant torque curve 1 0 ×
1: Degression torque curve 1 (2.0 power)
4: User self-defined setting V/F curve
(Confirmed by F03.04~F03.11)
5:V/F Separation control (voltage channel is
determined by F18.22)
F03.01 Torque boost mode 0：Manual boost. 1 0 ○
1：Auto torque boost
F03.02 Torque boost 0.0～12.0% 0.1% Base on ○
motor
type
58
F03.03 Torque boost cut-off 0.0～100.0%（motor rated frequency） 0.1% 100.0% ○

frequency
F03.04 V/F frequency value 0 0.00～V/F frequency value 1 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ×
F03.05 V/F voltage value 0 0.00～V/F voltage value 1 0.01% 20.00% ×
F03.06 V/F frequency value 1 V/F frequency value 0～V/F frequency value 2 0.01Hz 20.00Hz ×
F03.07 V/F voltage value 1 V/F voltage value 0～V/F voltage value 2 0.01% 40.00% ×
F03.08 V/F frequency value 2 V/F frequency value 1～V/F frequency value 3 0.01Hz 25.00Hz ×
F03.09 V/F voltage value 2 V/F voltage value 1～V/F voltage value 3 0.01% 50.00% ×
F03.10 V/F frequency value 3 V/F frequency value 2～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 40.00Hz ×
F03.11 V/F voltage value 3 V/F voltage value 2 ～ 100.00%( motor rated 0.01% 80.00% ×
voltage)
F03.12 V/F oscillation 0～255 1 10 ○
suppression factor
F04－Auxiliary running parameter group

Name Set Range
F04.00 Jump freq. 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.01 Jump freq. 1 range 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.02 Jump freq. 2 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
F04.03
F04.04
F04.05
F04.06
F04.07
Jump freq. 2 range
Jump freq. 3
Jump freq. 3 range
Slip freq. gain
Slip compensation
limit
C
0.00Hz～upper limit frequency
0.0～300.0%
0.0～250.0%
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
0.1%
0.1%
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.0%
100.0% ×
×
×
×
×
N
Slip compensation 0.1～25.0s
F04.08 0.1s 2.0s ×
time constant
F04.09 Carrier freq. 0.5～16.0K 0.1K Based ○
on motor
type
F04.10 PWM optimized Units digit: Carrier freq. is adjusted 1 0010 ×
adjustment automatically according to temperature
E
0: Banned.
1: Allowed.
Tens digit: low speed carrier freq. limit mode
0: No limit.
1: Limit.
Hundreds digit: carrier wave modulation system
0: 3 phase modulation.
1: 2 phase and 3 phase modulation.
Thousands digit: Asynchronous modulation:
synchronization mode (valid under V/F control)
0:Asynchronous modulation.
1:Synchronous modulation (under 85Hz:
Asynchronous modulation).
F04.11 AVR function 0: No action 1 2 ×
1: Action all the time
2: No action only during deceleration
F04.12 Reserved
F04.13 Automatic energy-saving 0: No action 1 0 ×
operation 1: Action
F04.14 Acceleration time 2 and 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
switchover frequency
F04.15 Deceleration time 2 and 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ×
59
F04.16 Acceleration time 2 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.17 Deceleration time 2 1～60000 1 200 ○
F04.35
F04.36
F04.37
F04.38
F04.39
F04.40
Deceleration time 11
Acceleration time 12
C
1～60000
1～60000
1～60000
1～60000
1～60000
1
1
1
1
1
200
200
200
200
200
○
○
○
○
○
N
1～60000 1 200 ○
F05－Terminal correlative function parameter group

E

Name Set Range
F05.00 protocol selection 0: Modbus protocol . 1 0 ×
1: Reserved
2: Profibus protocol .（Extend effective）
3: CANlink protocol .（Extend effective）
4: CANopen protocol .（Extend effective）
5: Free protocol 1.（Can realize all the function
parameter modification of EN500/EN600）
6: Free protocol 2.（Can realize part of the
function parameter modification of
EN500/EN600）
F05.01 Baud rate configuration Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate 1 005 ×
selection
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS
2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS
5: 9600BPS
60
6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS
8: 57600BPS
9：115200BPS
Tens digit: Reserved
Hundreds digit: CanLink and CANopen Baud
rate selection
0: 20K
1: 50K
2: 100K
3: 125K
4: 250K
5: 500K
6: 1M
F05.02 Data format Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus protocol 1 0000 ×
data format 0：1-8-1 format，no parity，RTU
1: 1-8-1 format，even parity，RTU
2: 1-8-1 format，odd parity，RTU
3: 1-7-1 format，no parity，ASCII
4: 1-7-1 format，even parity，ASCII
5: 1-7-1 format，odd parity，ASCII
Tens digit: Profibus_DP protocol data format
0: PPO1 communication format
C
Hundreds digit: Modbus agreement or free
protocol response selection
0: respond mainframe demand，and respond data
N
package
1: respond mainframe demand without response
（response when write parameter）
2: respond mainframe demand without response
(without response when write parameter）
Thousands digit: Communication Sets power
down reserve setup
E
0: no reserve
1: reserve
F05.03 Local address 0～247， 1 1 ×
this function code is used to identify inverter’s
address: among which 0 is broadcast address.
When setting broadcast address: it can only
receive and execute upper computer broadcast
command: while cannot respond to upper
computer.
F05.04 Communication overtime 0.0～1000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
checkout
time
F05.05 Communication error 0.0～1000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
checkout time
F05.06 Local response delay time 0～200ms（Modbus effective） 1ms 2ms ○
F05.07 Main & sub inverter 0～500% 1% 100% ○
communication frequency
setting percentage
F05.08 communication virtual 00～FFH 1 00H ○
input terminal enabled Bit0 : CX1 virtual input terminal enabled
0: forbidden
1 : enabled
61
Bit1: CX2 virtual input terminal enabled

0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
0: forbidden
1: enabled
F05.09 Communication virtual 0: Independent node. 1 0 ○
input terminal joining
node
F05.10 Communication virtual
terminal CX1 function
F05.11 Communication virtual
0～90
0～90
C
1: Terminal node.
1
0
0
○
○
N
F05.12 Communication virtual 0～90 1 0 ○
E

F05.18 Input mapping application F00.00～F26.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
parameter 1
parameter 2
parameter 3
parameter 4
parameter 5
parameter 6
parameter 7
parameter 8
62
parameter 9
parameter 10
F05.28 Setting frequency Display current setting frequency 0.01Hz ○
F05.29 Frequency after current Display the frequency after current acceleration / 0.01Hz ○
acceleration / deceleration deceleration
F05.30 Synchronous frequency Display the current synchronous frequency 0.01Hz ○
F05.31 Output current Display the current output current 0.1A ○
F05.32 Output voltage Display the current output voltage 1V ○
F05.33 DC busbar voltage Displays the current DC busbar voltage 0.1V ○
F05.34 Load motor speed Display the current load motor speed 1 r/min ○
F05.35 Set torque Display the current set torque(>37367, it is negat 0.1% ○
ive)
F05.36 Output torque Display the current output torque (>32767, it is 0.1% ○
negative)
F05.37 Torque current Display the current torque current 0.1A ○
F05.38 Accumulated power-on Display the accumulated power-on time of the 1hour ○
time inverter
F05.39 Accumulated running Display the accumulated running time of the 1 hour ○
time inverter
Function
Code
Name
F06.00 Setting curve
selection
C
F06－Setting curve parameter group
Set Range
Units digit: AI1 curve selection
0: curve 1
Min.
Unit
1
Factory
Default
0000
Modifi
-cation
○
N
1: curve 2
2: curve 3
Tens digit: AI2 curve selection: The same as
Units digit
Hundred digit: rapid pulse curve selection: The
same as Units digit
Thousands digit: pulse width setting curve
E
selection: The same as Units digit

F06.01 Curve 1 min. setting 0.0%～curve 1 inflexion setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
F06.02 Corresponding physical 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
quantity of curve 1 min.
setting
F06.03 Curve 1 inflexion setting Curve 1 min. setting ~ curve 1 Max. setting 0.1% 50.0% ○
quantity of curve 1
inflexion setting
F06.05 Curve 1 Max. setting Curve 1 inflexion setting ~ 100.0%, 100.0% is 0.1% 100.0% ○
corresponding to 5V Input AD terminal
quantity of curve 1 Max.
setting
F06.07 Curve 2 min. setting 0.0%～curve 2 inflexion setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
setting
F06.09 Curve 2 inflexion setting Curve 2 min. setting ~ curve 2 Max. setting 0.1% 50.0% ○
quantity of curve 2
63
inflexion setting
F06.11 Curve 2 Max. setting Curve 2 inflexion setting～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
setting
F06.13 Curve 3 min. setting 0.0%～curve 3 inflexion 1 setting 0.1% 0.0% ○
setting
F06.15 Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting Curve 3 min. setting ~ curve 3 inflexion 2 0.1% 30.0% ○
setting
quantity of curve 3
inflexion 1 setting
F06.17 Curve 3 inflexion 2 setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting ~ curve 3 Max. 0.1% 60.0% ○
setting
quantity of curve 3
inflexion 2 setting
F06.19 Curve 3 Max. setting Curve 3 inflexion 1 setting～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
F06.21
setting
Curve lower than min.
input corresponding
selection
C
Units digit: curve 1 setting
0: Corresponds to min. setting
corresponding physical quantity.
1: 0.0% of the corresponding physical
1 11111 ○
N
quantity.
Tens digit: curve 2 setting
Same as units digit.
Hundreds digit: curve 3 setting
Thousands digit: extended curve 1
E
Ten thousands digit: extended curve 2

F07－Analog , Pulse input function parameter group

Name Set Range
F07.00 AI1 input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001s 0.050s ×
F07.01 AI1 setting gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.006 ○
F07.02 AI1 setting bias 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.5% ○
F07.03 AI2 input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001 0.050s ×
F07.04 AI2 setting gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.003 ○
F07.05 AI2 setting bias 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.1% ○
F07.06 Analog setting bias Units digit: AI1 setting bias polarity 1 01 ○
polarity 0: Positive polarity.
1: Negative polarity.
Tens digit: AI2 setting bias polarity
0: Positive polarity.
F07.07 Pulse input filter time 0.000～9.999s 0.001 0.000s ×
F07.08 Pulse input gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.000 ○
F07.09 Pulse input Max. 0.01～50.00KHz 0.01KHz 10.00KHz ○
64
frequency
F07.10 Pulse width input filter 0.000～9.999s 0.001s 0.000s ×
time
F07.11 Pulse width input gain 0.000～9.999 0.001 1.000 ○
F07.12 Pulse width input logic 0:positive logic 1 0 ○
setting. 1:negative logic
F07.13 Max pulse input width 0.1～999.9ms 0.1ms 100.0ms ○
F07.14 Analog input 0.0%～100.0% 0.1% 10.0% ○
disconnection
detection threshold
F07.15 Analog input 0.0～500.0s 0.1s 3.0s ○
disconnection
detection time
F07.16 Analog disconnection units digit: disconnection detection channel 1 10 ○
protection option choice
0: invalid
1: AI1
2: AI2
Tens digit: Disconnection protection way
0: Stop according to stop mode
1: Fault, free stop
2: continue operation
F07.17
Function
Code
Reserved
Name
C
F08－On-off input function parameter group
Set Range
Min.
Unit
Factory
Default
Modifi
-cation
N
Input terminal positive 0000～FFFF（include extend input terminal） 1 0000 ○
F08.00 and negative logic
setting
Input terminal filter 0.000～1.000s（suitable for extend input 0.001s 0.010s ○
F08.01
time terminal）
X1 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
F08.02
closed time
E

F08.03
opened time
F08.04
closed time
F08.05
opened time
F08.06
closed time
F08.07
opened time
F08.08
closed time
F08.09
opened time
F08.10
closed time
F08.11
opened time
F08.12
closed time
F08.13 X6 Input terminal 0.00～99.99s 0.01s 0.00s ○
65
opened time
F08.14
closed time
F08.15
opened time
F08.16
closed time
F08.17
opened time
F08.18 Input terminal X1 0: Leave control terminal unused 1 1 ×
function selection 1: Forward running FWD terminal
2: Reverse running REV terminal
3: External forward jogging control
4: External reverse jogging control
5: Multi-step speed control terminal 1
9: Acceleration/deceleration time selection
terminal 1
terminal 2
C
terminal 3
terminal 4
13: Main and auxiliary frequency operational
rule selection terminal 1
N
16: Frequency ascending command（UP）
17: Frequency descending command（DOWN）
18: Frequency ascending/descending frequency
E
resetting
19: Multi-step closed loop terminal 1
22: External equipment failure input
23: External interruption input
24:External resetting input
25: Free stop input
26: External stop instruction—Stop according to
the stop mode
27: stop DC braking input command DB
28: inverter running prohibited—Stop according
to the stop mode
29:Acceleration/deceleration prohibited
command
30: Three-wire running control
31: Process PID invalid
32: Process PID stop
33: Process PID integral holding
34: Process PID integral resetting
35: Process PID function negation(Closed loop
adjustment feature negation)
36: simple PLC invalid
66
37: simple PLC halted

38: simple PLC stop state resetting
39: main frequency switchover to digit (keypad)
40: main frequency switchover to AI1
41: main frequency switchover to AI2
42: main frequency switchover to EAI1
43: main frequency switchover to EAI2
44: main frequency setting channel selection
terminal 1
terminal 2
terminal 3
terminal 4
48: Auxiliary frequency reset
49: Command switchover to panel
50: Command switchover to terminal
51: Command switchover to communication
52:Running command Channel selection
terminal 1
53:Running command Channel selection
C
terminal 2
54:Forward prohibited command(Stop according
to the stop mode: invalid for jogging command)
55:Reverse prohibited command (Stop according
to the stop mode: invalid for jogging command)
56:Swinging frequency input
57:Resetting state of swinging frequency
N
58:Interior counter reset end
59:Interior counter input end
60:Internal timer resetting
61:Internal timer triggering
62:Length count input
63:Length reset
64:Reset this operation time
E
65: speed/torque control switching

66: Point positioning enabled terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
67: Zero-speed servo enabled terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
68: Motor position reset terminal(F00.24=2
valid).
69: Recovery point positioning terminal
(F00.24=2 valid).
70～90: Reserved
91: Pulse frequency input (X8 VALID)
92: Pulse width PWM INPUT (X8 VALID)
93～96: Reserved
F08.19 Input terminal X2 Same as above 1 2 ×
function selection
function selection
function selection
function selection
67
function selection
function selection
function selection
F08.26 FWD/REV operating 0: Two-wire control mode 1 1 0 ×
mode selection 1: Two-wire control mode 2
2: Two-wire control mode 3（monopulse control
mode）
3: Three-wire control mode 1
F08.27 Set internal count value 0～65535 1 0 ○
to setting
F08.28 Specify internal count 0～65535 1 0 ○
to setting
F08.29 Internal timer timing 0.1～6000.0s 0.1s 60.0s ○
setting
F08.30 Terminal pulse encoder 0.01～10.00Hz（only be effective by given 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
frequency rate X1:X2 encoder）
F08.31 Special function Units digit: jogging priority level selection 1 00 ○
selection 0: the highest priority level
1: the lowest priority level
Tens digit: keypad adjustment of display setting
(under speed control mode)
Function
Name
C
0: display setting frequency
1: display setting rotation speed
F09－On-off ,analog output function parameter group
Set Range
Min. Factory Modifi
N
F09.00 Open collector output 0:terminal unused 1 0 ×
terminal Y1 output 1:operation(RUN)
setup 2:CW run
3:CCW run
4:DC brake
5:run prepare finish(busbar voltage normal, fault free,
no run forbid，receival of run command’s status)
E
6:stop command indication

7:no current arrived
8:overcurrent arrived
9:current1 arrived
10:current2 arrived
11:no frequency output
12:frequency arrival signal(FAR)
13:frequency level detect signal 1(FDT1)
14:frequency level detect signal 2(FDT2)
15:output frequency arrival upper limit(FHL)
16:output frequency arrival low limit(FLL)
17:frequency 1 arrival output
18:frequency 2 arrival output
19:overload pre-alarm signal(OL)
20:undervoltage lockout stop (LU)
21:external fault stop(EXT)
22:fault
23:alarm
24: simple PLC operation
25:simple PLC section operation finish
26:simple PLC circle operation finish
27:simple PLC operation stop
28:traverse frequency high and low limit
68
29:setup length arrival

30:internal counter final value arrival
31:internal counter designated value arrival
32:internal timer arrival---output 0.5s valid signal
on arrival
33:operation stop time finish
34:operation arrival time finish
35:setup run time arrival
36:setup power on time arrival
37:1st pump variable frequency
38:1st pump power frequency
39:2nd pump variable frequency
40:2nd pump power frequency
41:communication provision
42: torque control speed limiting
43: Torque arriving output
44: Positioning completion
45: The brake logic 1(brake in the process of
switching forward and reverse )
46: The brake logic 2( not brake in the process of
switching Forward and reverse )
47: Frequency inverter running 1(not jog
running)
F09.01 Open collector output

terminal Y2 output
setup
C
48: Analog input disconnection signal output
49: X1 terminal closed valid
49~60: Reserved
Same as above 1 0 ×
N
F09.02 Open collector output Same as above 1 0 ×
terminal Y3 output
setup
F09.03 Open collector output Same as above 1 0 ×
terminal Y4 output
setup
F09.04 Programmable relay Same as above 1 22 ×
output setting
E
Detection amplitude of 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○

F09.05
Frequency arrival(FAR)
FDT1(frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○
F09.06
level)level
F09.07 FDT1 lag 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
F09.08 FDT2(frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ○
level)level
F09.09 FDT2 lag 0.00～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 1.00Hz ○
F09.10 Zero frequency signal 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency ○
0.01Hz 0.40Hz
detection value
F09.11 Zero frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency ○
0.01Hz 0.10Hz
backlash
F09.12 Zero-current detection 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
amplitude
F09.13 Zero-current detection 0.00～60.00s 0.01s 0.1s ○
time
F09.14 Over-current detection 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 160.0% ○
value
F09.15 Over-current detection 0.00～60.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
time
F09.16 Current 1 arrival 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
detection value
F09.17 Current 1 width 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
69
F09.18 Current 2 arriving the 0.0～250.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○

detection value
F09.19 Current 2 width 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
F09.20 Frequency 1 arriving 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
the detection value
the detection width
the detection value
the detection width
F09.24 positive and negative 0000～FFFF（extension valid） 1 0000 ○
logic setup of Output
terminal
F09.25 Y1 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
F09.26 Y1 output disconnected 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.27 Y2 output closed delay 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
time
delay time
F09.29
F09.30
F09.31
Y3 output closed delay
time
Y3 output disconnected
delay time
Y4 output closed delay
time
C
0.000～50.000s
0.000～50.000s
0.000～50.000s
0.001s
0.001s
0.001s
0.000s
0.000s
0.000s
○
○
N
delay time
F09.33 Relay output closed 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
delay time
F09.34 Relay output 0.000～50.000s 0.001s 0.000s ○
disconnected delay
time
E
F09.35 Analog output(AO1) 0:output frequency before slip compensation 1 0 ○

selection (0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)
1:output frequency after slip Compensation
(0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)
2:Setup frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
3:main setting frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
4:auxiliary setting frequency(0.00Hz~upper limit
frequency)
5:output current 1(0~2×inverter rated current)
6:output current 2(0~3×motor rated current)
7:output voltage(0~1.2×load motor rated voltage)
8:busbar voltage(0~1.5×rated busbar voltage)
9:motor speed(0~3 rated speed)
10:PID provision(0.00~10.00V)
11:PID feedback(0.00~10.00V)
12:AI1(0.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
13:AI2(-10.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
14:communication provision
15: motor rotor revolving speed（0.00Hz～upper
limit frequency）
70
16: present setting torque（0～2 times rated

torque）
17: present output torque（0～2 times rated
torque）
18: present torque current（0～2 times motor
rated current）
19: present flux current（0～1 times motor rated
flux current）
20～25: Reserved
F09.36 Analog output(AO2) Same as above 1 0 ○
selection
F09.37 DO function Same as above
1 0 ○
selection(with Y4 reuse)
F09.38 Reserved
F09.39 Analog output(AO1) 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
filter time
F09.40 Analog output(AO1) 0.00～2.00 0.01 1.00 ○
gain
F09.41 Analog output(AO1) 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
bias
F09.42 Analog output(AO2) 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
filter time
F09.43
F09.44
F09.45
F09.46
Analog output(AO2)
gain
Analog output(AO2)
bias
DO filter time
DO output gain
C
0.00～2.00
0.0～100.0%（AO2 output terminal with Y3

reuse）
0.0～20.0s
0.00～2.00
0.01
0.1%
0.1s
0.01
1.00
0.0%
0.0s
1.00
○
○
○
N
F09.47 DO maximum pulse 0.1～20.0KHz 0.1KHz 10.0KHz ○
output frequency
F09.48 Torque reaches to the 0.02～200.00s 0.01s 1.00s ○
detection time
F09.49 Reserved
F09.50 Reserved
E
F10－Simple PLC/Multi-speed Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F10.00 Simple PLC operate Units digit: run mode selection 1 0000 ×
setting 0:inaction
1:stop after single cycle
2:final value keep after single cycle
3:continuous cycle
Tens digit: interrupt run restart mode
selection
0:restart from first phase
1:continuous run from phase frequency at
interruption
2:continuous run from run frequency at
interruption
Hundreds digit: PLC run time unit
0:second
1:minute
Thousands digit: power-down memory selection
0:no memory
71
1:phase of reserve power down, frequency power

down recording PLC run status: contain power
down phase, run frequency, time have run.
F10.01 Step 1 setting 000H～E22H 1 020 ○
Units digit: frequency setup
0: Multi-section frequency i (i=1～15)
1:frequency determined by complex frequency of
main and auxiliary
2: Reserved
Tens digit: The selection of running direction for
PLC and multi-speed.
0:forward
1:reversal
2:determine by run command
Hundreds digit：ACC/DEC time selection
0: ACC/DEC time 1
1: ACC/DEC time 2
2: ACC/DEC time 3
3: ACC/DEC time 4
4: ACC/DEC time 5
5: ACC/DEC time 6
6: ACC/DEC time 7
C
7: ACC/DEC time 8
8: ACC/DEC time 9
9: ACC/DEC time 10
A: ACC/DEC time 11
B: ACC/DEC time 12
C: ACC/DEC time 13
D: ACC/DEC time 14
N
E: ACC/DEC time 15
E

F10.16 Step 1 running time 0～6000.0 0.1 10.0 ○
72

F10.31 Multi- frequency 1 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F11－Close loop PID run function parameter group

Function
Code
Name C Set Range
F11.00 Closed-loop running control 0:PID close loop run control invalid
selection 1:PID close loop run control valid
F11.01 Provision channel selection 0:Digital provision
1:AI1 analog provision
Min.
Unit
1
1
Factory
Default
0
0
Modifi
-cation
○
×
N
3:EAI1 analog provision
4:EAI2 analog provision
5: Pulse provision
6: Communication provision(Communication
address：1D00).
7: Reserved
F11.02 Feedback channel 0: AI1 analog input 1 0 ○
E
selection 1: AI2 analog input

2: EAI1 analog input（Extend effective）
3: EAI2 analog input（Extend effective）
4: AI1+AI2
5: AI1-AI2
6: Min｛AI1，AI2｝
7: Max｛AI1，AI2｝
8: Pulse input
9:Communication feedback ( address is
1DOC, 4000 stands for 10.00V)
F11.03 Provision channel 0.00～50.00s 0.01s 0.20s ×
filtering time
F11.04 Feedback channel 0.00～50.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
filtering time
F11.05 PID output filtering 0.00～50.00s 0.01s 0.10s ○
time
F11.06 Provision digital setting 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 1.00V ○
F11.07 Proportion gain Kp 0.000～6.5535 0.0001 0.0500 ○
F11.08 Integral gain Ki 0.000～6.5535 0.0001 0.0500 ○
F11.09 Differential gain Kd 0.000～9.999 0.001 0.000 ○
F11.10 Sample cycle T 0.01～1.00s 0.01s 0.10s ○
F11.11 Deviation limit 0.0～20.0% correspond to provide value 0.1% 2.0% ○
73
percentage
PID differential amplitude 0.00～100.00% 0.01% 0.10% ○
F11.12
limit
F11.13 Closed-loop regulation 0:action 1 0 ○
characteristic 1:reaction
F11.14 Feedback channel 0:positive characteristic 1 0 ○
Positive-Negative 1:negative characteristic
characteristic
F11.15 PID regulation upper limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.16 PID regulation lower limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.17 Integral regulation 0:when integral arrival separate PID threshold 1 0 ○
selection value，stop integral adjusting
1:when integral arrival separate PID threshold
value，continue threshold value adjusting
F11.18 PID threshold of the 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 100.0% ○
integral separation
F11.19 Preset closed-loop 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
frequency
F11.20 Holding time of preset 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
closed-loop frequency
F11.21 Closed-loop output
reversion selection
Closed-loop output
C
0:close-loop output minus，low limit
frequency run.
1:close-loop output minus，reverse run
(effect by run direction setting )
2:determined by running demand
1 2
0.01Hz 50.00Hz
○
○
N
F11.22 Reversion frequency upper
limit
F11.23 Multiple closed-loop 0.00～10.00V 0.01V 0.00V ○
provision 1
provision 2
E
provision 3
provision 4
provision 5
provision 6
provision 7
F12－Constant Pressure Water Supply Function Parameter Group

Name Set range
code unit Default -cation
F12.00 Constant pressure water 0: no constant pressure water supply 1 0 ×
supply mode selection 1: select inverter to achieve one drive two
mode
2: select extend board to achieve one
drive two mode
drive three mode
74

drive four mode
5: Select inverterY1,Y2 as the double pump
timing alternate constant pressure water
supply mode
F12.01 Target pressure setting 0.000～long-distance pressure gage
0.001Mpa 0.200Mpa ○
range
F12.02 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ○
threshold
F12.03 Awake pressure 0.000～long-distance pressure gage range 0.001Mpa 0.150Mpa ○
threshold
F12.04 Sleep delay time 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F12.05 Revival delay time 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
F12.06 The range of long-distance 0.001～9.999Mpa 0.001Mpa 1.000Mpa ○
manometer
F12.07 allowed deviation of upper 0.1～100.0% 0.1% 1.0% ○
limit frequency and lower
limit frequency when add
or reduce pump
F12.08 Pump switch 0.2～999.9s 0.1s 5.0s ○
judging time
F12.09 Electromagnetism 0.1～10.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
F12.10
F12.11
contactor switching delay
time
Automatic switching time
interval
Revival mode selection
C
0000～65535 minute
0: Awake by the value of F12.03

1: Awake by the value of F12.12*F12.01
1
1
0
0
×
○
N
F12.12 Revival pressure 0.01～0.99 0.01 0.75 ○
coefficient
F12.13 Reduce pump switching 0.2～999.9s 0.1s 5.0 ○
estimate time
F12.14 Reserved
E
F13－Traverse/ Fixed Length Control Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F13.00 Traverse function 0:traverse invalid 1 0 ×
selection 1:traverse valid
F13.01 Traverse operating Units digit: enter mode 1 0000 ×
mode 0:automatically enter
1:terminal enter manually
Tens digit:
0:variable swing
1:fixed swing
Hundreds digit: traverse halt start mode selection
0:restart
1:start as previous halt record
Thousands digit: traverse status reserve selection
0:no reserve
1:reserve
Traverse frequency 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 10.0% ○
F13.02
swing value
Sudden-Jump 0.0～50.0% 0.1% 2.0% ○
F13.03
frequency
75
F13.04 Traverse cycle 0.1～999.9s 0.1s 10.0s ○

F13.05 Triangular wave rising 0.0～98.0% (traverse cycle) 0.1% 50.0% ○
time
preset frequency of 0.00～400.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
F13.06
Traverse
F13.07 Traverse preset 0.0～6000.0s 0.1s 0.0s ○
frequency waiting
time
F13.08 Setting length 0～65535(m\cm\mm) 1 0 ○
F13.09 Number of pulses for 1～10000 1 1 ○
axis per circle
F13.10 Axis perimeter 0.01～655.35cm 0.01cm 10.00cm ○
F13.11 Percentage of 0.00%～100.00% 0.01% 0.00% ○
remaining length
F13.12 Length correction 0.001～10.000 0.001 1.000 ○
coefficient
F13.13 After length arrival : Units digit: Reserved 1 0000 ○
record length manage Tens digit: Sets the unit of length
0: meter（m）
1: centimeter（cm）
2: millimeter（mm）
C
Hundreds digit: Actions when the length is
reached
0: Continue running
1: Shut down according to stopping mode
2: Loop length control
Thousands digit: Software reset length (could be
cleared by communication)
N
0: No operation
1: The current length is cleared
2:The current length and total length both cleared
F13.14 record length manage Units digit: Stops the current length 0 011 ○
0: Automatically cleared
1: Length is maintained
Tens digit: Power-down length memory setting
E
0: Not stored
1: Stored
Hundreds digit: length calculation at shutdown
0: The length is not calculated
1: Calculate the length
F14－Vector Control Parameter Group

Name Set Range
code Unit Default -cation
F14.00 Speed/torque control 0: speed control 1 0 ○
selection 1: torque control（This parameter is valid when
F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop high speed 0.1 ～ 40.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 20.0 ○
F14.01
proportional gain F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop high speed 0.001～10.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.040s ○
F14.02
integral time F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop low speed 0.1 ～ 80.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 20.0 ○
F14.03
proportional gain F00.24=1 or 2）
Speed loop low speed 0.001～10.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.020s ○
F14.04
integral time F00.24=1 or 2）
76
Speed loop parameter 0.00Hz～20.00Hz（This parameter is valid when 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○

F14.05
switching frequency F00.24=1 or 2）
Low frequency power 0 ～ 50 （ This parameter is valid when 1 25 ○
F14.06 generation stability F00.24=1 ）
coefficient
Current loop 1～500（This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 1 70 ○
F14.07
proportional gain or 2）
Current loop integral 0.1～100.0ms（This parameter is valid when 0.1ms 4.0ms ○
F14.08
time F00.24=1 or 2）
Motor-driven torque 0.0～250.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 160.0% ○
F14.09
current limit value F00.24=1 or 2 or 3）
Braking torque current 0.0～250.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 160.0% ○
F14.10
limit value F00.24=1 or 2）
Asynchronous motor 20.0～100.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 80.0% ○
F14.11 flux-weakening control F00.24=1 or 2）
coefficient
Asynchronous motor 10.0～80.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 10.0% ○
F14.12
Min. flux coefficient F00.24= 2）
F14.13 Torque reference Units digit: Torque provision channel selection 1 000 ○
and limit channel 0: Digital setting
selection 1: AI1 Analog setting
2: AI2 Analog setting
C
3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjustment setting
4: communication provision(Communication
address：1D01)
5: EAI1 Analog setting（expansion effective）
7:rapid pulse setting （ X8 terminal needs to
N
choose the corresponding function）
8:terminal pulse width setting （ X8 terminal
needs to choose the corresponding function）
Note: This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
Tens digit:Electric torque limit channel selection
0: Digital setting (determined by F14.09)
E
1: AI1 analog setting

3: Terminal UP / DOWN adjustment setting
4: Reserved
5: EAI1 analog Setting (Extended Valid)
6: EAI2 analog setting (Extended Valid)
7: High-speed pulse setting
(X8 terminals need to select the appropriate
function)
8: Terminal pulse width setting
function)
Note: The maximum value of 1 ~ 8 channels
corresponds to F14.09
Hundreds digit: Braking torque limit channel
selection
0: Digital setting (Determined by F14.10)
4: Reserved
77

function)
function)
corresponds to F14.10
F14.14 Torque polarity setting 0000～2112 1 2000 ○
Units digit: torque setting polarity
0: positive
1: negative
2:defined by running command
Tens digit: torque compensation polarity
0: The same as setting direction of torque
1: opposite the setting direction of torque
Note: This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
Hundreds digit: F14.21 compensation weakened
when the motor locked rotor
0: Invalid
C
1: Enable. This function prevents belt slippage
caused by low frequency compensation F14.21
set too large or torque set too large and motor
locked rotor.
Thousands digit: Torque control anti-reverse
function
0: Invalid
N
1: Anti-reverse function is active continuously
2: Anti-reversal function enabled at startup.
Torque digital setting 0.0～200.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F14.15
value F00.24=1 or 2）
F14.16 Forward speed limit 0: Digital setting 1 0 ×
channel selection in 1: AI1 Analog setting
Torque control mode 2: AI2 Analog setting
E

4:Communication provision(Communication
address: 1D0A).
7: rapid pulse setting（X8 terminal needs to
8: terminal pulse width setting（X8 terminal
Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
F14.17 Reverse speed limit 0: Digital setting 1 0 ×
channel selection in 1: AI1 Analog setting
Torque control mode 2: AI2 Analog setting
4: Communication provision(Communication
address: 1D0B).
7:Rapid pulse setting（X8 terminal needs to
8: Terminal pulse width setting（X8 terminal
78

Note：This parameter is valid when F00.24=1 or
2.
F14.18 Forward speed limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
value in Torque control is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.）
mode
F14.19 Reverse speed limit 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
value in Torque control is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.）
mode
F14.20 Torque 0.000～60.000s（This parameter is valid when 0.001s 0.100s ○
Accelerate/Decelerate F00.24=1 or 2.）
time setting
F14.21 Torque compensation 0.0～100.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.22 Positive torque gain 50.0～150.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
regulation coefficient F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.23 Negative torque gain 50.0～150.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
regulation coefficient F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.24 Flux braking coefficient 0.0～300.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 0.0% ○
F00.24=1 or 2.）
F14.25 Pre-excitation start-up 0.1 ～ 3.0 （ This parameter is valid when 0.1 0.5 ×
time constant F00.24=1）
F14.26
F14.27
F14.28
gain
Speed loop integral
time constant
Motor stabilization
coefficient
C
Speed loop proportional 0.010～6.000（This parameter is valid when 0.001
F00.24=3）
0.010～9.999（This parameter is valid when 0.001
F00.24=3）
10 ～ 300 （ This parameter is valid when
F00.24=3）
1
0.500
0.360
100
○
○
N
F14.29 Compensation gain of 100.0～130.0%（This parameter is valid when 0.1% 100.0% ○
vibration restrain F00.24=3）
F14.30 Torque compensation 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency（This parameter 0.01Hz 20.00H ○
limit frequency is valid when F00.24=1 or 2.） z
F15－Asynchronous Motor Parameter Group

E

Name Set Range
F15.00 Reserved
F15.01 Asynchronous motor rated 0.1～6553.5KW 0.1KW Base on ×
power motor
type
F15.02 Asynchronous motor rated 1～690V 1V Base on ×
voltage motor
type
F15.03 Asynchronous motor rated 0.1～6553.5A 0.1A Base on ×
current motor
type
F15.04 Asynchronous motor rated 0.00～600.00Hz 0.01Hz Base on ×
frequency motor
type
F15.05 Asynchronous motor rated 0～60000r/min 1r/min Base on ×
rotational speed motor
type
F15.06 Asynchronous motor poles 1～7 1 2 ×
No.
79
F15.07 Asynchronous motor stator 0.001～65.535Ω (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.001Ω Base on ×

resistance motor
0.0001～6.5535Ω(inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.0001Ω
type
F15.08 Asynchronous motor rotor 0.001～65.535Ω (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.001Ω Base on ×
resistance motor
0.0001～6.5535Ω(inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.0001Ω
type
F15.09 Asynchronous motor 0.01～655.35mH (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.01mH Base on ×
leakage inductance motor
0.001～65.535mH (inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.001mH
type
F15.10 Asynchronous motor 0.1～6553.5mH (inverter power＜7.5KW) 0.1mH Base on ×
mutual inductance motor
0.01～655.35mH (inverter power≥7.5KW) 0.01mH
type
F15.11 Asynchronous motor no 0.01～655.35A 0.01A Base on ×
load current motor
type
F15.12 Reserved
F15.13 Reserved
F15.14 Reserved
F15.15 Reserved
F15.16 Reserved
F15.17 Reserved
F15.18 Reserved
F15.19 Motor parameter
self-tuning selection
C
0: Inaction
1: asynchronous motor stop to self-adjusting
2: asynchronous motor rotate no-load to
self-adjusting
3: Reserved
Note：
1 0 ×
N
① Before adjustment ， The nameplate data
should be setting directly.
② Motor parameter group can have special
default values, or can be modified by users, or
can be self-adjusted.
③ when parameter F15.01 is modified， the
other parameters of the motor will turn into
E
default values automatically.

F15.20 Reserved
F15.21 Reserved
F15.22 Reserved
F16－Closed loop encoder parameter group

Name Set Range
F16.00 Zero-speed servo 0：Zero-speed servo is invalid. 1 0 ○
enabled 1：Zero-speed servo is valid.
F16.01 Encoder line number 1～10000 1 1024 ○
F16.02 Direction of encoder Units digit：AB phase sequence 1 00 ×
0: Forward direction
1:Reverse direction
Tens digit: Set of point positioning and seeking
position direction.
0: Seeking position according to command
direction.
1: Seeking position according to forward
direction.
80
2: Seeking position according to reverse

direction.
3: Seeking position according to random
direction.
F16.03 Encoder fractional 0.001～60.000 0.001 1.000 ○
frequency coefficient
F16.04 Encoder filtering 5～100 1 15 ○
coefficient
F16.05 Position control mode 0:Position control is invalid。 1 0 ×
1:Point positioning mode。
2:Recovery point positioning mode
3～4:Reserved
Remarks:
1, This parameter is valid while F00.24=2
2, While F16.05=1, need to cooperate with
multi-function input terminal function of No.66.
3,While F16.05=2, need to cooperate with
multi-function input terminal function of No.69.
F16.06 Position control 0.01～100.00Hz 0.01Hz 30.00Hz ×
maximum frequency
F16.07 Position control 0.01～5.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz ×
minimum frequency
F16.08
F16.09
F16.10
Creeping afterpulse
count before finishing
the position
Positioning reaches to
the pulse range
Position control gain
C
0～60000
1～255
1～5000
1
1
30
200
○
○
N
F16.11 PSG alteration point 0.01～30.00Hz 0.01Hz 5.00Hz ○
F16.12 Point positioning 0.00～360.00 degree 0.01 0.00 ○
relative to Z-axis angle
F16.13 Positioning control 1～60000 1 200 ○
acceleration-deceleratio
n time
E
F17－Reserved Parameter Group 1

Name Set Range
F17.00 Reserved
～
F17.20
F18－Enhance Control Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F18.00 Operation panel control 0:no binding 1 0 ○
frequency binding 1:operation keyboard digital setup
2:AI1 analog setup
3:AI2 analog setup
4:terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup
5:communication provide(Modbus and
external bus use the same main
frequency storage)
6:EAI1 analog setup(extension valid)
81
7:EAI2 analog setup(extension valid)

8:high speed pulse setup( X8 terminal
need choose the relative function)
9:terminal pulse width setup(X8 terminal
need choose the relative function)
10:terminal encoder provide(decide by
X1，X2)
11～15：Reserved
F18.01 Terminal control Same as above 1 0 ○
frequency binding
F18.02 Communication Same as above 1 0 ○
control frequency
binding
F18.03 Digital frequency Units digit: keyboard UP/DW integral control 1 0000 ○
integral function 0:integral function
selection 1:no integral function
Tens digit: terminal UP/DW integral control
0:integral function
1:no integral function
Hundreds digit: Keyboard shuttle knob enable
(shuttle keyboard effective)
0:The shuttle knob is valid in the monitoring
interface
1:The shuttle knob is invalid in the monitoring
F18.04 Keyboard UP/DOWN

C
interface
Thousands digit: keypad adjustment of
frequency classic mode selection
0: invalid
1: valid, adjustment range decided by F18.05
0.01～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.10Hz ○
N
integral rate
F18.05 Keyboard no integral 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.01Hz ○
single step’s size setup
F18.06 Terminal UP/DOWN 0.01～50.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.20Hz ○
integral rate
F18.07 Terminal no integral 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.10Hz ○
single step’s size setup
F18.08 Droop control decline 0.00～10.00Hz 0.01Hz 0.00Hz ○
E
frequency
F18.09 Setup accumulate power 0～65535 hours
1 0 ○
on time
F18.10 Setup accumulate run 0～65535 hours
1 0 ○
time
F18.11 Timing run function 0: invalid
1 0 ○
enable 1: valid
F18.12 Timing run stop time 0.1～6500.0Min 0.1Min 2.0Min ○
F18.13 Currently run arrival 0.0～6500.0Min
0.1Min 1.0Min ○
time
F18.14 Keyboard UP/DOWN 0:keyboard frequency provide value adjusting 1 0 ○
selection under monitor 1:PID digital provide value adjusting
mode 2～6: Reserved
F18.15 V/F vibration restrain 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 50.00Hz ○
end frequency
F18.16 Advanced control Units digit : the function of torque closed-loop 1 0001 ○
functions control
0: torque open-loop control
1: torque closed-loop control
Tens digit: Torque limit mode
0: Torque limit according to rated current of
frequency converter
1: Torque limit according to rated torque current
82
Hundreds digit ：fast through function when less

than the lower limit frequency
0: invalid
1: valid
Thousands digit：in torque control mode，Low
torque given PWM blocking function
（Thousands digit is valid when F00.24=1）
0: invalid
1: valid
F18.17 cooling fan control Units digit: Fan control mode 1 00 ○
selection 0:Smart fan
1:Inverter is running all the time after power on
2:No running for fan, but it starts automatically
when the temperature is higher than 75 degree.
Tens digit: Speed regulation fan control mode.
0:Smart PWM Speed regulation
1:Running at highest speed.
F18.18 No speed vector slip 50%～200%（when F00.24=1,this function is 1% 100% ○
gain valid）
F18.19 Low-order of total 0～9999 1kwh 0 ○
power consumption
F18.20 High-order of total 0～65535（1represent 10000kwh） 10000k 0 ○
F18.21
F18.22
power consumption
Correction factor of
power consumption calc
ulation
V/F separate control
voltage reference
C
50.0%～200.0%
0: Digital setting (determined by 18.23)

wh
0.1% 100.0%
1 1
○
○
N
channel 2: AI2 analog setting
4: Reserved
E
function)
function)
correspond to the motor rated voltage
F18.23 V/F separate control 0.0%～100.0% 0.1% 0.0% ○
voltage
digital reference
F18.24 Low frequency slip gain 30～300% 1% 100% ○
F19－Protective Relevant Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F19.00 Power off restart waiting 0.0～20.0s（0 means no start function） 0.1s 0.0s ×
time
F19.01 Fault self-recovery times 0～10（0 means no automatic reset function） 1 0 ×
F19.02 Fault self-recovery 0.5～20.0s 0.1s 5.0s ×
interval time
F19.03 Motor overload 0:alarm: continuous run 1 2 ○
83
protection action 1:alarm，stop run as halt mode

selection 2:fault，free halt
F19.04 Motor overload 10.0～2000.0%（motor rated current） 0.1% 100.0% ○
protection coefficient
F19.05 Inverter overload 0:detection all the time 1 0 ○
pre-alarm detection 1:detection as constant velocity
selection
F19.06 Inverter overload 20～180%（inverter rated current） 1% 130% ○
pre-alarm detection
level
F19.07 Inverter overload 0.0～20.0s 0.1s 5.0s ○
pre-alarm delay time
F19.08 Motor underload 0.0～120.0%（motor rated current） 0.1% 50.0% ○
alarm detection level
F19.09 Motor underload 0.1～60.0s 0.1s 2.0s ○
alarm detection time
F19.10 Motor underload Units digit: detection selection 1 00 ○
alarm detection action 0:no detection
1:detection all the time when run
2:detection only when constant velocity
Tens digit: action selection
0:alarm，continuous run
F19.11 Input& output phase

loss, short circuit
detection action
C
1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
Units digit: input phase loss
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
Tens digit: output phase loss
1 1111 ○
N
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
Hundreds digit: power-on on earth short circuit
protect detection enable
0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
Thousands digit: operation on earth short circuit
E
protect detection enable

0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
F19.12 Over voltage stall 0:forbid 1 1 ×
selection 1:allowed
F19.13 Over voltage stall 100～150%（rated busbar voltage） 1% 125% ×
protection voltage
F19.14 Automatic current limit 50～230%（G type rated current） 1% 170% ×
level
F19.15 Frequency decline rate 0.00～99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/s 10.00Hz/s ×
of automatic current
limit
F19.16 Automatic current limit 0:constant velocity invalid 1 0 ×
action selection 1:constant velocity valid
F19.17 Rapid current-limiting 150%～250%（G type rated current） 1% 230% ×
coefficient
F19.18 Motor run section 0:forbid 1 0 ×
selection when instant 1:allowed
power off
F19.19 Frequency droop rate 0.00～99.99Hz/s 0.01Hz/s 10.00Hz/s ×
when instant power off
F19.20 Voltage rebound 0.00～10.00s 0.01s 0.10s ×
84
estimate time when

instant power off
F19.21 Action estimate voltage 60～100%(rated busbar voltage) 1% 80% ×
F19.22 Allowed the longest off 0.30～5.00s 0.01s 2.00s ×
time when instant power
off
F19.23 Terminal external device 0:alarm，continuous run 1 2 ×
fault action selection 1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
F19.24 Power on terminal 0:invalid 1 0 ×
protection selection 1:valid
F19.25 Provide lost detection 0～100% 1% 0% ○
value
F19.26 Provide lost detection 0.0～500.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
time
F19.27 Feedback lost detection 0～100% 1% 12% ○
value
F19.28 Feedback lost 0.0～500.0s 0.1s 0.5s ○
detection time
F19.29 Deviation magnitude 0～100% 1% 50% ○
abnormal detection
F19.30
F19.31
value
Deviation magnitude
abnormal detection time
Protection action
selection 1
C
0.0～500.0s
Units digit: PID provide loss detection act

0:no detection
1:alarm, continue run
0.1s
1
0.5s
000
○
○
N
2:alarm, stop run as halt mode
3:fault, free halt
Tens digit: PID feedback loss detection act
0:no detection
3:fault，free halt
E
Hundreds digit: PID error value abnormal detect

action
0:no detection
3:fault, free halt
F19.32 Protection action Units digit: communication abnormal 1 1200 ×
selection 2 action: include communication time out
and error
2:fault, free halt
Tens digit: E2PROM abnormal action
selection
2:fault, free halt
Hundreds digit: contactor abnormal action
0:alarm，continue run
1:alarm，stop run as halt mode
2:fault，free halt
Thousands digit: running lack-Voltage fault
85
display action selection.

0:no detection
1:fault，free halt
F19.33 Reserved
F19.34 Reserved
F19.35 Fault indication and Units digit: fault indication selection during the 1 00 ×
clock during the period period of fault reset automatically
of recovery 0:action
1:no action
Tens digit: fault clock function selection: to
achieve fault display before power down: etc.
0:forbid
1:open
F19.36 Continuous run Match up with protect action 1 0 ×
frequency selection 0:run at the frequency setup by now
when alarm 1:run at the frequency of upper limit
2:run at the frequency of low limit
3:run at the frequency of abnormal for standby
F19.37 Abnormal standby 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 10.00Hz ×
frequency
F19.38 Encoder disconnection 0.0～8.0s(No detection when value is 0) 0.1s 0.0s ○
detection time
F19.39
F19.40
F19.41
Over speed （OS）
detection time
Over speed （OS）
detection time
Detection value when
speed deviation is too
C
0.0～120.0%(equals upper limit frequency)
0.00～20.00s（No detection when value is 0）
0.0～50.0%(equals upper limit frequency)

0.1%
0.01s
0.1%
120.0%
0.00s
10.0%
○
○
N
large
F19.42 Detection time when 0.00～20.00s（No detection when value is 0） 0.01s 0.00s ○
speed deviation is too
large
F19.43 Overvoltage suppression 0.0～100.0% 0.1% 90.0% ○
coefficient
F19.44 Reserved
E
F20－Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F20.00 Virtual input VDI1 function 0～90 1 0 ○
selection
selection
selection
selection
selection
F20.05 Virtual output VDO1 function 0～60 1 0 ○
selection
selection
selection
86

selection
selection
F20.10 Virtual output VDO1 0.00～600.00s 0.01s 0.00s ○
open delay time
open delay time
open delay time
open delay time
open delay time
close delay time
close delay time
close delay time
close delay time
F20.19
F20.20
F20.21
Virtual output VDO5
close delay time
Virtual input VDI enable
control
Virtual input VDI status
digital setup
C 0.00～600.00s
00～FF
00～FF
0.01s
1
0.00s
00
00
○
○
N
F20.22 Virtual input/output 00~FF 1 00 ○
connection Bit0:VDI1 and VDO1 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
Bit1:VDI2 and VDO2 connection
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
E

0:positive logic
1:negative logic
0:positive logic
1:negative logic
0:positive logic
1:negative logic

Name Set Range
F21.00～ Reserved
F21.21
87

Name Set Range
F22.00～ Reserved
F22.17

Name Set Range
F23.00～ Reserved
F23.17

Name Set Range
F24.00～ Reserved
F24.13
Function
code
F25.00
Name
User Function Code 1
C
F25－User Definition Display Parameter Group
F00.00～F25.xx
Set Range
Min.
Unit
0.01
Factory
Default
25.00
Modifi
-cation
○
N
F25.01 User Function Code 2 F00.00～F25.xx 0.01 25.00 ○
E

88

F26－Fault Record Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
F26.00 The last fault record 0:no fault 1 0 *
1:overcurrent at acceleration
2:overcurrent at deceleration
3:overcurrent at constant speed
4:overvoltage at acceleration
5:overvoltage at deceleration
6:overvoltage at constant speed
7:overvoltage at motor halt
8:undervoltage at run
9:drive overload protection
10:motor overload protection
11:motor underload protection
C
12:input phase loss
13:output phase loss
14:inverter module protection
15:short circuit to earth at run
16:short circuit to earth when power on
17:drive overheat
N
18:external device fault
19:current detect circuit fault
20:external interference
21:internal interference—main clock etc
22:PID provide lost
23:PID feedback lost
24:PID error value abnormal
E
25:terminal protection activate

26:communication fault
27~29:reserve
30:EEROM read-write error
31:temperature detection disconnection
32:auto-tunning fault
33:contactor abnormal
34:factory fault 1
35:factory fault 2
36:capacitor overheat(few mode with overheat
protection)
37:encoder disconnection
38:over-speed protection
39:protection when speed deviation is too large
40: Fault of Z pulse loses
41: Analog channel disconnected protection
42～50：Reserved
F26.01 The last two fault Same as above 1 0 *
records
F26.02 The last three fault Same as above 1 0 *
records
F26.03 The last four fault Same as above 1 0 *
89
records
F26.04 Setup frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last one fault
F26.05 Output frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last one fault
F26.06 Output current at the last 0.0～6553.5A 0.1A 0.0A *
one fault
F26.07 DC busbar voltage at the 0.0～6553.5V 0.1V 0.0V *
last one fault
F26.08 Module temperature at 0～125℃ 1℃ 0℃ *
the last one fault
F26.09 Input terminal status at 0 *
the last one fault
F26.10 Accumulated run time at 0～65535min 1min 0min *
the last one fault
F26.11 Setup frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last two fault
F26.12 Output frequency at the 0.00Hz～upper limit frequency 0.01Hz 0.00Hz *
last two fault
F26.13 Output current at the last 0.0～6553.5A 0.1A 0.0A *
two fault
F26.14 DC busbar voltage at the 0.0～6553.5V 0.1V 0.0V *
F26.15
F26.16
F26.17
last two fault
Module temperature at the
last two fault
Input terminal status at
the last two fault
Accumulated run time at
C
0～125℃
0～65535min
1℃
1min
0℃
0min
*
*
N
the last two fault
F27－Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
E
F27.00 User password 00000～65535 1 00000 ○

F27.01 Manufacturer password 00000～65535 1 00000 ○
C－Monitor Function Parameter Group

Name Set Range
Display the parameter of
C-00
F00.01，F00.07 definition
C-01
C-02
C-03
C-04
C-05
90
⑴corresponding relationship of input terminal status as below:
：terminal input invalid
Reserved X1 terminal status ：terminal input valid

Reserved X2 terminal status
X8 terminal status
X3 terminal status
X7 terminal status
X4 terminal status
X6 terminal status
X5 terminal status
⑵Corresponding relationship of standard output terminal status as below:
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
C Y1 terminal status
Y2 terminal status
：terminal input valid
N
Y3 terminal status
Reserved
Y4 terminal status
Reserved
RLY terminal status
⑶Corresponding relationship of communication virtual input terminal status as below:

E

：terminal input valid
Reserved CX1 terminal status

Reserved CX2 terminal status
CX8 terminal status
CX3 terminal status
CX7 terminal status
CX4 terminal status
CX6 terminal status
CX5 terminal status
⑷Drive status:
BIT0:1=busbar voltage setup
BIT1:1=common run command valid
BIT2:1=jog run command valid
BIT3:1=drive run period
BIT4:1=current run direction to reverse
91
BIT5:1=run command direction to reverse

BIT6:1=deceleration brake period
BIT7:1=motor acceleration period
BIT8:1=motor deceleration period
BIT9：1= drive alarm
BIT10：1= drive fault
BIT11：1= current limited period
BIT12：1= fault self-recovery period
BIT13：1= self-adjusting period
BIT14：1= free halt status
BIT15：1= speed tracking start
C
N
E
92
7 Detailed function specification

The parameter function code of this chapter listed content as below:
Code Factory
Description Setup Range/Explanation
No. Default
7.1 System Parameter Group: F00

F00.00 Parameter group display control Range: 0～3 2
0: Basic list mode. Display only F00, F01, F02, F03 basic control parameter
group and F26 fault record parameter group.
1: Middle list mode. Display all parameter except for extension: virtual and
reserve parameter group.
2: Senior list mode. All parameter groups can be displayed.
3: User list mode. Display parameter defined by user: and monitor
parameter: F00.00 display all the time.
Note
C
F00.00 display all the time. Under intermediate menu mode:
irrelevant parameter group can be covered according to different
control mode.
N
C-00 display parameter
F00.01 Range: 0～65 51
selection when operation
F00.02 Range: 0～65 2
E
F00.03 Range: 0～65 4

F00.04 Range: 0～65 5
F00.05 Range: 0～65 6
F00.06 Range: 0～65 9
The above parameter display when inverter run by C-00~C-05 parameter groups,
pressing to switch between these parameters.
Pressing and then return to C-00 parameter monitor.
For example: pressing parameter switch from C-00 to C-01: continuous
pressing the same button: parameter switch from C-01 to C-02: then pressing
return to C-00 parameter monitor.
93
0: Main setup frequency (0.01Hz)

1: Auxiliary setup frequency (0.01Hz)
2: Setup frequency (0.01Hz)
3: Output frequency (0.01Hz)
4: Output current(0.1A)（display 0.01A below 11KW）
5: Output voltage (1V)
6: DC busbar voltage (0.1V)
7: Motor speed (1 circle/min)
8: Motor line velocity (1 circle/min)
9: Inverter temperature (1℃)
10: Run time already this time (0.1min)
11: Current accumulate run time (1h)
12: Current accumulate power-on time (1h)
13:Inverter status (displays the working state of inverter, show it with
decimalism, after change it into binary, the definition is on the parameter
details.)
14: Input terminal status
15: Output terminal status
C
16: Extension output terminal status
N
17: Extension input terminal status
18: Communication virtual input terminal status
19: Internal virtual input node status
20: Analog input AI1 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
21: Analog input AI2 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
E
22: Extension analog input EAI1 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)

23: Extension analog input EAI2 (after checkout)(0.01V / 0.01mA)
24: Analog AO1 output (after checkout) (0.01V /0.01mA)
25: Analog AO2 output（after checkout）（0.01V or 0.01mA）
26: Extension analog EAO1 output (0.01V /0.01mA)
27: Extension analog EAO2 output (0.01V /0.01mA)
28: External pulse input frequency (1Hz)
29: Reserved
30: Process PID provide (0.01V)
31: Process PID feedback (0.01V)
32: Process PID deviation (0.01V)
33: Process PID output (0.01Hz)
34: Simple PLC current segment No.
35: External multi-speed current segment No.
94
36: Constant pressure water supply provide pressure (0.001Mpa)

37: Constant pressure water supply feedback pressure (0.001Mpa)
38: Constant pressure water supplies relay status
39: Current length (1M)
40: Accumulate length (1M)
41: Current internal count value
42: Current internal time value (0.1s)
43: Run command setup channel (0: keyboard 1: terminal
2: communication)
44: Main frequency provide channel
45: Auxiliary frequency provide channel
46: Rated current (0.1A)
47: Rated voltage (1V)
48: Rated power (0.1KW)
49, 50: Reserved
C
51: The frequency after deceleration（0.01Hz）
52: Motor rotator frequency（0.01Hz）（the frequency estimate on the
open-loop ,actual measurement for close-loop）
53 :Present provide torque（relative to rated torque, it has direction）
N
54: Present output torque（relative to rated torque, it has direction）
55: Present torque current (0.1A）
56: The present flux current （0.1A）
57: Setting motor rotate speed（r/min）
58: Output power（active power）（0.1KW）
E
59～65: Reserved

F00.07 Range: 0～65 2
selection when stop
F00.08 Range: 0～65 6
selection when stop
F00.09 Range: 0～65 48
selection when stop
F00.10 Range: 0～65 14
selection when stop
F00.11 Range: 0～65 20
selection when stop
F00.12 Range: 0～65 9
selection when stop
The above parameter display when inverter stop by C-00~C-05 parameter group,
pressing to switch between these parameters. Pressing and then
95
return to C-00 parameter monitor. For example: pressing parameter switch

from C-00 to C-01, continuous pressing the same button: parameter switch from
C-01 to C-02: then pressing return to C-00 parameter monitor. Monitor
contents various as different monitor parameter: refer to parameter F00.01.
Monitor parameter group C-00~C-05 have run and stop modes.

For example C-00 display different physical value under run and
Note stop two modes.
Power-on fault monitor

F00.13 Range: 0～5 0
parameter selection
When the parameter power on first time: C monitor parameter group display
under drive run or stop status, For example F00.13=1, power on or stop to monitor,
display parameter setup by C-01;when F00.02=3, F00.08=6, power on, inverter
stops, busbar voltage display; inverter runs, output frequency and keypad display.
Pressing
F00.14
control
C
monitor C-00 for the setting motor value.
Parameter operation
Range: units digit: 0~2
tens digit: 0~5
hundreds digit: 0~4
000
N
Units digit: To define which parameters will be allowed to modify.
0: All parameters are allowed to modification.
1: Excerpt this parameter, the other parameter is not allowed to
modification.
2: Except F01.01, F01.04 and this parameter, the others parameter are
not allowed to modification.
E
Tens digit: To define which parameters will be resumed factory default value
0: No action.
1: All parameters return to default.(not include fault record parameter
group(F26 group) parameter).
2: Except for motor parameter: all parameters return to default. (not
include F15 and F26 group parameter).
3: Extension parameter return to default.(only F21~F24 group parameter
return to default).
4: Virtual parameter return to default.(only F20 group parameter return to
default).
5: Fault record return to default. (Only fault record parameter group (F26
group) restores factory default).
Hundreds digit: Locked key that definite the keypad when locking function is
valid.
0: All locked.
96
1: Except button: the others locked.

2: Except , button: the others locked
1. In factory status, the unit of this function code parameter is 0,

and it is default and allowed to change all the other function code
parameters: when user finish: and want to change the function
code setup: this function code parameter should set up 0 first.
When all changes finish and need to do parameter protect: this
function code setup into the IP grade you need.
Note 2. The decade recovers to 0 automatically after record remove or
factory default operation.
3. When the third of parameter F00.14 finish setup: button
pressing lasting for 2 seconds to lock keyboard and relevant
C
keyboard key: when need to unlock the keyboard: press the
button for 2 seconds.
N
Range: units digit: 0,1
tens digit: 0~9
F00.15 Button function selection 0001
hundreds digit: 0,1
thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: panel button selection
E
0: Reversal command action button

1: Jog action button
Tens digit: multi-function button function selection
0: Invalid.
1: Jog run. Multi-function button as jog run button: run direction decided by
unit bit of F01.16. After setting function, the jog run function on the
keypad is invalid.
2: For/rev switching. Press this button to change the run direction when run:
then press the same button change to another direction. This function key is not
used as start key, only for signal switch
3: Free stop. Setup free stop function and stop mode F02.11 the same
function with 1 Jog run.
4: Switching to run command provide mode as the setup order of
F00.16.
5: For/rev torque switching. After this function is valid, it can realize the
97
direction switching after torque model.

6～9: Reserved
Hundredth: terminal run command control
0: keypad is invalid.
1: keypad is valid.
Thousandth: communication run command control
0: keypad is invalid.
1: keypad is valid.
Multi-function key run command

F00.16 Range: 0～3 0
channel switching order selection
0: Keyboard control→terminal control→communication control
1: Keyboard control←→terminal control
2: Keyboard control←→communication control
3: Terminal control←→communication control
C
These parameters cooperate with multi-function key to run command channel
switching function: with special switch to command channel switching order.
1.Command channel priority terminal switch to(terminal function

code 49,50,51)→terminal run command channel selection(terminal
N
function code 52,53)→multi-function key switch→F01.15,when
switching to terminal control, be sure the terminal command
invalid. Terminal switch to and terminal run command channel
Note
selection refer to F08 group parameter about the detailed
description of terminal function.
E
2. We suggest alter the mode at the stop state.
Motor speed display

F00.17 Range: 0.1～999.9% 100.0%
coefficient
This function code is used to check speed scale display error, there is no effect to
motor actual speed.
Line velocity display
F00.18 Range: 0.1～999.9% 1.0%
coefficient
This function code is used to check speed scale display error, there is no effect to
motor actual speed.
F00.19 Extended Port parts set Range: 0～10 0
0: Expansion card invalid
1: Reserved
2: Multi pump water supply card
98
3: Incremental PG encoder
4～10: Reserved
This function is for extended port expansion card parameter, after setting
expansion card, F00.19 will choose the expansion card number accordingly, then
we can use the expansion card normally. For example, when Extended Port add
PG expansion card, F00.19 should be set to 3.
Analog input terminal tens digit: 0,1
F00.20 0000
configuration hundreds digit: 0~2
thousands digit: 0~2
This parameter can configurate analog input AI1, AI2, EAI1, EAI2 to be current
input type or voltage input type.
Units digit: AI1 configuration
0:0~10V input
1:4~20mA input
1:4~20mA input
C
Tens digit: AI2 configuration
0:-10~10V input
Hundreds digit: EAI1 configuration

0:0~10V input
N
1:-10~10V input
2:4~20mA input
Thousands digit: EAI2 configuration
0:0~10V input
E
1:-10~10V input
2:4~20mA input
Dial switching(SW1,SW2)under the left corner of CPU to the

Note corresponding position: when AI1,AI2 configuration.

Analog output terminal tens digit: 0,1
F00.21 0000
configuration hundreds digit: 0,1
This parameter can configurate AO1, AO2, EAO1, EAO2 analog signal output to
be voltage type or current type.
Units digit: AO1 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Tens digit: AO2 configuration
99
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Hundreds digit: EAO1 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Thousands digit: EAO2 configuration
0:0~10V output
1:4~20mA output
Dial switching(SW1,SW2)under the left corner of CPU to the

Note corresponding position: when AI1,AI2 configuration.
Range: units digit: Reserved

Y output terminal tens digit: Reserved
F00.22 0000
configuration hundreds digit: Reserved
Units digit ~ hundreds digit: Reserved
0: Open collector output

1: DO output
C
Thousands digit: Y4 output configuration
The thousands digit decide the Y4 output terminal type, when 0 means open
N
collector output, when 1 means high speed pulse DO output. .
F00.23 G/P type setup Range: 0, 1 0
0:G type. Adapt to constant torque load type.
1:P type. Adapt to fan & pump load type.
E
EN500/EN600 integrates G/P type design in full power range. F15 group motor
relative parameter will change automatically according to the G or P type.
P type machine only can support V/F control .

Note
F00.24 Motor control model Range: 0～2 0

0: V/F control
If we need to start the fan and water pump application , or the inverter should
drive one more AC motors, please choose the V/F control mode, when drive parts
of the synchronous machines, we also can choose V/F control.
1: Speedless Vector Control 1 (Comparing with the speed vector control 2,
the mode is more suitable to control the induction motor below 160KW,
supporting the speed and torque control)
Speedless sensor vector control run mode, mainly used to velocity control, torque
100
control in the application site which require high control performance. To get
better control performance, we need to set up motor parameter group F15
according to the motor nameplate details, and doing the self-learning to motor
parameter. One VFD can only drive one motor in vector control mode, and VFD
power need match up with motor, normally one class less or more of the VFD
power than motor is allowed.
2: with speed sensor vector control (support the speed and torque control)
When choose the closed-loop vector control mode, the AC motor should be
installed with an encoder, and the inverter should be installed with the same type
of the encoder. It can be used on the high-accuracy speed control & torque control
application. One inverter only can drive one AC motor, like Paper-make machine,
cranes, and elevator.
When using the closed-loop control, including setting motor parameter (F15
group), we should also set the encoder parameter group (F16),and the Extended
Port (F00.19) parameter.
C
F00.25 Monitor parameter 2 selection Range : 0～65
When user choose EN-LED4-D keypad , under monitoring mode we can use
4
F00.25 parameter to modify monitoring content of keypad digital display (LED2).

When user choose EN-LCD1 or EN-LCD2 keypad, under monitoring mode we
N
can use F00.25 parameter to change monitoring content of below LED.
For monitoring content of F00.25 parameter, please refer to description of F00.01
F00.26 Busbar voltage adjustment Range : 0.900～1.100 1.000
We can use this parameter to adjust the busbar voltage; to make the inverter bus
E
voltage is accordingly to the exact figures.

Parameter copying and Range: units digit: 0~2
F00.27 00
language selection tens digit: 0~3
Units digit: language selection. (Only valid for LCD keypad)
0: Chinese
1: English
2: Reserve
Tens digit: parameter upload and download(valid for LCD and digital
potentiometer keypad)
0: No action
1: parameter upload
2: parameter upload 1 (without motor parameter)
3: parameter upload 2 (with motor parameter)
When all motors carried by inverters are the same type in one system, we can use
parameters download 1. Otherwise, use the parameters download 2.
101
7.2 Basic Run Function Parameter Group:F01

Main frequency input
F01.00 Range: 0～14 0
channel selection
Total 15 types input channel for selection to chose inverter input channel of the
main provide frequency,among 11~14 are reserve channel,currently there is no
corresponding function.
0:Operation keyboard digital setup. When main frequency setup initial
value to F01.01: modify F01.01 parameter to change main setting frequency with
operation keyboard: or with , button to modify the value of F01.01
1:AI1 analog setup. Main frequency setup confirmed by AI1 analog
voltage/ current, input range: 0~10V (AI1 jumper wire selection V side)or
4~20mA(AI1 jumper wire selection A side).
2:AI2 analog setup. Main frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog
voltage/current, input range: -10~10V (AI2 jumper wire selection V side)or
C
4~20mA(AI2 jumper wire selection A side).
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup. When main frequency initial
value is parameter F01.01, through terminal UP/DOWN function to adjust the
main setting frequency. Terminal function setup into 16(frequency increase
progressively (UP))or 17(frequency decrease progressively control(DOWN)).
N
4:Communication provide(Communication address:1E01). Main
frequency provide by selection communication mode.
5:EAI1 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI1 is valid,main
frequency confirmed by EAI1 analog voltage/current,input range:-10~10V(EAI1
E
jumper wire selection V side)or 4~ 20mA(EAI1 jumper wire selection Aside).

Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function.
6:EAI2 analog setup. when extension analog input EAI2 valid,main
frequency setup by EAI2 analog voltage / current,input range:-10~10V(EAI2
jumper wire selection V side) or 4~ 20mA(EAI2 jumper wire selection A side).
Relevant extension card selection needed to use this setup function.
7:High speed pulse setup. main frequency setup by frequency signal of
terminal pulse(only X8 input),input pulse specification:voltage range 15~30V;
frequency range 0.00~50.00KHz.
8:Terminal pulse setup. main frequency setup by pulse width signal of
terminal pulse(only X8 input),input pulse specification:voltage range 15~30V;
pulse width range 0.1~999.9ms.
9:Terminal encoder setup.main frequency setup by terminal encoder
pulse(only combination input by X1 and X2) and frequency velocity set by
parameter F08.30.
102
10～14: Reserved
Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control,its prior to

command direction control: when main frequency provide is
AI2,EAI1,EAI2: and setup provide to be -10~10V,run direction
confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely,when PID
Note
run is valid, run direction confirmed by PID error polarity and
parameter F11.21 completely.
Excerpt terminal encoder provide (F01.00=9), main and auxiliary

provide channel cannot be set into the same frequency source: if
! they are the same: then panel would be light (ALM) and display
A-51.
Main frequency digital Range:0.00Hz~upper

F01.01 50.00Hz
setup limit frequency
F01.02
control
C
When F01.00=0,3 or 4,F01.01 is the initial value of main frequency.
Main frequency digital
Range: 00～11 00
N
Units digit: power down reserve setup
0:Main frequency power down reserve. When main frequency channel
provide is valid, power down in run status, current main frequency of run
frequency is recorded in parameter F01.01.
1: Main frequency power down no reserve.
E

0:Halt main frequency hold. When main frequency channel provide is
valid, current run frequency only recorded after halt.
1:Halt main frequency recovery F01.01. main setting frequency recorded
in software is recovery to value of parameter F01.01 after halt.
Hundreds digit: Set of communication presetting frequency dimension.( It is
valid for both main and salve frequency communication presetting)
0:Preset of absolute frequency mode(preset 5000 represent 50.00Hz).
1:Preset 10000 represent upper limit frequency (F01.11).
Only when parameter F01.00=0, 3, 4, it can be valid, after

power-fail or Stop storage function both are valid,stop the machine
Note first, it also can serve.
103
Auxiliary frequency input

F01.03 Range : 0～20 20
channel select
VFD auxiliary provides frequency input channel has 21 input channels for
selection, for them 11~20 are Reserved channels, and currently there is no
relevant function:
0:Keyboard operation digital setup. When auxiliary frequency setup
initial value is parameter F01.04, modify parameter F01.04 to change auxiliary
setting frequency: or with , button modify the value of parameter
F01.04
1:AI1 analog setup. Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AI1 analog
voltage /current, input range: 0~10V (AI1 jumper wire selection V side)or
4~20mA(AI1 jumper wire A side).
2:AI2 analog setup. Auxiliary frequency setup confirmed by AI2 analog
voltage/current, input range: -10~10V (AI2 jumper wire selection V side) or
4~20mA (AI2 jumper wire selection A side).
C
3:Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting setup. Auxiliary frequency initial value
is parameter F01.04, through terminal UP/DOWN function to adjust auxiliary
setting frequency.
4:communication setting( Communication address:1E01). The initial
N
value of auxiliary frequency is for F01.04, it will determine by F05.00 of the
communication setting.
5:EAI1 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI1 is valid, auxiliary
frequency setup confirmed by EAI1 analog voltage/current, input range: -10~10V
(EAI1 jumper wire selection V side)or 4~20mA(EAI1 jumper wire selection A
E
side).
6:EAI2 analog setup. When extension analog input EAI2 is valid, auxiliary
frequency setup confirmed by EAI2 analog voltage/current, input range: -10~10V
(EAI2 jumper wire selection V side) or 4~20mA (EAI2 jumper wire selection A
side).
7:High speed pulse setup. Auxiliary frequency setup by frequency signal of
terminal pulse (only X8 input), input pulse specification: voltage range 5~30V;
frequency range 0.00~50.00 KHz.
8:Terminal pulse width setup. Auxiliary frequency setup by pulse width
signal of terminal pulse (only X8 input), input pulse specification: voltage range
15~30V; pulse width range 0.1~999.9ms.
9:Terminal encoder provide. Auxiliary frequency setup by terminal
encoder pulse (only X3 or X4 input), 0.01Hz is a fixed adjusting precision.
10: Reserved.
104
11: Process PID Setting. Through the main frequency setting and the
auxiliary frequency setting, can realize PID with feed forward control, which can
make the system be into a steady state quickly. Generally, it is used in the scene of
the process closed loop control, such as constant pressure closed loop control,
constant tension closed-loop control, etc.
12～20: Reserved.
Analog provide is positive and negative polarity control,its prior to

command direction control: when auxiliary frequency provide is
Note AI2,EAI1,EAI2 ,and setup provide is to be -10~10V,run direction
confirmed by analog provide signal polarity completely.
Except terminal encoder provide( F01.03=9),main and auxiliary

! provide channel cannot setup to the same frequency source,when
they are the same,then panel light(ALM),and A-51 display.
F01.04
setup
C
Auxiliary frequency digital Range:0.00Hz~upper
limit frequency
0.00Hz
When F01.03=0, 3 or 4, F01.04 is the initial frequency value of auxiliary

N
frequency.
Auxiliary frequency digital
F01.05 Range: 00～11 11
control
Units digit: power down reserve setup
E
0:Auxiliary frequency power down reserve. When auxiliary frequency

channel provide is valid and power down at run mode, the current auxiliary setting
frequency reserve in parameter F01.04.
1:Auxiliary frequency power down no reserve.
tens digit: halt reserve setup
0:Halt auxiliary frequency hold. When auxiliary frequency channel
provide is valid, recording current run frequency only after halt.
1:Halt auxiliary frequency recovery parameter F01.04 .auxiliary setting
frequency in software recording is recovered the value of parameter F01.04 after
halt.
Only when F01.03=0,3,4 is valid.
Note
Main and auxiliary provide
F01.06 Range: 0～8 0
calculating setup
105
This parameter is to select frequency provide channel: and through the complex of
main frequency source and auxiliary frequency source to achieve frequency
provide.
0:Main frequency. Complex frequency of current is main frequency.
1: Auxiliary frequency. Complex frequency of current is auxiliary
frequency.
2: Plus(polarity oppose of complex and main frequency,complex frequency
is zero).
3:Minus(polarity oppose of complex and auxiliary frequency,complex
frequency is zero).
4:Multiplication(polarity opposed of main and auxiliary frequency:
complex frequency is zero).
5:Max(the max frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value).
6:Min(the min frequency of main and auxiliary absolute value).
7:Selection no-zero value(auxiliary is not negative,main frequency
C
prior;auxiliary is negative,complex frequency is zero)
8:main frequency × Auxiliary frequency×2/F01.11. (polarity opposed of
main and auxiliary frequency complex frequency is zero, can realize the fine
tuning based on the main frequency ).
N
1.The initial polarity of main and auxiliary frequency cannot
change after main and auxiliary operation.
2.When main and auxiliary frequency channel are complex
value,and both setup into power down reserve: parameter F01.01
Note and F01.04 reserve separately the changed part of main frequency
E
and auxiliary frequency in the complex frequency when power

down.
Auxiliary frequency
F01.07 Range : 0.00～10.00 1.00
provide coefficient
Parameter F01.07 can adjust auxiliary provide frequency gain.
Coefficient after complex of
F01.08 Range: 0.00～10.00 1.00
main and auxiliary frequency
This parameter is to setup frequency flexibly and calculates the gain of complex
setting frequency by main and auxiliary frequency.
Auxiliary frequency range
F01.09 Range: 0, 1 0
selection
0:Relative high limit frequency. Auxiliary frequency setup range:
0.00Hz~high limit frequency×F01.10.
1:Relative main frequency. Auxiliary frequency setup range: 0.00Hz~main
106
frequency×F01.10.
Auxiliary frequency source
F01.10 Range: 0.00～1.00 1.00
scope
This parameter cooperate with F01.09 define the scope of auxiliary provide
frequency. Auxiliary provide frequency high limit value is restrained by the
frequency selected by parameter F01.09 through parameter F01.10 gain
calculation.
Range: lower limit
F01.11 Upper limit frequency 50.00Hz
frequency～600.00Hz
This parameter’s max setting frequency of all run modes should be modification
carefully according to the motor nameplate details.
Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F01.12 Low limit frequency 0.40Hz
frequency
Low limit frequency
F01.13 Range : 0～3 2
run mode
Sleep run hysteresis Range: 0.01Hz~upper limit
F01.14 0.01Hz
frequency C
0: As low limit frequency run.
1: As setting frequency run.
2: As zero frequency run.
frequency
N
3: Sleep: PWM clocked at sleep mode.
When actual setting frequency lower than low limit frequency, low limit frequency
run mode selection 0,then drive run at low limit frequency; low limit frequency run
mode selection 1,drive continuously run according to setting frequency; low limit
frequency run mode selection 2,drive continuously low output frequency and run at
E
zero frequency; low limit frequency run mode selection 3,immediately clock the
output and display frequency decline slowly to zero, when provide value over low
limit frequency, drive restart to accelerate run from 0Hz to provide value after
through F01.14 stagnant loop.
When F01.13=3: this parameter can finish sleep function to achieve

energy saving run and avoid drive to start frequently at threshold
Note value through width of return difference.
F01.15 Run command channel selection Range: 0～2 0

0: Operation keyboard run control. Start and stop with
1: Terminal run command control. Terminal X1 is forward (FWD),X2 is
reverse(REV)during the function code X1~X8 setup. Other terminal can also be
regarded as for/rev input terminal.
107
2: Communication runs command control. Start and stop with

communication mode.
1.Drive can change run command channel through switch of
multi-function key,terminal command channel in halt and
run,carefully modify command channel after confirm in site the
permission to run command channel modification. After the
! command channel modification: keyboard button setup valid
or not by parameter F00.15.
2.After run command channel modification,frequency channel can
be defined by parameter F18.00,F18.01,F18.02 .or defined by
parameter F01.00,F01.03,F01.06 and multi-function terminal.

tens digit: 0~2
F01.16 Run direction setup 1000
hundreds digit: 0、1
thousands digit: 0、1
command)
0: Forward.
1: Reverse.
C
Units digit: Keyboard command for/rev setup (only valid to keyboard inching
N
Tens digit: for/rev forbid (suitable for all command channel, not include
inching function)
0: For/rev available.
1: Reverse not available (imposing on reverse, stop as the halt mode).
2: Forward not available (imposing on forward, stop as the halt mode).
E
Hundreds digit: Reverse running direction (only valid for keyboard and
communication channel)
0: invalid
1: valid. It can achieve the adjustment of the motor running direction without
adjusting the UVW wiring sequence.
Note：Under the condition that realize multi-section speed control by the PLC
or terminal, if the tens of F10.01 to F10.15 is equal to 0 or 1, the direction of
motor running is not affected by this parameter.
Thousands digit: Terminal multi-section speed acceleration and deceleration
time control
0: Respectively, corresponding to acceleration and deceleration 1 to 15
1: Determined by F01.17 and F01.18
F01.17 Acceleration time 1 Range: 1～60000 Depend on type
108
F01.18 Deceleration time 1 Range:1～60000 Depend on type

Acceleration time is interval accelerate from zero frequency to high limit
frequency, deceleration time is the interval decelerate from high limit frequency to
zero frequency. The unit defined by F01.19. Example: F01.17=100, F01.19=1,
acceleration time 1 is 10.0 seconds.
1.EN500/EN600 series drive defines 15 acceleration and

deceleration time, only acceleration and deceleration time 1
defined here, acceleration and deceleration 2~15 defined in
Note parameter F04.16~F04.43.
2.acceleration and deceleration 1~15 select time unit through
parameter F1.19,factory default unit is 0.1 second.
F01.19 Accelerate/decelerate time unit Range: 0～2 1

This function can define acceleration and deceleration time unit.
0:0.01s
1:0.1s
2:1s
C
N
1.The function is valid to all acceleration and deceleration excerpt
for inching run.
Note 2.Advise to select 0.1s as the time unit.
F01.20 Accelerate/decelerate mode selection Range: 0, 1 0

E
0:Line acc/dece mode. Output frequency raises or decline as the constant

slope, as fig.7-1.
1: S curve acc/dece mode. Output frequency raise or decline as the S curve:
as fig.7-2.
Freq. Freq.
50.00Hz
50.00Hz ① ③
② ②
time ③ ① time
t1 t2 t1 t2
Fig. 7-1 Line acc/dece Fig. 7-2 S curve acc/dece
109
S curve acceleration
F01.21 Range: 10.0%～50.0% 20.0%
initiation segment time
S curve acceleration up
F01.22 Range: 10.0%～70.0% 60.0%
segment time
S curve deceleration
F01.23 Range: 10.0%～50.0% 20.0%
initiation segment time
S curve deceleration up
F01.24 Range: 10.0%～70.0% 60.0%
segment time
F01.21~F01.24 select S curve acceleration and deceleration mode(F01.20＝
1)valid only under acceleration and deceleration, and F01.21+F01.22≤90% ,
F01.23+F01.24≤90%.
S curve starts interval time as fig.7-2③, output frequency changed slope increase
slowly from zero.
S curve up interval time as fig.7-2②, output frequency changed slope is constant.
S curve ends interval time as fig.7-2①, output frequency changed slope decrease
slowly to zero.
Note
C
S curve acc/dece mode is suitable for the start and stop of elevator,
conveyor belt, transport and transfer load so on.
N
Range:0.00Hz~upper
F01.25 Keyboard jog run frequency 5.00Hz
limit frequency
Range:0.00Hz~upper
F01.26 Terminal jog run frequency 5.00Hz
limit frequency
F01.27 Jog interval time Range: 0.0～100.0s 0.0s
E
F01.28 Jog acceleration time Range: 0.1～6000.0s 20.0s

F01.29 Jog deceleration time Range: 0.1～6000.0s 20.0s
F01.25, F1.26 defines keyboard jog and terminal jog run frequency, when jog run:
accelerate as the zero frequency, and not effect by the start mode defined by
parameter F02.00. When jog command revocation, stop as setting halt mode,
when input another command during the deceleration, accelerate or decelerate
according to the current frequency.
F1.27 defies valid command interval time at continuously jog. When jog
command invalid, the time restart jog command is short than jog interval time, jog
command ignore here.
F1.28, F1.29 defines jog run acceleration and deceleration time, fixed unit is 1s.
110
7.3 Start, stop, forward/reverse, brake function parameter group:

F02
F02.00 Start running mode Range: 0～2 0
0: Start from starting frequency. After receiving start command by setting
F02.01 delay time, the inverter starts after setting F02.02 starting frequency and
F02.03 starting frequency duration.
1: First brake, and then start from starting frequency. First brake the
current from DC and then from time (F02.04, F02.05), and then start after setting
starting frequency and starting frequency duration set by F02.03.
2: Speed tracking start. This mode can be supported by the entire motor
control model at the present.
1.Start-up mode 0: It is suggested to use Start-up mode 0 for general

purpose applications and for general drive synchronous motor.
C
2. Start-up mode 1: Suitable for small inertia load, for example,
forward and reverse occurs when the motor is not driven.
3. Start-up mode 2: Suitable for the starting of large inertia load
before stopping stably. Generally this mode is used when restarting
after power failure, fault self-recovery and other functions. The
N
Note following points need to be noticed when this Start-up mode is used:
3.1 When the inverter stops freely, restart the inverter after a few
seconds. If over-current fault occurs when starting, please extend the
F02.08 time.
3.2 Do not modify the set frequency when the inverter starts in slow
E
down process.
4 .When torque model is valid, we suggest use the start mode 2.
F02.01 Starting delay time Range: 0.0～60.0s 0.0s

Starting delay time refers to the waiting time before the inverter is started after
receiving running command.
F02.02 Starting frequency Range: 0.0～10.00Hz 0.00Hz
Starting frequency duration
F02.03 Range: 0.0～60.0s 0.0s
time
Starting frequency refers to the initial frequency when the inverter is started, as
shown in Fig. 7-3 fs; starting frequency holding time refers to consecutive running
time during which the inverter runs at the starting frequency, as shown in Fig. 7-3
t1.
111
fmax
fs
Start
time
Freq.
Starting
t1 time
Fig. 7-3 Starting frequency and starting time
Starting frequency is not limited by lower limit frequency.

Note
Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0%
DC braking current when
F02.04 (G type inverter rated 30.0%
starting
F02.05
DC braking time when
starting
C current)
Range: 0.0～30.0s 0.0s
When F02.00=1, F02.04, F02.05 valid, and stop mode is deceleration stop, as shown
in Fig. 7-4.
N
The setting of starting DC braking current is with respect to the percentage of
inverter rated output current. When starting DC braking time is 0.0 second, no DC
braking process.
Output Freq.
E
DC brake Time
Output volt. quantity
(Valid value)
Time
DC brake time
Running command
Fig. 7-4 Starting mode 1 description
112
Speed track starting

F02.06 Range: 0～2 2
frequency selection
0: Current setting frequency.
1: Running frequency before power down.
2: Speed track auxiliary starting frequency.
Select frequency closed to the current running frequency of the motor so as to
track the current running revolving speed of the motor. For example, when current
running frequency is closed to current setting frequency, then select 0 and start to
search from current setting frequency.
Speed track auxiliary Range:0.00Hz~upper
F02.07 30.00Hz
starting frequency limit frequency
This parameter defines when 2 is selected in F02.06 parameter, the starting
searching frequency when revolving track is started.
Speed track starting
F02.08 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.10s
waiting time
F02.09
coefficient
C
When 2 is selected in F02.00, if the inverter checks that the running command is
valid, the revolving speed is searched after the time defined by F2.08.
Speed track current control
Range: 1～20 2
N
This parameter define the speed search process tracking current, the bigger of the
value , the faster it can track.
Speed track searching
F02.10 Range: 0.1～30.0 4.00
speed time
This parameter can be modified to improve speed track time.
E
On SVC control, the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time
is 0.1s；
On V/F control, the minimum unit of speed tracking for search speed time is
1s；
1. F02.06～F02.09 parameter only can be started on the speed
variator, the start is valid.
Note 2.F02.10 parameter can be used for both V/F model and SVC
model .
F02.11 Stop mode Range: 0～2 0

0: Deceleration stop. After receiving stop command, the inverter reduces
output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time, the inverter
stops when frequency is 0.
1: Free stop. After receiving stop command, the inverter stops output
113
immediately, and the load stops freely according to mechanical inertia.

2: Deceleration + DC braking stop. After receiving stop command, the
inverter reduces output frequency gradually according to the set deceleration time.
When reaching F02.14 starting frequency of stop braking, After F02.15 defines
DC braking waiting time, the inverter starts DC braking, as shown in Fig. 7-5.
Deceleration stop holding Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F02.12 0.00Hz
frequency limiting frequency
Deceleration stop holding
F02.13 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.00s
time
The parameters F02.12 and F02.13 define inverter’s deceleration stop holding
function. When the frequency reaches set value of F02.12 in deceleration, it stops
deceleration, and maintains the set time of F02.13, and enters deceleration state.
This parameter is only valid for stop mode 0.
Stop DC braking starting
F02.14 Range: 0.00～15.00Hz 0.50Hz
frequency
Sop DC braking waiting
F02.15
time
F02.16 Stop DC braking current

C Range:0.00～30.00s
Range: 0.0～100.0%
（G type machine rated
current）
0.00s
0.0%
N
F02.17 Stop DC braking time Range: 0.0～30.0s 0.0s
Range: 0.0～100.0%
Stop auxiliary braking
F02.18 （G type machine rated 0.0%
current
current）
F02.19 Stop auxiliary braking time Range: 0.0～100.0s 0.0s
E
F02.14 ~ F02.19 parameter defines the current and duration inputting to the motor
in the stop DC braking state. If F02.17, F02.19 or F02.14 parameter is 0.0s, then
no DC braking process.
Auxiliary DC brake means when the inverter stops DC brake is finished give the
second stage DC braking. Role in some special circumstances require rapid
braking, and stop long time in the state of DC braking, but to prevent motor heat
circumstances.
114
Output freq.
Stop brake
Starting freq.
Time
Auxiliary brake quantity
Output volt.
(Valid value) DC brake quantity
Time
Auxiliary brake time
Stop DC brake time
Running command
Fig. 7-5 Deceleration stop + DC braking

C
F02.20 Forward/reverse dead zone time
F02.21 Forward/reverse switching mode
0: Over zero switchover

Range:0.0～3600.0s
Range: 0, 1
0.0s
0
N
1: Over starting frequency switchover
Forward/reverse dead zone time refers to the process in which the inverter
operates from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward. After output
frequency reaches the defined frequency in switchover mode, entering in to the
transition time, as shown in Fig. 7-6 t1, within transition time t1, output frequency
E
is 0Hz.
Output
time
t1
Fig. 7-6 Forward/reverse dead zone time
115
Energy consumption
F02.22 Range: 0～2 0
braking selection
0: No energy consumption braking.
1: Energy consumption braking 1(No braking while halting).
2: Energy consumption braking 2(Braking while halting). This option can
prevent over-voltage fault caused by high busbar voltage during the halting
process.
Please set the function parameter correctly according to the actual

use condition. Otherwise, control feature will be affected. Before
Note starting this function, make sure the inverter has built-in brake
unit and brake resistor.
Energy consumption Range:100.0~145.0%

F02.23 125.0%
braking voltage (rated busbar voltage )
Energy consumption
F02.24
braking use rate C Range:0.0～100.0% 100.0%
Energy consumption braking function is only valid for built-in brake unit. F02.23
defines energy consumption braking busbar voltage threshold value, F02.24
parameter adjusts duty ratio brake unit. The higher the brake use rate is, the
N
greater the brake unit duty ratio is, and the more apparent the brake effect is, but
when fluctuation of the brake process busbar voltage is more apparent, user needs
to select proper parameter based on brake resistor and brake power.
F02.25 Encryption time Range:0～65535h 0
E
When F02.25>1，the encryption time is valid .When the running time (F05.38)
exceed the time defined by F02.25, the inverter will stop and the keyboard display
A-53, the inverter can only start again after decode.
Range:95%~115% (only
F02.26 Over debugging coefficient 1%
when F00.24=1 valid)
Under field-weaken (only when F00.24=1 valid), properly to boost this parameter
to decrease the output current, while the parameter value too big will increase the
harmonic wave of output current.
116
7.4 V/F control parameter group: F03

F03.00 V/F curve set Range: 0～5 0
0: Constant torque curve.
1: Degression torque curve 1.
4: V/F curve setting (V/F frequency and voltage cannot be 0 or Max. value).
5:V/F Separation control (voltage channel is determined by F18.22). Torque
motor, inverter power supply, induction heating can use this control method.
This function code defines EN500/EN600 flexible V/F setting mode to satisfy
different load characteristics. 4 kinds of fixed curves and one customized curve
can be selected according to definition of F03.00.
When F3.00=0, V/F curve is Constant torque curve feature, as shown in Fig. 7-7a
curve 0.
C
When F03.00=1, V/F curve is 2.0 order power degressive torque characteristic, as
shown in Fig. 7-7a curve 3.
N
User can choose 1, 2, 3 V/F curve running mode according to load characteristic
to reach better energy-saving effect when the inverter drives degressive torque
load such as blower and water pump etc.
E
When F03.00=4, user can set V/F curve by setting F03.04 ~ F03.11 parameter.
As shown in Fig. 7-7b, V/F curve can be defined freely by setting (V1, F1),
(V2, F2), (V3, F3), (V4, F4) to meet special load environment.
Voltage %
100%
Output voltage V3
Rated voltage V2
0 V1
1
2 V0
3 Freq. Hz
F0 F1 F2 F3 Fb
Output freq. V0~V3: The 1st-4th voltage percentage of multi section V/F
0 F0~F3: The 1st-4th frequency points of multi section V/F
Rated freq.
Fb: Rated frequency
Fig. 7-7 a V/F curve b User-setting V/F curve
117
F03.01 Torque boost mode Range: 0, 1 0

0: Manual boost. Torque boost voltage is totally decided by parameter
F03.02, whose feature is that the boost voltage is fixed, but magnetic saturation of
the motor is occurs often to the light-load.
Boost voltage = F03.02 ×motor rated voltage

100
1: Auto torque boost. Torque boost voltage changes when the stator current
of the motor changes, the greater the stator current is, magnetic saturation boost
voltage is.
F03.02 Inverter output current

Boost voltage = ×motor rated voltage×
100 2×inverter rated current
Depend on
F03.02 Torque boost Range: 0.0～12.0%
F03.03
Torque boost cut-off
frequency
C
Range:0.0~100.0%
(motor rated frequency )
type
100.0%
Improving inverter low torque characteristic, the output voltage can be
compensated
N
Motor rated Motor rated
volt. volt.
E
Boost Boost
volt. Volt.
Cut-off Motor Cut-off Motor
Freq. rated freq. Freq. rated freq.
a Degression torque curve Torque boost b Constant torque curve Torque boost
Fig. 7-8 Torque boost
1.F03.02 for increasing torque setting to this parameter can cause

motor heating or over current protection.
2.When driving synchronous machine ,User is advised to adopt
Note manual torque boost and adjust V/F curve according to motor
parameter and usage occasion when driving synchronous motor.
Range: 0.00～V/F frequency

F03.04 V/F frequency value 0 10.00Hz
value1
118
Range:0.00～V/F voltage
F03.05 V/F voltage value 0 20.00%
value1
Range: V/F frequency value
F03.06 V/F frequency value1 20.00Hz
0～V/F frequency value2
Range: V/F voltage value0～
F03.07 V/F voltage value1 40.00%
V/F voltage value2
Range: V/F frequency value1～
V/F frequency value3
V/F voltage value3
Range: V/F frequency value2～
upper limiting frequency
100.00%(motor rated voltage)
F03.04 ~ F03.11 defines multi-step V/F curve. Note that 4 voltage points and
frequency points relationship shall be satisfied: V0<V1<V2<V3, F0<F1<F2<F3,
for details, please refer to Fig. 7-8b.
F03.12
factor
C
If the voltage at low frequency is set too high, motor overheat or even over
burning may cause, over current protection may occur to the inverter.
V/F oscillation suppression
Range: 0～255 10
N
Under V/F control, this parameter can be set properly to prevent motor vibration
of the motor. When the inverter operates at low frequency without load, the
greater the motor power is, the greater the vibration of motor will be. This
parameter can be increased to restrain the vibration of motor. When carrier freq. is
smaller, this parameter can be adjusted lower to reduce vibration.
E
7.5 Auxiliary running parameter group: F04

Range: 0.00Hz～upper limiting
F04.00 Jump freq. 1 0.00Hz
frequency
F04.01 Jump freq. 1 range 0.00Hz
frequency
frequency
frequency
frequency
frequency
F04.00 ~ F04.05 is set to keep inverter’s output frequency away from resonance
frequency of mechanical load. Inverter setting frequency can jump around some
119
frequency point according to mode as shown in Fig. 7-9, 3 jumping ranges can be
defined at most.
Set freq. after adjustment
Jump freq. 3 Jump range3

. Output freq.
Fig. 7-9 Jump freq. and range

F04.06 Slip freq. gain Range: 0.0～300.0% 0.0%
F04.07 Slip compensation limit C
F04.08 Slip compensation time constant
Range: 0.0～250.0%
Range: 0.1～25.0s
This function can adjust output frequency properly as the load varies to
compensate slip frequency of the asynchronous motor dynamically, so that control
100.0%
2.0s
N
motor speed is in constant value. If acting with automatic torque boost function,
better low speed moment characteristic can be obtained. As shown in Fig.7-10.
Slip compensation range = Slip compensation limit (F04.06)× Rated slip .
Rated slip = F15.03 ×60 / Np - F15.04.
E
Np is motor polarity.
Slip compensation is 100%
Output current
150%
100%
Before slip compensation
After slip compensation
50%
Motor revolving speed
Fig. 7-10 Slip freq. Compensation

Depend on
F04.09 Carrier frequency Range: 0.5～16.0K
type
Carrier freq. mainly affects motor noise and heat loss when running. Relationship
among carrier freq, motor noise, and leak current is as follows:
120
When carrier freq. goes up (↑), the motor noise is reduced (↓), leakage current of
the motor is increased (↑), and the interference is increased (↑);
When carrier freq. goes down (↓), the motor noise is increased (↑), leakage current
of the motor is decreased (↓), and the interference is decreased (↓).
When the ambient temperature is high, and the motor load is heavy, reduce the
carrier freq. properly to reduce thermal loss to the inverter.
Table7-1 model and Carrier freq. relationship
Model Max. Carrier freq. Factory Default
0.4KW～1.5KW 16KHz 6KHz
2.2KW～11KW 16KHz 5KHz
15KW～55KW 8KHz 4KHz
75～200KW 6KHz 2KHz
220KW above 4KHz 2KHz

C
1.To get better control characteristic, it is suggested that the ratio
of max. running frequency between carrier frequency and inverter
be not smaller than 36.
N
Note 2.Error exists in current displayed value when carrier frequency is
small.

tens digit: 0,1
E
F04.10 PWM optimized adjustment 0010

hundreds digit: 0,1
Units digit: Carrier freq. is adjusted automatically according to temperature
0: Banned.
1: Allowed.
Carrier frequency changes based on temperature, which refers to inverter check
that the radiator temperature is relatively high, it automatically reduces carrier
freq., so as to reduce inverter temperature rise. When radiator temperature is
relatively low, carrier freq. gradually restores to set value. This function can
reduce inverter overheat alarm.
Digit: low speed carrier freq. limit mode
0: No limit.
1: Limit. Limit carrier wave at low speed, improve stability performance of
revolving speed at low speed.
121
Hundreds digit: carrier wave modulation system

0: 3 phase modulation.
1: 2 phase and 3 phase modulation.
Thousands digit: Asynchronous modulation, synchronization mode (valid
under V/F control)
0: Asynchronous modulation.
1: Synchronous modulation (under 85Hz: Asynchronous modulation).
1.When units digit is set as 1, after reaching overheat warning

alarm point, carrier wave will decrease to 1.5KHz; when the
temperature decrease to 5℃ lower than overheat warning alarm
point, carrier freq. will automatically rise to the set carrier freq.
2. Synchronous modulation, it means that carrier freq. changes
when output frequency changes, it guarantees that the ratio
(carrier ratio) between the two does not change, generally used
Note when output frequency is high, conducive to input voltage quality.
C
When output frequency is low(85Hz or below, generally no need of
synchronous modulation , so at this time carrier freq. and output
frequency ratio is relatively high, advantages of asynchronous
modulation are more apparent. When operating frequency is
higher than 85Hz , Synchronous modulation is valid, frequency
N
lower than this is fixed with asynchronous modulation mode.
F04.11 AVR function Range : 0～2 2

AVR namely automatic voltage regulation function, it indicates that the inverter
E
can output constant voltage by AVR function when the inverter inputs voltage
fluctuates.
0: No action
1: Action all the time
2: No action only during deceleration
1.When input voltage is higher than rated value, under normal

situation, F04.11=1 shall be set. F02.11= 0 namely inverter is in
deceleration stop, motor deceleration time short time running
current will be greater. But the motor decrease speed placidly
with small run current and long Dec time if choose AVR action
all the time.
Note
2.When motor system vibration occurs due to AVR function, set
F04.11= 0, namely AVR function is invalid.
3.This function is valid in V/F control mode.
122
F04.12 Reserved
Automatic energy saving

F04.13 Range: 0, 1 0
operation
0: No action
1: Action
To reach better energy-saving effect, automatic energy-saving purpose can be
obtained by checking load current.
When motor runs with no-load or light-load, energy-saving can be realized by
checking load current, and properly adjusting input voltage. Auto energy-saving
operation is mainly used in applications like stable load and revolving speed.
1. This function is generally used in load like blower and water

pump.
Note 2. This function is valid only in V/F mode.
F04.14
F04.15
C
Acceleration time 2 and 1
Deceleration time 2 and 1
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
limit frequency
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
limit frequency
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
N
This function is used in the process of the inverter running, and we should adopted
the acceleration time and deceleration for different applications.
During the acceleration process, if the frequency is lower than F04.14, we choose
acceleration time 2, if the running frequency is bigger than F04.14, we choose
E
acceleration time 1, during the deceleration process, if the running frequency is

bigger than F04.15, then we choose deceleration time 1 , if the running frequency is
lower than F14.05, then we choose deceleration time 2.
When using terminal for choose the deceleration time,F04.14,
F04.15 function is invalid.
Note
F04.16 Acceleration time 2 Range: 1～60000 200

F04.17 Deceleration time 2 Range: 1～60000 200
123

F04.33 Deceleration time 10
F04.34 Acceleration time 11
F04.35 Deceleration time 11
C Range: 1～60000
Range: 1～60000
Range: 1～60000
200
200
200
N
E

EN500/EN600 defines 15 kinds of acceleration/deceleration time, select
acceleration/deceleration time 1 ~ 15 during the inverter running by different
combinations of control terminal. Please refer to the definitions of
acceleration/deceleration time terminal function in F08.18 ~ F08.25. Cooperating
with simple PLC function can also realize each step of PLC adopting different
acceleration/deceleration time to complete specific requirements.
The time unit of acceleration/deceleration time 2 ~ 15 above is the same as that of
acceleration/deceleration time 1, all are decided by F01.19 parameter of
acceleration/deceleration time unit.
124
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 is defined in F01.17 and F01.18.

Note
7.6 Communication control parameter group: F05
F05.00 Protocol selection Range: 0~6 0

0: Modbus protocol .
1: Reserved.
2: Profibus protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
3: CANlink protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
4: CANopen protocol, external expansion card needs to be purchased if
needed.
5: Free protocol 1. Can realize the revision of all EN500/EN600 function
parameters C
6: Free protocol 2. Can only realize the revision of part EN500/EN600
function parameters
N
Baud rate
F05.01 tens digit: Reserved 005
configuration
hundreds digit: 0~6
F05.01 is for choosing communication baud rate when using different
communication modules.
E
Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus Baud rate selection

0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
9：115200BPS
Tens digit: Reserved
Hundreds digit: CanLink and CANopen Baud rate selection
0:20K
125
1:50K
2:100K
3:125K
4:250K
5:500K
6:1M
Range: units digit:0~5
tens digit :0~3
F05.02 Data format 0000
hundreds digit: 0～2
Units digit: Free protocol and Modbus protocol data format
0: 1-8-1 format, no parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop bit,
no parity’s RTU communication mode.
1: 1-8-1 format, even parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop
bit, even parity’s RTU communication mode.
C
2: 1-8-1 format, odd parity, RTU. 1 for start bit, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop
bit, odd parity’s RTU communication mode.
3: 1-7-1 format, no parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
no parity’s ASCII communication mode.
N
4: 1-7-1 format, even parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
even parity’s ASCII communication mode.
5: 1-7-1 format, odd parity, ASCII. 1 for start bit, 7 data bits, 1 for stop bit,
odd parity’s ASCII communication mode.
Tens digit: Profibus_DP protocol data format
E
0: PPO1communication format
Hundreds digit: Modbus agreement or free protocol response selection
Under the condition that Modbus or protocol agreement and the hundreds of
F05.02 is 1, when slave sends mainframe the demand of running, frequency revise
and hide parameter inside, the slave is without response to increase the slave
response speed. But when mainframe reads inverter parameter, status or revises
inverter any parameter, the hundreds of F05.02 would not influence the slave
response. The read-only instruction will respond only when the hundreds of
F05.02 is 2.
Thousands digit: Communication Sets power down reserve setup. If this bit =
1, the communication address like 1D00H, 1D01H, 1D02H, 1D03H, 1D06H,
126
1D0AH, 1D0BH will reserve when power-off , otherwise not reserved when
power-off.
F05.03 Local address Range: 0~247 1
During serial port communication, this function code is used to identify inverter’s
address.
Under free protocol communication, 00 is set and the inverter is master station,
can be the Master-slave communication.
Under Modbus communication, 00 is broadcast address. When setting broadcast
address, it can only receive and execute upper computer broadcast command,
while cannot respond to upper computer.
Communication overtime
F05.04 Range:0.0~1000.0s 0.0s
checkout time
When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of
this function code, the inverter judges it as communication failure.
The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal, namely this
F05.05
C
function ineffective when set value is 0.
Communication
error checkout time
Range: 0.0~1000.0s 0.0s
N
When serial port communication fails and its continuous time exceed set value of
this function code, the inverter judges it as communication failure.
The inverter would not detect serial port communication signal, namely this
function ineffective when set value is 0.
Range: 0~200ms
F05.06 Local response delay time 2ms
E
(Modbus is valid)
Local response delay time represents the time within which the inverter serial port
receives and executes command from upper device and then responds to upper
device.
Main & sub inverter
F05.07 communication frequency Range: 0~500% 100%
setting percentage
After setting this parameter proportion when frequency sent from main inverter, as
the input source of communication frequency of sub inverter, one inverter can
control multiple devices with different proportional frequency.
This parameter is valid only when inverter is master slave station

and the frequency given channel is communication given.
Note
127
Communication virtual
F05.08 Range: 00~FFH 00H
input terminal enabled
Communication virtual input
F05.09 Range: 0,1 0
terminal joining node
0: Independent node. Communication virtual terminal function is only set in
F05.10 ~ F05.17.
1: Terminal node. Communication virtual terminal function is only set in
F08.18 ~ F08.25, regardless of X1 ~ X8 valid, or CX1 ~ CX8 valid all execute
F05.10
F05.11
CX1 function
C
this setting function , X1 ~ X8 corresponds to CX1 ~ CX8.
Communication virtual terminal

Range: 0~90
Range: 0~90
0
0
N
CX2 function
F05.12 Range: 0~90 0
CX3 function
F05.13 Range: 0~90 0
CX4 function
E
F05.14 Range: 0~90 0

CX5 function
F05.15 Range: 0~90 0
CX6 function
F05.16 Range: 0~90 0
CX7 function
F05.17 Range: 0~90 0
CX8 function
Communication virtual terminal CX1 ~ CX8 function and terminal X1 ~ X8
function is different.
The communication virtual terminal function is realized by setting

the Modbus address and 1D09
Note
128
Input mapping application

F05.18 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 1
F05.19 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 2
F05.20 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 3
F05.21 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 4
F05.22 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 5
F05.23 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 6
F05.24 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 7
F05.25 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 8
F05.26 Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
parameter 9
F05.27
parameter 10
C
Input parameter address mapping.

Range: F00.00~F26.xx 25.00
This parameter is used for mapping waiting for input. Integral part corresponds
N
with group no. of the parameter, while decimal part corresponds with intra-class
reference (parameter series no. within group parameter). For example: Setting
F05.18=00.00 indicates that mapping F05.18=00.00 as input parameter1.
1. xx represents function code.

2. F25.xx represents not mapping.
E
3. By this way, some incontinuity parameter can be together to

read the data, and using the input mapping application parameter
to increase the communication efficiency. For example, if reading
Note F00.00, F01.10, F02.02 and F03.04, you can map the
above-mentioned parameters to F05.18, F05.19, F05.20, F05.21 and
F05.22. Under RTU communication mode, only 1 continuous
reading 5 groups of parameter commands (01 03 05 12 00 05 24
D1) can read 5 groups of parameter values, thus improving
communication efficiency.
F05.28 Setting frequency Display current setting frequency

Frequency after
Display the frequency after current
F05.29 current acceleration
acceleration / deceleration
/ deceleration
129
Synchronous Display the current synchronous

F05.30
frequency frequency
F05.31 Output current Display the current output current
F05.32 Output voltage Display the current output voltage
Displays the current DC busbar
F05.33 DC busbar voltage
voltage
Display the current load motor
F05.34 Load motor speed
speed
Display the current set torque(>37
F05.35 Set torque
367, it is negative)
Display the current output torque
F05.36 Output torque
(>32767, it is negative)
F05.37 Torque current Display the current torque current
Accumulated Display the accumulated power-on
F05.38
power-on time time of the inverter
Accumulated Display the accumulated running
F05.39
running time C
time of the inverter
By reading the above parameters, it can realize the function of continuously
reading a plurality of process parameters by communication. When the read value
(F05.35 or F05.36) are greater than 32767, the actual value = the current value
-65536, for example read value of F05.35 equals 65307, because 65307> 32767,
N
the actual value = 65307-65536 = -299, and the given torque is -29.9%.
7.7 Setting curve parameter group: F06

E
Setting curve tens digit: 0~2

F06.00 0000
selection hundreds digit: 0~2
thousands digit: 0~2
Units digit: AI1 curve selection
0: curve 1.
1: curve 2.
2: curve 3.
Tens digit: AI2 curve selection
Hundreds digit: rapid pulse curve selection
Thousands digit: Pulse width setting curve selection
This function code tens digit, hundreds digit and thousands digit are used to select
analog quantity input AI1, AI2, rapid pulse input and pulse width input signal
130
setting curve. Curve 1 and 2 are 3 point curve, curve 3 is 4 point curve. User can
select different curves for adjustment based on characteristic requirement of the
input signal so as to realize specific input.
Range: 0.0% ~ curve 1
F06.01 Curve 1 min. setting 0.0%
Inflexion setting
Corresponding physical
F06.02 quantity of curve 1 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.0%
setting
Curve 1 inflexion Range: curve 1 min. setting ~
F06.03 50.0%
setting curve 1 Max. setting
F06.04 quantity of curve 1 Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 50.0%
inflexion setting
Range: curve 1 inflexion
F06.05 Curve 1 Max. setting 100.0%
setting ~100.0%
Max. setting
F06.07 Curve 2 min. setting
C
inflexion setting
F06.08 quantity of curve 2 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0%

0.0%
0.0%
N
setting
Curve 2 inflexion Range: curve 2 min. setting ~
F06.09 50.0%
setting curve 2 Max. setting
inflexion setting
E
Range: curve 2 inflexion

setting ~ 100.0%
Max. setting
F06.13 Curve 3 min. setting 0.0%
inflexion 1 setting
F06.14 quantity of curve 3 min. Range: 0.0 ~ 100.0% 0.0%
setting
Curve 3 inflexion 1 Range: curve 3 min. setting ~
F06.15 30.0%
setting curve 3 inflexion 2 setting
inflexion 1 setting
Curve 3 inflexion 2 Range: curve 3 inflexion 1
F06.17 60.0%
setting setting ~ curve 3 Max. setting
131
inflexion 2 setting
Range: curve 3 inflexion 1
setting ~100.0%
Max. setting
Take curve 1 as an example:
Parameter F06.01 ~ F06.06 is used to set analog quantity input voltage and its
representative set value relationship. When analog quantity input voltage is
greater than the set “Max. input”(F06.05), analog quantity voltage is calculated
based on “Max. input”; similarly, When analog input voltage is smaller than the
set “min. input ”(F06.01), Set based on “ curve lower than min. input setting
selection”(F06.21), calculated by min. input or 0.0%.
C
1. For function and usage of curve 2, please refer to curve 1
instruction.
2. Curve 3 function is similar to curve 1 and curve 2, but curve 1
and 2 are three-point straight line, while curve 3 is four-point
curve, which can realize more flexible corresponding relationship.
N
3. The output positive/negative polarity of curve 1, 2, 3 is decided
Note by the features of input analog signal. Curve will not change
output positive/negative polarity.
4. As frequency setting, 100.0% setting corresponding physical
quantity is upper limit frequency F01.11.
E

Curve lower
tens digit: 0,1
than min. input
F06.21 hundreds digit: 0,1 11111
corresponding
selection
ten thousands digit: 0,1
Units digit: curve 1 setting
0: Corresponds to min. setting corresponding physical quantity.
1: 0.0% of the corresponding physical quantity.
Tens digit: curve 2 setting
Hundreds digit: curve 3 setting
Thousands digit: extended curve 1
132

Ten thousands digit: extended curve 2
This parameter is used to set, when curve’s corresponding analog quantity input
voltage is smaller than the min. setting, how to decide corresponding setting
analog quantity.
For example, F06.21 units=0, when analog quantity input is lower than F06.01,
this curve output F06.02 corresponding physical quantity value. If F06.21 units=1,
when analog quantity input is lower than F06.01, this curve output is 0.
Take 0 ~ 10V AI1 for setting frequency as an example: AI1 selects curve 1, setting
frequency and AI1 relationship as shown in Fig. 7-11.
Freq.
50.00Hz
45.00Hz
30.00Hz
C
N
2.50Hz
AI1
2V 5V 7.5V 10V
F06.01=20.0% F06.02=5.0%
F06.03=50.0% F06.04=60.0%
F6.05=75.0% F06.06=90.0%
E
F06.21=0
Fig. 7-11 AI1 selects curve 1 frequency setting
7.8 Analog quantity, Pulse input function parameter group: F07

F07.00 AI1 input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.050s
F07.01 AI1 setting gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.006
F07.02 AI1 setting bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.5%
AI1 input filter time, is used to set AI1 software filter time. When field analog
quantity is easily interrupted, increase filter time to make the analog quantity
check stable, but when filter time is greater, the response time of analog quantity
check is slower. Please set according to the actual situation.
AI1 setting bias is indicated with Max. input (10V or 20mA) percentage, which is
133
used to set up and down translation quantity of AI1 analog input. Take voltage
input, bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship of setting bias and
gain adjustment before and after adjustment is as follows:
Analog input AI1（after revise） = input gain（F07.01）× Analog input AI1（before
revise）＋setting bias（F07.02）×10V
Taking current input and bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship
between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
revise）＋setting bias（F07.02）×20mA
F07.03 AI2 input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.050s
F07.04 AI2 setting gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.003
F07.05 AI2 setting bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.1%
Parameter F07.03 ~ F7.05 is used to set analog quantity input AI2 filter time ,
gain and setting bias, For detail using method, please refer to analog quantity
C
input AI1. Take voltage input, bias positive as an example, the adjustment
relationship between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
revise）＋setting bias（F07.05）×10V
N
Taking current input and bias positive as an example, the adjustment relationship
between gain adjustment and setting bias is as follows:
revise）＋setting bias（F07.05）×20mA
Analog setting bias Range: units digit: 0,1
F07.06 01
E
polarity tens digit: 0,1

Units digit: AI1 setting bias polarity
Tens digit: AI2 setting bias polarity
Parameter F07.06 is used to set analog quantity AI1 and when AI2 counts the
polarity of bias. Take voltage input as an example, when F07.06 units are set as 0:
Analog input AI1(after revise) = input gain(F07.01)×Analog input AI1(before
revise)＋ Setting bias(F07.02)×10V
When F7.06 units are set as 1:
Analog input AI1(after revise) = input gain(F07.01)×Analog input AI1(before
134
revise)－ Setting bias(F07.02)×10V
Output Volt. after AI1 adjustment

10V
input gain =2
input gain =1
Bias voltage
Set voltage after AI1 filter
0 5V 10V
Fig. 7-12 AI1 adjustment
F07.07 Pulse input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.000s

F07.08 Pulse input gain
C Range: 0.000~9.999
F07.09 Pulse input Max. frequency Range: 0.01~50.00KHz
F07.07, F07.08 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel
selection terminal pulse is set. When setting filter time, Please be noted that the
1.000
10.00KHz
N
longer the filter time is, the slower the change rate of output frequency is. So set
filter time properly according to the actual situation. Pulse width gain is for
impulse quantity of current input impulse terminal.
F7.09 parameter defines frequency input range when frequency setting channel
selection terminal pulse is set. When actual input frequency is greater than the set
E
Max. frequency, deal with it according to Max. frequency. When the external
input pulse is less than 2Hz, disposed as 0Hz.
F07.10 Pulse width input filter time Range: 0.000~9.999s 0.000s
F07.11 Pulse width input gain Range: 0.000~9.999 1.000
F07.12 Pulse width input logic setting Range: 0,1 0
F07.13 Pulse width Max. input width Range: 0.1~999.9ms 100.0ms
F07.10, F07.11 parameter defines filter time and gain when frequency channel
selection terminal pulse width is set. When setting filter time, Please be noted that
when the Max. pulse width set in F07.13 is smaller, the filter time is not suggested
to be set too long, otherwise the response time of output frequency will be very
slow. Pulse width gain is for impulse width duty cycle of current impulse width
input terminal
0: Positive logic.
135
1: Negative logic.
F07.12 defines valid level of digital quantity input X8 channel input pulse when
frequency channel selection terminal pulse width is set. The applications shall go
with double polarity working state of X input terminal.
F07.13 parameter defines the width range of input valid pulse when frequency
setting channel selection terminal pulse width is set.
Analog input disconnection
F07.14 Range: 0.0%～100.0% 10.0%
detection threshold
Analog input disconnection
F07.15 Range: 0.0～500.0s 3.0s
detection time
Analog disconnection Range: units digit: 0、1、2

F07.16 10
protection option tens digit: 0、1、2
units digit: disconnection detection channel choice
0: invalid
1: AI1
2: AI2
1: Fault, free stop

2: continue operation
C
Tens digit: Disconnection protection way
0: Stop according to stop mode
When channel（AI1 or AI2）selected by the units of F07.16 input a value less than
N
the threshold defined by F07.14 and it is sustained exceed the time defined by
F07.15 , the program will generate a analog channel disconnection signal
output ,which can output signal for external by multifunctional output terminals
(function 48) and the inverter will action according the command defined by tens
of F07.16 : when the tens of F07.16 = 1, the inverter will be submitted to the E -
E
41 fault (analog channel disconnection protection; when tens of F07.16 = 0,

inverter Stops according to stop mode.
By this function, AI1 and AI2 can be used to test position signal and motor
temperature signal of the system and take corresponding protective measures.
When don't need this function, set the units of F07.16 to 0.
F07.17 Reserved
136
7.9 On-off input function parameter group: F08

Input terminal positive and
F08.00 Range: 0000~FFFF 0000
negative logic setting
thousands hundreds tens units

BIT0: X1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:X3 positive and negative logic definition
BIT: X5 positive and negative logic definition

BIT0: EX1 positive and negative logic definition

C BIT1: EX2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3:EX4 positive and negative logic definition

N
BIT1:EX6 positive and negative logic definition
The setting of this parameter is finally converted to binary setting, relationship

between binary setting and hexadecimal is as shown in table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Relationship between binary setting and bit displayed value
E
Binary setting Hexadecimal

BI3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 (bit displayed value)
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 0 0 1 9
1 0 1 0 A
1 0 1 1 B
1 1 0 0 C
1 1 0 1 D
137
1 1 1 0 E
1 1 1 1 F
Bit refers to units, tens, hundreds or thousands displayed in operation panel.
F08.00 parameter defines valid logic state of Xi input terminal:
Positive logic: Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed valid, opened
invalid;
Negative logic: Xi terminal and corresponding common port closed invalid,
opened valid;
When BIT selects 0, it indicates positive logic; 1 indicates negative logic. Proper
setting of this parameter can realize correct logic input without changing terminal
wiring.
F08.01 Input terminal filter time Range: 0.000~1.000s 0.010s
F08.01 parameter sets filter time of input terminal check. When input terminal
state is changed, the terminal state change is valid only when the set filter time is
unchanged. Otherwise, it will remain the last state, thus effectively reduce
C
malfunction caused by interruption. The group C monitor state is for the state of
the disposed parameter. When demand terminal as the high speed function, low
down the value of this parameter is needed in case losing the signal.
F08.02 X1 Input terminal closed time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
N
F08.03 X1 Input terminal opened time Range: 0.00~99.99s 0.00s
E

138

F08.02 ~ F08.17 parameter defines the corresponding delay time of Xi input
terminal from closed to opened or opened to closed so as to meet user’s multiple
requirements. This parameter does not affect the monitor value of input terminal
state. You can revise the parameter to control the filtering when the interruption is
strong.
Xi Level
Invalid Invalid
Xi Valid
Valid
On-delay Off-delay
Fig. 7-13 closed and opened delay

C
F08.18 Input terminal X1 function selection
Range: 0~96
Range: 0~96
Range: 0~96
1
2
0
N
F08.21 Input terminal X4 function selection Range: 0~96 0
E

Multi-functional input terminal X1 ~ X8 provides users with up to 95 selections,
which can be selected based on actual applications. For details, please refer to
parameter function Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Multi-functional input selection function table
Content Function Content Function
0 Leave control terminal unused 49 Command switchover to panel
1 Forward running FWD terminal 50 Command switchover to terminal
Command switchover to
2 Reverse running REV terminal 51
communication
Running command Channel selection
3 External forward jogging control 52
terminal 1
Running command Channel selection
4 External reverse jogging control 53
terminal 2
Forward prohibited command
5 Multi-step speed control terminal 1 54
(Stop according to the stop mode,
139
invalid for jogging command)

Reverse prohibited command
6 Multi-step speed control terminal 2 55 (Stop according to the stop mode,
invalid for jogging command)
7 Multi-step speed control terminal 3 56 Swinging frequency input
8 Multi-step speed control terminal 4 57 Resetting state of swinging frequency

Acceleration/deceleration time
9 58 Interior counter reset end
selection terminal 1
10 59 Interior counter input end
11 60 Internal timer resetting
12 61 Internal timer triggering
Main and auxiliary frequency
13 62 Length count input
operational rule selection terminal 1
14 63 Length reset
15
16
17
C
Frequency ascending command (UP)
Frequency descending command
(DOWN)
Frequency ascending/descending
64
65
66
Reset this operation time
Speed/torque control switching
Point positioning enabled
terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Zero-speed servo enabled
N
18 67
frequency resetting terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Motor position reset
19 Multi-step closed loop terminal 1 68
terminal(F00.24=2 valid).
Recovery point positioning terminal
20 Multi-step closed loop terminal 2 69
(F00.24=2 valid).
21 Multi-step closed loop terminal 3 70 Reserved
E
22 External equipment failure input 71 Reserved

23 External interruption input 72 Reserved
24 External resetting input 73 Reserved
25 Free stop input 74 Reserved
External stop instruction—Stop
26 75 Reserved
according to the stop mode
27 stop DC braking input command DB 76 Reserved
inverter running prohibited—Stop
28 77 Reserved
according to the stop mode
Acceleration/deceleration prohibited
29 78 Reserved
command
30 Three-wire running control 79 Reserved
31 Process PID invalid 80 Reserved
32 Process PID stop 81 Reserved
33 Process PID integral holding 82 Reserved
34 Process PID integral resetting 83 Reserved
Process PID function negation
35 84 Reserved
(Closed loop adjustment feature
140
negation)
36 Simple PLC invalid 85 Reserved
37 Simple PLC halted 86 Reserved
38 Simple PLC stop state resetting 87 Reserved
Main frequency switchover to digit
39 88 Reserved
(keypad)
40 Main frequency switchover to AI1 89 Reserved
41 Main frequency switchover to AI2 90 Reserved
42 Main frequency switchover to EAI1 91 Pulse frequency input (X8 VALID)
Pulse width PWM INPUT (X8
43 Main frequency switchover to EAI2 92
VALID)
Main frequency setting channel
44 93 Reserved
45 94 Reserved
46 95 Reserved
47 96 Reserved
48
C
Auxiliary frequency reset - -
Function introduction in Table 7-3 is as shown below:
1, 2: External command terminal. When running command channel is
terminal running command, control inverter’s forward and reverse by external
N
terminal.
3, 4: External jogging command terminal. Set as any running command
channel setting running command, control inverter’s jogging forward and jogging
reverse by external terminal.
5 ~ 8: Multi-step running terminal. By setting these functions’ terminal
E
ON/OFF combination, up to 15 multi-step running frequencies can be set. The

increase and decrease time of each step corresponds to the each step time. The
corresponding motor running direction of each phase in multi-speed is determined
by the ten’s place of F10.01~F10.15.
Table 7-4 Multi-step running selection table
K4 K3 K2 K1 Frequency setting
OFF OFF OFF OFF Other running frequencies
OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-step frequency 1
OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-step frequency 2
OFF OFF ON ON Multi-step frequency 3
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 4
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-step frequency 5
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-step frequency 6
OFF ON ON ON Multi-step frequency 7
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 8
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-step frequency 9
141
ON OFF ON OFF Multi-step frequency 10

ON OFF ON ON Multi-step frequency 11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-step frequency 12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-step frequency 13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-step frequency 14
ON ON ON ON Multi-step frequency 15
When using multi-step speed to run and simple PLC to run, use multi-step speed
frequency (F10.31 ~ F10.45) above, take multi-step speed running as an example:
Define control terminal X1, X2, X3, X4:
When F08.18=5, F08.19=6, F08.20=7, F08.21= 8, X1, X2, X3, X4 are used to
define multi-step speed running, as shown in Fig. 7-14.
In fig7-14. Take the example of terminal running command channel, the ten’s
place of F10.01~F10.15 are both 2, and X5 is set as forward running terminal, X6
is reverse running terminal, for the running control of forward direction and
reverse direction.
AC
3 phase
3 三相
交流
电源
Power
三相断路器
phase
breaker
R
S
T
U
V
W
C M
KM
N
K1 EN500/EN600 X5
X1
K2 X2
K3 X3
K4 X4 X5 K5 COM
K6
COM X6
COM
E
Fig. 7-14 Multi-step speed running wiring Fig. 7-15 Peripheral equipment fault Normally Open
9 ~ 12: Acceleration/deceleration time terminal selection. By ON/OFF of
acceleration/deceleration time terminal, acceleration/deceleration time 1 ~ 15 can be
selected. For details, see Table 7-5:
Table 7-5 Acceleration/deceleration time terminal selection
Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/ Acceleration/
deceleration deceleration deceleration deceleration Acceleration/deceleration time
time selection time selection time selection time selection selection
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
OFF OFF OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 1
OFF OFF ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 2
OFF OFF ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 3
OFF ON OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 4
OFF ON OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 5
OFF ON ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 6
142
OFF ON ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 7

ON OFF OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 8
ON OFF OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 9
ON OFF ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 10
ON OFF ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 11
ON ON OFF OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 12
ON ON OFF ON Acceleration/deceleration time 13
ON ON ON OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 14
ON ON ON ON Acceleration/deceleration time 15
13 ~ 15: Main and auxiliary frequency operational rule selection
terminal. By ON/OFF of frequency setting channel selection terminal 13, 14, and
15, 7 kinds of main and auxiliary frequency operational rules defined in F01.06
parameter can be realized. Switchover between main and auxiliary operational
rule terminal is prior to function code F01.06 setting. For details, please see table
7-6:
Table 7-6 Selection table of terminal main and auxiliary frequency operational rule
Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary Main and auxiliary
Main and auxiliary operational
operational rule operational rule operational rule
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
rule selection
Decided by F01.06
Synthesized frequency is
sub-frequency
Operation rule: addition
N
OFF ON ON Operation rule: subtraction
ON OFF OFF Operation rule: multiplication
Synthesized frequency is Max.
ON OFF ON
value
Synthesized frequency is min.
E
ON ON OFF
value
Synthesized frequency is
ON ON ON
nonzero value
16, 17: Frequency ascending command UP/descending command DOWN.
Realize frequency ascending or descending by control terminal, substitute
operation keypad for remote control. Normal running F01.00 or F01.03 set as 3 is
valid. Ascending/descending rate is set in F18.06 and F18.07.
18: Frequency ascending/descending frequency resetting.
When frequency setting is set as terminal UP/DOWM, this terminal can
eliminate the set frequency value by terminal UP/DOWN.
19 ~ 21: Multi-step closed loop setting terminal. By ON/OFF of multi-step
closed loop setting terminal, Table 7-7 Multi-step closed loop setting selection can
be realized.
143
Table 7-7 Multi-step closed loop setting selection table

Multi-step closed Multi-step closed Multi-step closed loop
Multi-step closed loop
loop setting loop setting setting
setting selection
selection terminal 3 selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1
Closed loop setting decided
OFF OFF OFF
by F11.01
OFF OFF ON
setting 1
OFF ON OFF
setting 2
OFF ON ON
setting 3
ON OFF OFF
setting 4
ON OFF ON
setting 5
ON ON OFF
setting 6
ON ON ON
setting 7
22: External equipment failure jump-in. with this terminal, peripheral
C
equipment fault signal can be input, which is convenient for inverter to perform
fault monitoring for peripheral equipment, as shown in Fig. 7-15.
23: External interruption input. When the inverter is running, after receiving
external interruption signal, it blocks output, and runs with zero frequency. Once
N
external interruption signal is released, and inverter running command is still valid,
inverter auto revolving speed tracking starts, the inverter restarts.
24: External resetting input. When fault alarm occurs to the inverter, you
can reset fault by this terminal. Its function and operation keypad key
function are in accordance.
E
25: Free stop input. The purpose of this function and free stop set in F02.11
is the same, but here it uses control terminal to realize, which is convenient for
remote control.
26: External stop instruction. This command is effective for all running
command channel, when this function terminal is effective, the inverter stops
running according to mode set by F2.11.
27: Stop DC braking input command DB. Implement DC braking to the
motor during stop by control terminal so as to realize emergency stop and accurate
position of the motor. During deceleration stop, if this function terminal closed,
when frequency is lower than the brake starting frequency F02.14, it will brake
according to brake current defined in F02.16. It will not stop until terminal is
opened.
28: Inverter running prohibited. The running inverter stops freely when
this terminal is effective, and forbidden to start in waiting status. It is mainly
144
applied to occasion needing safe linkage.

29: Acceleration/deceleration prohibited command. When this function is
valid, keep the motor away from any external signal (except stop command),
maintain current revolving speed running.
This function is invalid in normal deceleration stop process.

Note
30: Three-wire running control. Refer to F08.26 operating mode (Three-wire

operating mode) function introduction.
31: Process PID invalid. Realize flexible switchover in low-level running
mode under closed-loop running status.
1. Switchover between closed-loop and low level running mode can
be available only when the inverter runs in closed-loop mode
(F11.00=1 or F12.00=1).
2.When switching to low-level running mode, start-stop control,
Note C
direction and acceleration/deceleration time comply with
relevant setting of running mode.
32: Process PID stop. Invalid when PID stops, when inverter maintains
N
current output frequency, PID regulation of frequency source is no more
performed.
33: Process PID integral holding. PID integral impact maintains, and will
not regulate according to the output quantity.
34: Process PID integral resetting. When the terminal is valid, PID integral
E
regulation function halts, but PID proportional control and differential control
function are still valid.
35: Process PID function negation. When the terminal is valid, direction of
PID effect and setting direction of F11.13 is opposite.
36: simple PLC invalid. Realize flexible switchover in low-level running
mode under PLC running status.
1. Switchover between PLC and low level running mode can be

available only when the inverter runs in PLC mode (F10.00 unit’s
digit is not 0).
2. When switching to low-level running mode, start-stop control,
Note
direction and acceleration/deceleration time comply with relevant
setting of running mode.
145
37: Simple PLC halted. It is to control the stop of running PLC, when the
terminal is valid, the inverter runs at zero frequency, PLC running does not time;
after invalid implementation, auto revolving speed tracking starts and keep on
running PLC.
38: Simple PLC stop state resetting. Under stop status of PLC running
mode, will clear PLC run step, runtime, run frequency etc. recorded when PLC
running stops if this terminal is effective, please see F10 group function
description.
39: Main frequency switchover to digital setting (keypad). The main
frequency provision channel is switched to keypad digital provision when this
terminal is valid (setting frequency by keypad up and down key).
40: Main frequency switchover to AI1. The main frequency provision
channel is switched to analog quantity AI1 provision when this terminal is valid
41: Main frequency switchover to AI2. The main frequency provision
channel is switched to analog quantity AI2 provision when this terminal is valid
C
42: Main frequency switchover to EAI1. When extended analog quantity is
valid, the main frequency provision channel is switched to extended analog
quantity EAI1 provision when this terminal is valid,
43: Main frequency switchover to EAI2. When extended analog quantity is
N
valid, , the main frequency provision channel switchover to extended analog
quantity EAI2 provision when this terminal is valid.
44 ~ 47: Main frequency setting channel selection terminal. By ON/OFF
of selection terminal 1 ~ 4, Free selection of main frequency setting channel can
be realized by terminal. The priority of main frequency setting channel selection
E
terminal (terminal function 44 ~ 47) is higher than the main frequency switchover
to (terminal function 41, 42, 43). For details, see table 7-8.
Table 7-8 Main frequency setting channel selection terminal
Channel Channel Channel Channel
selection selection selection selection
selection terminal
terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1
Operation keypad digital
OFF OFF OFF ON
setting
OFF OFF ON OFF AI1 analog setting
OFF OFF ON ON AI2 analog setting
OFF ON OFF OFF Terminal UP/DOWN setting
OFF ON OFF ON Communication setting
OFF ON ON OFF EAI1 analog setting (extended)
OFF ON ON ON EAI2 analog setting (extended)
ON OFF OFF OFF rapid pulse setting (X8)
ON OFF OFF ON Pulse width setting (X8)
ON OFF ON OFF Terminal encoder setting (X1,
146
X2)
Keypad analog potentiometer
ON OFF ON ON
setting (optional)
ON ON OFF OFF Reserved
ON ON OFF ON Reserved
ON ON ON OFF Reserved
48: Auxiliary frequency reset. Only valid for digit auxiliary frequency,
when this function terminal is valid, reset auxiliary frequency setting quantity,
setting frequency is completely decided by main frequency setting channel.
49: Command switchover to panel. When current command source is reset
by terminal or communication, switchover between current command source and
keypad command setting can be realized by this terminal.
50: Command switchover to terminal. When current command source is
reset by keypad or communication, switchover between current command source
and terminal command setting can be realized by this terminal.
51: Command switchover to communication. When current command
C
source is reset by keypad or terminal, switchover between current command
source and communication command setting can be realized by this terminal.
52, 53: Running command Channel selection terminal. For details, please
refer to Table 7-9.
N
Table 7-9 Running command channel logic mode
Running command channel Running command channel
Running command channel
selection terminal 2 selection terminal 1
OFF OFF Invalid
Operation keypad running
OFF ON
command channel
E
Terminal running command

ON OFF
channel
Communication running
ON ON
command channel
54: Forward prohibited command. Enable this terminal during the forward
running process, and the inverter stops according to the stop mode. First enable
this terminal, and then forward running enters zero frequency running status.
Jogging running is not affected by this.
55: Reverse prohibited command. Function and “Forward prohibited
command” are opposite.
56: Swinging frequency input. When the starting mode of swinging
frequency is manual input, this terminal is valid, and swinging frequency function
is valid. See F13 group function parameter instruction. When swinging frequency
is set as manual input, this terminal is invalid, run with preset frequency of
swinging frequency.
147
57: Resetting state of swinging frequency. When selecting swinging

frequency function, no matter auto or manual input mode, closing this terminal
will clear state information of swinging frequency memorized in the inverter.
When opening this terminal, swinging frequency restarts. For details, please see
F13 group function.
58: Interior counter reset end. Reset inverter built-in counter, and go with
counter triggering signal input. For details, please see parameter F08.27, F08.28.
59: Interior counter input end. Interior counter’s counting pulse input port,
pulse max. frequency: 50.0KHz.
60: Interior timer reset end. Reset inverter built-in timer, goes with timer
triggering-end signal input.
61: Interior timer triggering end. See parameter F08.29 function.
62: Length count input. Length counting input terminal, see fixed length
function of F13 group parameter.
63: Length reset. When the terminal is valid, reset internal length value, see
C
F13 fixed length function of parameter group.
64: Reset this operation time. When the terminal is valid, the running
counting time of this inverter is reset, see timing running defined in F18 group.
65: speed/torque control switching. The function of this terminal is only
N
effective under the mode of Speed Mode, this terminal can realize the dynamic
switching between torque Mode and Speed Mode.
66: Point positioning enabled terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
description at group 16.
67: Zero-speed servo enabled terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
E

68: Motor position reset terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the parameter
69: Recovery point positioning terminal(F00.24=2 valid). See the
parameter description at group 16.
70~ 90: Reserved
91: Pulse frequency input (X8 valid). Only valid for multi-functional input
terminal X8, this function terminal accepts pulse signal as frequency setting,
relationship between the input signal pulse frequency and setting frequency is as
shown in F06 and F07 group parameter.
92: Pulse width PWM input (X8 valid). Only valid for multi-functional
input terminal X8, this function terminal accepts PWM signal, check pulse width
as frequency setting, relationship between input PWM Pulse width and setting
frequency is as shown in F06 and F07 group parameter.
148
93~96:Reserved
F08.26 FWD/REV operating mode selection Range: 0~4 0
This parameter defines five different modes by controlling external terminal
inverter running.
0: Two-wire control mode 1
K2 K1 Operating command
EN500/EN600
K1
0 0 Stop FWD
K2
1 0 REV REV
0 1 FWD COM
1 1 Stop
Fig. 7-16 Two-wire operating mode 1
K1
C
1: Two-wire control mode 2
K2 Operating command
K1
EN500/EN600
N
0 0 Stop FWD
K2
1 0 Stop REV
0 1 FWD COM
E
1 1 REV
Fig. 7-17 Two-wire operating mode 2

2: Two-wire control mode 3 (monopulse control mode)
Monopulse control is triggered-type control. After triggering SB1 once, it
forwards runs. Retriggering SB1 once, it stops. Triggering SB1 once, it reversely
runs. Retriggering SB2 once, it stops. If it is forward running, the inverter stops
when triggering SB2 once. Retriggering SB1 once, it stops. If it is reverse running,
the inverter stops when triggering SB1 once.
149
EN500/EN600
SB1
FWD
SB2
REV
COM
Fig. 7-18 Two-wire control mode 3

EN500/EN600
Defines are as follows:
SB2
FWD
SB1: stop button SB1
Xi
SB2: forward button
SB3: reverse button C SB3
REV
COM
Fig. 7-19 Three-wire operating mode 1

N
Xi is X1 ~ X8’s Multi-functional Input terminal, at this moment, define its
corresponding terminal function as “Three-wire running control” function of
No.30.
E
SB1: stop button

EN500/EN600
SB2: run button SB2 FWD Running direction
K2
SB1 selection
Xi 0 Forward
K2 1 Reverse
REV
COM
Fig. 7-20 Three-wire operating mode 2

Xi is X1 ~ X8’s Multi-functional input terminal, At this moment, define its
corresponding terminal function as “Three-wire running control” function of No.
30.
F08.27 Set internal count value to setting Range: 0~65535 0
150
F08.28 Specify internal count to setting Range: 0~65535 0

F08.27 and F08.28 are to additionally define functions of 30 and 31 in 7-10.
When Xi (Counting trigger signal input function terminal) output pulse reaches
F08.27 defined value, Y1 (Y1 is set as internal count value final value to) outputs
one indicating signal, as shown in Fig. 7-21, When Xi inputs the eighth pulse,
Y1outputs one indicating signal. At this moment, F8.27=8.
When Xi (Counting trigger signal input function terminal) output pulse reaches
F08.28 defined value, Y2 (Y2 is set as internal counter specified value to) outputs
one indicating signal, until set count value arrives.
As shown in Fig. 7-21, when Xi inputs the fifth pulse, Y2 starts outputting one
indicating signal. Until set count value 8 arrives, F08.28=5. When specified count
value is greater than set count value, specified count value Invalid.
Xi input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Y1
Y2
C
Fig. 7-21 set count value setting and specified count value setting
F08.29 Internal timer timing setting Range: 0.1~6000.0s 60.0s
N
This parameter sets timing time of inverter internal timer, timer is triggered by
external triggering terminal (Xi terminal function no. is 61), the timer starts timing
upon receiving external triggering signal. After reaching timing time, Yi terminal
outputs a breadth of 0.5s valid pulse signal. When internal timer clearing terminal
is valid (Xi terminal function is set as 60), internal timer is reset.
E
Terminal pulse encoder

F08.30 Range: 0.01~10.00Hz 1.00Hz
frequency rate
This parameter defines main frequency regulation speed during terminal pulse
encoder setting frequency (F01.00=9). Main frequency terminal encoder pulse
input can only choose channel X1 and X2 combination; auxiliary frequency
terminal encoder pulse input can only choose channel X3 and X4 combination,
and the rate of the auxiliary frequency encoder frequency is the fixed rate.
When 9 is selected in F01.00 and F01.03, X1~X4 can only be used

as encoder frequency setting. Other terminal functions defined by
Note F08.18~F08.21 are invalid.
Range: units digit:0～1

F08.31 Special function selection 00
tens digit :0～1
Units digit: jogging priority level selection
0: the highest priority level
1: the lowest priority level
151
Tens digit: keypad adjustment of display setting (under speed control mode)
0: display setting frequency
1: display setting rotation speed
7.10 Switch output function parameter group: F09
Open-collector output terminal Y1
F09.00 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
F09.01 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
F09.02 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
F09.03 Range: 0~60 0
output setting
F09.04 Programmable relay output setting Range: 0~60 22
Functions of the above parameters are used to select Y1 ~ Y4 and relay output
terminals. Table 7-10 shows the functions of the above 4 terminals. One function
can be selected repeatedly.
Open-collector (Yi) and high-speed pulse (DO) output share terminal Y4. Y4
Setting
0 No output
C
terminal as the high-speed pulse function to be modified F00.22 thousands place
to 1.
Table7-10 Output terminals function selection diagram
Function Setting
31
Function
Set count value reached
N
1 Frequency inverter running(RUN) 32 Designated count value reached
2 Frequency inverter Forward running 33 Shutdown time arrival of the running
3 Frequency inverter Reverse running 34 Time arrival of the running
4 Frequency inverter DC brake 35 Setup running time arrived
Frequency inverter Ready for
5 36 Setup power-on time arrived
operation(RDY)
E
6 Shutdown command indicator 37 1st pump variable frequency

7 Zero current state 38 1st pump frequency
8 Over current state 39 2nd pump variable frequency
9 Current 1 arrived 40 2nd pump frequency
10 Current 2 arrived 41 Communication given
Frequency inverter Zero-frequency
11 42 Torque control speed limiting
output
12 Frequency arriving signal (FAR) 43 Torque arriving output
Frequency level detection signal 1
13 44 Positioning completion
FDT1
Frequency level detection signal
14 45 The brake logic 1
2(FDT2)
Output frequency arriving upper
15 46 The brake logic 2
limit(FHL)
Output frequency arriving lower
16 47 Frequency inverter running 1
limit(FLL)
Frequency 1 arrived Analog input disconnection signal
17 48
output
18 Frequency 2 arrived 49 X1 terminal closed valid
Frequency inverter overload pre- alarm
19 50 X2 terminal closed valid
signal(OL)
152
Frequency inverter Low voltage

20 51 Reserved
lock-up signal(LU)
21 External stopping command(EXT) 52 Reserved
22 Frequency inverter fault 53 Reserved
23 Frequency inverter warning 54 Reserved
24 Simple PLC operation running 55 Reserved
25 Completion of simple PLC operation 56 Reserved
26 Simple PLC cycle-running completed 57 Reserved
27 Simple PLC suspended 58 Reserved
28 Upper and lower limit of Wobble 59 Reserved
29 Setup length arrived 60 Reserved
30 Internal counter final value arrived - -
The instructions of the function output terminals listed in table 7-10 are as below:
0: The terminal function is idle.
1:Frequency inverter is running(RUN).The Drive is in the running state,
output the indicator signal.
2. Frequency inverter is forward running. The Drive is in the forward
C
running state, output the indicator signal.
3. Frequency inverter is reversed running. The Drive is in reversed
running state, output the indicator signal.
4.Frequency inverter is DC braking. The Drive is in DC braking state,
N
output the indicator signal.
5. Frequency inverter is ready to run. This signal being valid means that
the Drive bus voltage is normal, the Drive is running and forbidding the terminal
is invalid, it can accept a start command.
6. Shutdown command indicator. When the shutdown command is valid,
E
output the indictor signal.

7. Zero current is arrived. When detected the output meet the zero current
state, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the instruction of F09.12and
F09.13parameters for details.
8. Over current is arrived. When the output current meet the over current
detection conditions, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the instruction of
F09.14and F09.15 parameters for details.
9. Current 1 arrived. When the output current reaches the detection
conditions to meet the current 1, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the
instruction of F09.16and F09.17 parameters for details.
10. Current 2 arrived. When the output current reaches the detection
conditions to meet the current 2, output the indicator signal. Please refer to the
instruction of F09.18and F09.19 parameters for details.
11. Frequency inverter Zero frequency output. Please refer to the function
153
instruction of F09.10and F09.11.

12. Frequency arriving signal(FAR). Please refer to the function instruction
of F09.05.
13. Frequency level detection signal 1(FTD1). Please refer to the function
instruction of F09.06, F09.07.
14. Frequency level detection signal 2(FTD2). Please refer to the function
instruction of F09.08, F09.09.
15. Output frequency reaches upper limit (FHL). When the running
frequency reaches upper limit, the output is indicator signal.
16. Output frequency reaches lower limit (FHL). When the running
frequency reaches lower limit, the output is indicator signal.
17. Frequency 1 arriving output. Please refer to the function instruction of
F09.20, F09.21.
18. Frequency 2 arriving output. Please refer to the function instruction of
F09.22, F09.23.
C
19. Frequency inverter overload pre-alarm signal. Frequency inverter
output current exceeds F19.06 overload pre-alarm detection levels, and time is
greater than F19.07 overload pre-alarm delay time, output the indicator signal.
20. Frequency inverter Low voltage lock-up signal (LU).When the
N
frequency inverter is running, the DC bus voltage below the limit level, output
indication signal.
21. External fault shutdown (EXT).When the frequency inverter appears
external fault trip alarm (E-18), output indication signal.
22. Frequency inverter fault. When the frequency inverter detects fault, the
E
output is indication signal.

23. Frequency inverter warning. When the frequency inverter detects alarm,
the output is indication signal.
24. Simple PLC during operating. The simple PLC is enabled, and enter
into operation state, output indication signal
25. Simple PLC stage operation completed. When the simple PLC stage
operation is completed, output indication signal (single pulse signal, the width is
500ms).
26. Simple PLC ends after running a cycle. After the completion of a cycle
of simple PLC, output indication signal (single pulse signal, the width is 500ms)
27. Simple PLC pause. When the simple PLC is running into the pause state,
output is indication signal.
28. Wobble upper and lower limit. If the frequency fluctuation range
calculated by center frequency exceeds the upper limit F01.11 or belows lower
154
limit F01.12 after selecting the wobble function, it will output indication signal, as
shown in Figure 7-22.
Output
Setting
Upper limit Detection range
freq.
Lower limit Time
Y
Time
Y1:Wobble upper and lower
Fig.7-22 Wobble amplitude limit Fig.7-23 Freq. arrival signal output diagram
29. Setup length arrived. When detected the actual length exceeds a set
value F13.08, output indication signal.
30. Internal counter final value arrived. Please refer to the function
instruction of F08.27. C
31. Internal counter specified value arrived. Please refer to the function
instruction of F08.28.
32. Internal counter timing meter arrival. Please refer to the function
N
instruction of F08.29.
33. Shutdown time arrival of the running. Frequency inverter runs longer
than the setting time of F18.12, output indication signal.
34. Time arrival of the running. Frequency inverter runs longer than the
setting time of F18.13, output indication signal.
E
35. Setup time arrived. Accumulated running time of the frequency inverter
reaches the set accumulated running time (F18.10), output indication signal.
36. Setup power-on time arrived. Accumulated power on time of the
frequency inverter reaches the set accumulated running time (F18.09), the output
indication signal.
37: 1st pump variable frequency.
38: 1st pump frequency.
39: 2nd pump variable frequency.
40: 2nd pump frequency
When using Y1 ~ Y4 achieve two pumps constant pressure water supply, Y1 ~ Y4
functions are arranged in order of 37 to 40. Under constant pressure water supply
mode, the four parameters must all set to this value, the terminal functions can be
achieved
41: Communication given. In this moment the output of Yi is controlled by
communication, Please refer to the related communication protocol for details.
155
42: torque control speed limiting. Under the mode of torque control, when
the actual output frequency is greater than or equal to the value of limiting
frequency, this output terminal is effective. The value of speed limiting is defined
by parameter F14.16 to F14.19.
43: Torque arriving output. Under the torque control，when the motor
torque reaches to the torque command which is after the acceleration and
deceleration, and continue for the time defined by F09.48, then output active
level.
44: Positioning completion. Under the positioning control，when motor
position reaches to the designated spot, then output active level.
45: The brake logic 1. When the output frequency is greater than the value
(F09.10 + F09.11), output valid signal (Loose brake signal) , when the output
frequency is less than the value defined by F09.10 ,output brake signal .when
output no current, downtime, under voltage, that will output brake signals.
46: The brake logic 2. Deceleration stop and the output frequency is less
than F09.10, output brake signal. Run the command starts, when the output
C
frequency is greater than the value (F09.10 + F09.11), output valid signal (Loose
brake signal). If output no current, downtime, under voltage, that will output brake
signals. What difference with the function 45 is that can not produce brake signal
in the forward /reverse switching process (that is, the switching process of a
controlled object from rising to falling or falling to rising), so as to prolong the
N
life of the brake system.
47: Frequency inverter running 1. When the inverter is in the running state
and not jog operation state, output the valid signal.
48: Analog input disconnection signal output. When the disconnection
signal defined by F07.14 to F07.16 is valid, a valid pulse of 0.5 second will be
E
output, and then the system will add pump or reduce pump.
51~60: Reserved.
Detection amplitude of
F09.05 Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 5.00Hz
frequency arrival(FAR)
This parameter is added in the definition of Table 7-10 on the 12th functions. As
shown in Figure 7-23, when the inverter output frequency in the setting frequency
of positive and negative detection width, output indication signal.
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
F09.06 FDT1(frequency level)level 10.00Hz
limit frequency
F09.07 FDT1 lag Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 1.00Hz
Range: 0.00Hz~upper
F09.08 FDT2(frequency level)level 10.00Hz
limit frequency
F09.09 FDT2 lag Range: 0.00~50.00Hz 1.00Hz
156
F09.06, F09.07 is in the

definition of Table 7-10 on the 13th
Output freq.
Functions, F09.08, F09.08 is in the
FDT1 level FDT1 lag
definition of Table 7-10 on the 14th
functions, take an example of 13th
functions: When the output frequency Time
exceeds a certain setting frequency

Y
(FDT1 level), output indicator
Signal, until the output frequency drops Time
below the certain frequency FDT1 frequency
level (FDT1 level -FDT1 lag). As shown in Fig.7-24 Freq. level detection diagram
Figure 7-24.
Zero-frequency signal Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F09.10 0.40Hz
detection value frequency
Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
F09.11 Zero-frequency backlash 0.10Hz
frequency
Operating
运行频率 freq.
C
N
F09.11
F09.10
时间
Time
E
零频运行
Zero freq.
operating
输出
output
Time
时间
Fig.7-25 Zero-frequency signal detection
Parameter F09.10, F09.11 defines the zero frequency output control function.
When the output frequency is within the zero-frequency signal detection range, if
Yi output function selects 11, then the output of Yi is indication signal.
Zero current detection
F09.12 Range: 0.0~50.0% 0.0%
amplitude
F09.13 Zero current detection time Range: 0.00~60.00s 0.1s
157
Output current
输出电流
Zero current
detection零电流检出
amplitude
幅值
(F09.12) F09.12
时间
Time
Zero零电流检出
current
detection signal
信号
时间
Time
Zero current
零电流检出时间
detection
F09.13 time
(F09.13)
Fig.7-26 Zero current detection diagram
When the output current of the inverter is less than or equal to zero current
C
detection level, and lasts longer than the zero current detection time, then the
output of frequency inverter multifunction Yi is indication signal. Figure 7-26 is
the schematic of zero current detection.
F09.14 Over-current detection value Range: 0.0~250.0% 160.0%
N
F09.15 Over-current detection time Range: 0.00~60.00s 0.00s
Output current
输出电流
Output over
输出过电流检出值
current detection
F09.14
value(F09.14)
E
时间
Time
Output输出过电流
over
current指示信号
induction
signal ON
时间
Time
Output over
输出过电流检出时间
current detection
F09.15
time(F09.15)
Fig.7-27 Output over-current detection diagram
When the output current of the inverter is greater than the over-current detection
points, and lasted longer than the over-current detection time, frequency inverter
multifunction Yi output indication signal, Figure 7-27 is the schematic of output
over-current detection.
Current 1 arriving the
F09.16 Range: 0.0~250.0% 100.0%
detection value
158
F09.17 Current 1 width Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%

Current 2 arriving the
F09.18 Range: 0.0~250.0% 100.0%
detection value
F09.19 Current 2 width Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
When the output current of frequency inverter is within the positive and negative
detection width of setting current arrival, then the output of frequency inverter
multifunction Yi is indication signal.
EN500/EN600 provides two current arrival and detection width parameters, table
7-28 is the function schematic diagram.
输出电流
Output current
Current I arriving Current I arriving detection width

电流I到达检出宽度
电流I到达检出值
detection value 电流I到达检出宽度
Current I arriving detection width
Current I arriving
电流I到达指示信号
induction signal OFF
C
ON ON
OFF
ON
OFF
时间
Time
N
Fig.7-28 Current arriving detection diagram
Frequency 1 arriving Range:0.00Hz~upper
F09.20 50.00Hz
detection value limit frequency
F09.21 0.00Hz
detection width limit frequency
E

F09.22 50.00Hz
detection value limit frequency
F09.23 0.00Hz
detection width limit frequency
When the output frequency of frequency inverter reaches detecting value of the
positive and negative detecting width range, then the output of multifunctional Yi
is indication signal.
EN500/EN600 provides two sets of frequency arrival detecting parameters, which
have set frequency value and frequency detecting width respectively. Table 7-29
is the diagram of this function.
159
Operating
运行频率 freq.
Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出宽度 detection width
Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出值
detection value Frequency I arriving
频率I到达检出宽度 detection width
时间
Time
Frequency I arriving ON ON
频率I到达指示信号
induction signal OFF OFF OFF
Fig.7-29 Frequency arriving detection diagram

Positive and negative logic
F09.24 Range: 0000~FFFF 0000
setting of output terminal
This parameter defines the output logic of the standard output terminal Yi, relay
RLY and expand output terminal EYi, relays ERIY1, ERLY2.
0: positive logic, output terminal and the common terminal close to the valid
state, disconnect invalid state C
1: reverse logic, output terminal and the common terminal close to the
invalid state, disconnect valid state
N
thousands hundreds The tens the units
BIT0:Y1 positive and negative logic definition
E
BIT0: fault relay 1 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1：expand OC1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2:expand OC2 positive and negative logic definition

BIT1：expand fault relay1 positive and negative logic definition
BIT2：expand fault relay2 positive and negative logic definition
BIT3: reserved
BIT0~BIT3: reserved
160
F09.25 Y1 output closed delay time Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s

F09.26 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.28 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.30 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
F09.32 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
delay time
Relay output closed delay
F09.33 Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
time
Relay output disconnected
F09.34
delay time C Range: 0.000~50.000s 0.000s
Parameter F09.25 ~ F09.34 defines the corresponding delay time from connect or
disconnect to frequency level of the multifunction output terminals. Table 7-30 is
the schematic of multi-function output terminal operation.
N
Yi level
Invalid Valid Invalid

Yi Valid
E
close delay Disconnect delay

Setting rang：0.000～50.000s
Fig.7-30 Multifunction output terminal action diagram
F09.35 Analog output (AO1) selecting Range: 0~25 0
F09.36 Analog output (AO2) selecting Range: 0~25 0
DO function selecting(reuse
F09.37 Range: 0~25 0
with Y4)
0:output frequency before slip compensation(0.00Hz~ upper limit
frequency)
1:output frequency after slip compensation(0.00Hz~ upper limit
frequency)
2: setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)
3:master setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)
161
4:auxiliary setup frequency(0.00Hz~ upper limit frequency)

5:current output 1(0~2×rated current of frequency inverter)
6:current output 1(0~3×rated current of frequency inverter)
7:output voltage(0~1.2×rated voltage of load motor)
8: bus voltage (0~1.5×Rated bus voltage)
9:motor speed(0~3 ×rated speed)
10:PID given(0.00~10.00V)
11:PID feedback(0.00~10.00V)
12:AI1(0.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
13:AI2(-10.00~10.00V or 4~20mA)
14: communication given(AO output is controlled by communication,
please refer to the related communication protocol for details.)
15:motor rotate speed (0.00Hz~upper limit frequency)
16:current given torque (0~2 times of rated torque)
17:current output torque(0~2 times of rated torque)
C
18:current torque current(0~2 times of rated motor current)
19:current flux current(0~1 times of rated motor flux current)
20~25:Reserved
1.Terminal AO1 and AO2 are optional output terminal of 0~10V

N
or 4~20mA which can satisfy the variety needs of customer.
2.By disposing F00.21 analog output，output of terminal AO1 and
AO2 can be 0~10V or 4~20mA to satisfy the variety needs of
customer.
Note 3.The unit’s place of F00.22 is set to 1 when DO output pulse signal.
E
4.Rated flux current=current value of F15.11 parameter.

Rated torque current=sqrt (rated motor current×rated motor
Current-rated flux current×rated flux current)
F09.38 Reserved
F09.39 Analog output (AO1) filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s

F09.40 Analog output (AO1) gain Range: 0.00~2.00 1.00
F09.41 Analog output (AO1) bias Range: 0.0~100.0% 0.0%
Parameter F09.39 defines the filter time of A01 output, its reasonable setting can
improve stability of analog output. But a higher setting will influence the rate of
162
change, which can not reflect the instantaneous value of corresponding physical
quantity.
If users want to change the display range or error correction table headers, you can
achieve it by adjusting the output gain and bias of AO1.
When AO1 output voltage, the adjustment is as follows:
Analog output AO1(after revise)=output gain(F09.40)×analog output AO1(before
revise)+output bias(F09.41)×10V
When AO1 output current, the adjustment is as follows:
Analog output AO1(after revise)=output gain(F09.40)×analog output AO1(before
revise)+output bias(F09.41)×20mA
This function code will influence analog output during modify

Note processes.
F09.42 Analog output (AO2) filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s

C
F09.43 Analog output (AO2) gain
F09.44 Analog output (AO2) bias
Range: 0.00~2.00
Range: 0.0~100.0%
Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09.39~F09.41
1.00
0.0%
N
F09.45 DO filter time Range: 0.0~20.0s 0.0s
F09.46 DO output gain Range: 0.00~2.00 1.00
DO maximum pulse output
F09.47 Range: 0.1~20.0KHz 10.0KHz
frequency
E
Please refer to the function introduce of parameters F09.39~F09.41.

Maximum pulse output frequency of terminal DO corresponds to maximum select
value of F09.37. For example, F09.31=0, terminal DO’s function is: output
frequency before slip compensation, which means Maximum pulse output
frequency corresponds to upper frequency.
Note：When the output frequency of DO port is less than 1.5Hz, disposed as 0Hz.
Torque reaches to the
F09.48 Range: 0.02～200.00s 1.00s
detection time
F09.49 Reserved
F09.50 Reserved
163
7.11 Simple PLC/Multi-speed function parameters Group:F10

Range: unitdigit: 0～3
tens digit: 0～2
F10.00 Simple PLC operate setting 0000
hundreds digit: 0,1
The simple PLC operation mode, re-start mode after interruption, unit of running
time and the storage mode when power off can be set in different bit of parameter
F10.00, details as follows:
Unit digit: simple PLC operation mode.
0:No action.PLC operation mode is disabled.
1:Stop after single cycle. as show in Fig.7-31, the drive stops automatically
after one cycle of operation and will not start only when receiving RUN command
again.
2: Maintain final value after one cycle, as show in Fig.7-32, the drive will
keep running with the final value and the direction after complete one cycle
command is available.
C
operation, the drive won’t stop according to the set stop mode until the stop
3: Continuous operation, as show in Fig.7-33, the drive will start next cycle
of operation automatically after completing one cycle of operation until receiving
N
STOP command then stop according the set stop mode.
d15
f2 f15
a2 f5
f1 d3
E
a1 a5
a3 f3
a4 d5
f4
T2 T15
T1 T3 T4 T5
RUN Command
STOP Command
Fig.7-31 PLC stop operating after one cycle mode
164
f2 d15f15
a2 f5
f1 d3
Hold final value

a1 a5
a3 f3
d5
a4
f4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15
RUN Command
STOP Command
Fig.7-32 PLC holds the final value after one cycle mode
d15 d15
f2 f15 f2 f15
PLC运行
PLC Operation
a1
a2
f1
C
d2
a3
f3
a5
f5
d1 a2
f1
d3
a3
a5
f5
d1
f1
N
d4 f3
d4
a4 a4
f4 f4
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T15
The first cycle
第一次循环 The second cycle
第二次循环
E
RUN命令
RUN Command
STOP命令
STOP Command
Fig7-33 PLC continuous operation mode
a1～a15:The Acc time of different steps
d1～d15:The Dec time of different steps
f1～f15:The frequency of different steps
There are 15 steps can set in Fig.7-31，7-32，7-33.
Tens digit: Restart mode after interruption.
0: Restart from the first step.
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP commands, fault
alarm or power failure, it will run from the first step after restarting.
1: Restart from the interruption step;
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault
165
alarm, the drive will record the operating time of the current step and will
continue from the step where the drive stops after restart at the frequency defined
for this step with the remained time, as show in Fig.7-34.If the drive stops due to
power off, it will not record the state and from the first step operate when restart.
2: Restart from the interrupted Frequency
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP command or fault
alarm, the drive will record the operating time and the current frequency of the
interrupt step, it will operating with the record time and record frequency when
restart, as show in Fig7-35
Output Freq. Hz
Pause signal
f1
a1 d2
f3
a3
C
Step1 Step2
Operated time
a2
f2
Step2 remain time

Time t
N
a1:Acc time of the 1st step a2:Acc time of the 2nd step
a3:Acc time of the 3rd step d2:Dec time of the 1st step
f1:Frequency of the 1st step f2:Frequency of the 2nd step
f3:Frequency of the 3rd step
Fig.7-34 simple PLC restart mode 1
E
Pause signal
Output Freq Hz f1 Same freq.

a1 d2
d2 f3
a2 f2 a3
Time t
Step1 Step2 Step 2 remain time
Operated time
a1:Acc time of the 1st stepa2:Acc time of the 2nd step
a3:Acc time of the 3rd step d2:Dec time of the 1st step
f1:Frequency of the 1st step f2:Frequency of the 2nd step
f3:Frequency of the 3rd step
Fig.7-35 PLC Restart mode 2
166
Hundreds digit: PLC unit of running time.

0: Seconds;
1: Minutes;
The unit is effective for the running time of different steps only, during the operation
of PLC, the unit of Acc time and Dec time is defined by parameter F01.19.
1. The step is ineffective if the time of this step of PLC operation is

set as 0 thereafter operate the next step.
2.Control the PLC process a pause ,ineffective, operate via
Note terminal ,for details please refer to parameters in F8 Group that
relative with terminal function.
Thousands digit: the storage mode when power off.

0: No storage. No record the running state when power off, it will restart
from the first step when power on again.
C
1: Storage. Records the running status which include the step, running
frequency and running time when power off, it restart with the mode that set in
hundreds digit after power on again.
No matter power-off storage in stop status or running status, you
N
should set thousands digit as 1 thereafter set tens digit as 1 or
Note 2,otherwise power-off storage function is ineffective.
F10.01 Step 1 setting Range: 000H～E22H 020

E

167

F10.01～F10.15 are used to configure the operating frequency, direction and
Acc/Dec time of each PLC operating step. These functions are all selected by
digits on different place of parameters. Details as below:
Unit digit: Frequency setting
0:select multi-frequency i. i=1～15,please refer to F10.31～F10.45 for
definitions of multi-frequency.
1:the frequency is determined by the combination of the main frequency
and the auxiliary frequency.
2: Reserved.
Tens digit: The selection of running direction for PLC and multi-speed.
0: Forward.
1: Reversed. C
2: Determined by operating commands (FWD, REV)
Hundreds digit: Acc/Dec time choose
0: Acc/Dec time 1
N
1: Acc/Dec time 2
2: Acc/Dec time 3
3: Acc/Dec time 4
4: Acc/Dec time 5
5: Acc/Dec time 6
E
6: Acc/Dec time 7
7: Acc/Dec time 8
8: Acc/Dec time 9
9: Acc/Dec time 10
A: Acc/Dec time 11
B: Acc/Dec time 12
C: Acc/Dec time 13
D: Acc/Dec time 14
E: Acc/Dec time 15
Accelerate time1～15 defined by F01.17,F01.18,F04.16～F04.43. The running
direction of PLC and multi-speed is determined by the ten’s place of
F10.01~F10.15.
F10.16 Step 1 running time Range: 0～6000.0 10.0
168

C
F10.29 Step 14 running time
F10.30 Step 15 running time
Range: 0～6000.0
Range: 0～6000.0
10.0
10.0
Parameters F10.16～F10.30 defined Running time of each PLC Step from Step 1
to Step 15.
N
Each step running time include Acc time and Dec time.
Note
F10.31 Multi-Frequency 1 Range:0.00Hz～upper limit Freq. 5.00Hz

E

169

Frequency will be used in Multi-speed operation mode and Simple PLC operation
mode. More details please refer to the Multi-speed terminal operation function in
Parameters Group F08 and Simple PLC operation function in Parameters Group
F10.
7.12 Closed-Loop PID operation Parameters Group:F11

Analog feedback control system:
Pressure reference is input through the terminal AI1，and water pressure sensor
C
send a 4-20mA to the terminal AI2 of inverter as a feedback signal, all of them
make up of analog closed-loop control system via build-in PID adjuster ,as shown
in Fig.7-36
N
Three QF Output
R EN500/EN600 U
phase S V M P
380V T W Pressure sensor
Xi (Defined as FWD)
E
COM 4～20mA
AI2
+10V GND
Provision
AI1
1～3K
GND
Fig.7-36 Build-in PID adjuster control system diagram
Setting the value of F11.01 can choose the channel of pressure

Note reference.
Operating principle of built-in PID function of EN500/EN600 is shown in

Fig.7-37 as below:
170
Proportion
gain
(F11.07)
+ e
Closed-loop Reference Offset limit + Closed-loop
regulation Integral gain output Closed-loop
reference (F11.03) _ (F11.11) (F11.08) regulation output
+
Differential
gain
Feedback (F11.09)
regulation
(F11.04，F11.14) Closed-loop feedback
Fig.7-37 PID block control principle diagram

In above diagram ,the definition of closed-loop reference ,feedback error limit and
PI parameters are similar with the general PID adjuster，the relationship between
reference and expected feedback is shown in Fig.7-38.The reference and feedback
are converted and based on 10.00V.
In Fig.7-37, the real values of closed-loop reference and feedback can be
regulated in Group F06 and F07, so that can reach a good performance.
20mA
C Expected Value eedback
N
4mA Pressure reference
0 10V
E
Fig.7-38 Reference and expected feedback value

After the system control mode is confirmed, follow the procedures below to set
the closed-loop parameters:
(1)Determine the closed-loop reference and feedback channel (F11.01F11.02).
(2)The relationship between the closed-loop reference and feedback should be
defined for closed-loop control (the Group F6).
(3) Set up the closed-loop frequency presetting function (F11.19,F11.20).
(4) Adjust the proportion gain, integral gain, differential gain, sampling cycle and
error limit(F11.07～F11.11).
F11.00 Closed-loop control function Range: 0,1 0
0:PID closed-loop function disabled
1:PID closed-loop function enabled
F11.01 Reference channel choose Range: 0～7 0
171
0: Digital provision
1:AI1 analog 0-10V or 4-20mA provision
3:EAI1 analog provision (Extensible)
5: Pulse provision
6: Communication provision(Communication address：1D00). Please
refer to the chapter of Modbus communication.
7: Reserved
Except the above provision channels, Multi-Closed-loop provision

is available. Connecting different terminal to choose different
Note provision value which with a highest priority.
F11.02 Feedback channel selection Range: 0～9 0

0:AI1 analog input
1:AI2 analog input
C
2:EAI1 analog input(Extensible)
3:EAI2 analog input(Extensible)
N
4:AI1+AI2
5:AI1-AI2
6:Min｛AI1，AI2｝
7:Max｛AI1，AI2｝
8: Pulse input
E
9:Communication feedback ( address is 1DOC, 4000 stands for 10.00V)

F11.03 Provision channel filtering time Range: 0.00～50.00s 0.20s
F11.04 Feedback channel filtering time Range: 0.00～50.00s 0.10s
F11.05 PID output filtering time Range: 0.00～50.00s 0.10s
The external reference signal and feedback signal usually carry some noise. those
noise signal can be filtered by setting the time constant of filter in F11.03 and
F11.04.The bigger the time constant is, the better the immunity capability, but
with a slow response. The shorter the time constant is, the faster the response, but
the immunity capability became weak.
The PID output filter time is the time of the filter for output frequency or torque,
the bigger time, the slower the response output.
F11.06 Provision digital setting Range: 0.00～10.00V 1.00V
This function can realize digital setting of reference via keypad.
172
When the PID function is enabled, Setting F18.14 as 1 can adjust

pressure reference by press , otherwise the keys
Note are invalid for adjusting reference in monitoring mode.
F11.07 Proportion Gain Kp Range: 0.000～6.5535 0.0500

F11.08 Integral Gain Ki Range: 0.000～6.5535 0.0500
F11.09 Differential Gain Kd Range: 0.000～9.999 0.000
F11.10 Sampling cycle T Range: 0.01～1.00s 0.10s
The bigger of the proportion gain of Kp, the faster the response, but oscillation
may easily occur.
If only proportion gain Kp is used in regulation, the offset cannot be eliminated
completely. To eliminate the offset, please use the integral gain Ki to form a PI control
system. The bigger Ki is, the faster the response, but oscillation may easily occur if Ki is
big enough.
C
The sampling cycle T refers to the sampling cycle of feedback value. The PI D
regulator calculates once in each sampling cycle. The bigger the sampling cycle is,
the slower the response.
N
F11.11 Deviation limit Range: 0.0～20.0% 2.0%
If defines the max. Deviation of the output from the reference, as shown in Fig.7-39,
the PID adjuster stops operation when the feedback value within this range. Setting
this parameter correctly will improve the moderation of the accuracy and stability of
E
the system
Feedback
Reference Offset limit
Time
Output Freq.
Time
Fig.7-39 Offset limit
Offset limit is the percentage refer to the value of reference.

Note
173
F11.12 PID differential amplitude limit Range: 0.00～100.00% 0.10%

In the PID regulator, the effect of differential is too sensitive too easy to cause
system oscillation, therefore limit the effect of differential PID in a smaller range,
F11.12 the parameter that used to set the output range of PID differential.
F11.13 Closed-loop regulation characteristic Range: 0,1 0
0: Positive effect. When the provision increases, select while requiring speed
of motor increase.
1: Negative effect. When the provision increases, select while requiring
speed of motor decrease.
Value after
converted
Speed
10V
Positive Effect Positive Effect
Negative Effect Negative Effect
0 10V
CReference
0 10V
Feedback
N
Fig.7-40 Closed-loop characteristic Fig.7-41 Feedback characteristic
Feedback channel positive-negative
F11.14 Range: 0,1 0
characteristic
0: Positive characteristic. The relationship between reference and feedback
E
is positive
1: Negative characteristic. The relationship between reference and feedback
is negative
This parameter is used to change the feedback characteristic of the feedback
signal. After input into inverter through the feedback channel, the feedback
pressure will compare with the reference after regulated by the positive and
negative characteristic regulation, as shown in Fig.7-41
PID regulation upper Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.15 50.00Hz
limit frequency Frequency
PID regulation lower Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.16 0.00Hz
limit frequency Frequency
User can set up the parameters F11.15 and F11.16 to define the output lower limit
and upper limit frequency of the PID regulator.
F11.17 Integral regulation selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Stop integral regulating when the comparison value of the reference and
174
feedback reaches the range of threshold for integral separation

1: Keep integral regulating even thought the comparison value of the
reference and feedback reach the range of threshold integral separation
Adjusting this parameter can avoid integral saturation and improve the response
of the system.
PID threshold of the integral
F11.18 Range: 0.0～100.0% 100.0%
separation
PID integral separated function: there is no integral regulating just proportion
regulating during closed-loop control when the comparison value that between
reference and feedback is bigger than this threshold. When the comparison is
smaller than this threshold, the integral regulating will be active, and can adjust
the response speed of system by adjusting this parameter.
Preset Closed-loop Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F11.19 0.00Hz
frequency limit frequency
Holding time of preset
F11.20 Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
Closed-loop frequency
C
This function can make the closed-loop adjuster into the stable status quickly.
When the closed-loop function start，the output frequency will ramp up to the preset
closed-loop frequency(F11.19) within the Acc time, and keep running the time that set
in F11.20 then start the closed-loop operation as shown is Fig.7-42
N
Output Freq.
Preset Freq.
E
Time
Hold time of Preset Freq.
Fig.7-42 Preset closed-loop operating
Preset closed-loop Function is ineffective when set F11.19 and

Note F11.20 as 0.
F11.21 Closed-loop output reversion selection Range: 0~2 2

0: The inverter will runs with the low limit frequency when the closed-loop
output value is negative
1:The inverter will reverse running when the value of the closed-loop output
is negative(be opposite of the initial direction )
175
2: determined by running demand. The motor running direction is

determined by demand direction.
The comparison value can be display in the PID monitor

parameters, it’s positive when the reference bigger than the
feedback value, and negative when reference smaller than
Note
feedback value.
Closed-loop output
Range: 0.00Hz～upper limit
F11.22 reversion frequency 50.00Hz
Frequency
upper limit
The PID regulator is a kind of bipolar adjustment. By setting F11.21 and F11.22,
can choose whether the inverter reverse run in some degree frequency or not.
F11.23 Multiple closed-loop provision 1 Range: 0.00～10.00V 0.00V
F11.25
F11.26
F11.27
C
Multiple closed-loop provision 3 Range: 0.00～10.00V
0.00V
0.00V
0.00V
N
Among the closed-loop reference channel, besides the 7 channels defined by
F11.01,the closed-loop reference can also be defined in F11.23～F11.29. The
E
priority of multi-closed-loop reference control is higher than the reference

channels that defined by F11.01.
Multi-closed-loop reference 1～7 can be selected by external terminals. Please
refer to the terminal function 19~21 of introductions to F08.18～F08.25.When the
function of Constant water supply is enable, the reference of constant water
pressure is decided by the multi-closed-loop reference which selected by external
terminals.
Computational formula: constant pressure reference = F12.06 × Multi-closed-loop
reference/10.00V.By using this functions can realize different times with a
different constant water pressure.
176
7.13 Constant pressure water supply function parameters Group: F12

Constant pressure water supply mode
F12.00 Range: 0～5 0
selection
0: disabled.
1: Inverter works in one-drive-two-pump mode.
2: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-two-pump
mode.
3: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-three-pump
mode.
4: Choose extensible constant pressure board acts in one-drive-four-pump
mode.
5: Select inverterY1,Y2 as the double pump timing alternate constant
pressure water supply mode. While F12.00=5,F09.00=37,F09.01=38，realize the
timing alternate constant pressure water supply control between two pumps, only
one motor is running at most at any time, the time of timing alternate is defined by
F12.10. While F12.10=0, no alternate control, While F12.10=1，switch a running
pump while starting.
C
This function can be used to choose different kinds of constant pressure water
supply mode, and you should choose an extensible constant pressure board to
realize one-drive-three mode and one-drive-four mode and F00.19 should be set to
N
2.
When modify F12.00 from 0 to water supply mode is valid ， C-04,C-05
automatically relate constant pressure water supply setting pressure and feedback
pressure (including the display of halting and running).
E
1. The function of Group F11 will be effective automatically when

the constant pressure supply function is enabled.
2. Except for the related parameters in Group F11 and F12 for
Closed-loop, the function of Yi should be enabled in F9 for the
inverter works in one-drive-two-pump mode without an extend
Note board.
3. Output terminal Y4/DO should be set to Y4.
4. When one inverter drive one pump with constant pressure water
supply, the parameter F09.00~F09.03 (Y1~Y4) can not be set
37~38.
Range: 0.000～the range of

F12.01 Target pressure setting 0.200Mpa
long-distance manometer
This parameter defined the target pressure of the constant pressure supply system.
The channels of the pressure reference and feedback are defined by F11.01 and
F11.02.
177
Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F12.02 Sleep frequency threshold 30.00Hz
limit frequency
Range: 0.000～F12.06
F12.03 Revival pressure threshold 0.150Mpa
Mpa
The function of Sleep frequency threshold: To save energy and protect the motor,
when the water feedback pressure within the offset limit (F11.11), and the
operating frequency is under in the sleep frequency threshold (F12.02), after a
sleep delay time (F12.04), the system will enter a sleep mode and the operating
frequency will drop to 0.00Hz
Revival function: When the system is in the sleep mode, if the feedback water
pressure keep less than F12.03 (the revival pressure) a delay time (F12.05), the
system will revival from the sleep mode.
F12.04 Sleep delay time Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
This parameter is the delay time that from the feedback pressure meets the sleep
conditions to the system enter in sleep mode.
C
Within the sleep delay time, if the feedback pressure does not meet the sleep
conditions, the system will not enter into sleep mode
Sleep function is disabled when F12.04=0.
F12.05 Revival delay time Range: 0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
N
When the constant pressure supply system in the sleep state, if the feedback
pressure of system less than F12.11 which defined the revival pressure
threshold ,the system will revival and get out of sleep mode after the revival delay
time.
The range of long-distance
E
F12.06 Range: 0.001～9.999Mpa 1.000Mpa

manometer
This parameter defines the range of long-distance manometer. Setting this
parameter can correspond to the maximum feedback pressure with the analog
feedback signal 10V or 20mA
Allowed deviation of upper
limit frequency or lower limit
F12.07 Range: 0.1～100.0% 1.0%
frequency when add or
reduce pump
When output frequency reaches the deviation range of upper limited frequency
and the feedback is less than given value, adding pumps judge is available. When
output frequency reaches the deviation range of lower limited frequency and the
feedback is more than given value, decreasing pumps judge is available.
When F12.07=0.0%, output frequency reach upper or lower limitation frequency
and the pressure meets the requirement, then decrease pumps is available.
178
Add pump switching

F12.08 Range: 0.2～999.9s 5.0s
estimate time
When the output frequency up to the upper limit frequency (F11.15) but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will add pump after the
judging time.
When the output frequency down to the lower limit frequency (F11.16) but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will reduce pump after the
judging time.
Electromagnetic contactor
F12.09 Range: 0.1～10.0s 0.5s
switching delay time
This parameter defines the action delay time of magnetic control conductor when
it’s switch from power source supply to variable or from variable frequency
control to power source supply.
Automatic switching time
F12.10 Range: 0000～65535 minute 0
interval
By setting this parameter can avoid the rust of motor when it’s not work long time.
C
The inverter will switch the work status of the working pump and static pump
automatically and smartly under the switch interval.
The automatic switch function is disabled when set the parameter as 0000. The
system will switch one time when each restart of system as this parameter is 0001.
N
If the value of this parameter is bigger than 0002, the system will switch
automatically according the switch interval.
F12.11 Revival mode selection Range: 0,1 0
F12.12 Revival pressure coefficient Range: 0.01～0.99 0.75
E
When F12.11=0, the revival pressure of the constant pressure supply is the value
of F12.03.
WhenF12.11=1, the revival pressure is the calculating value of F12.12*F12.01
Reduce pump switching
F12.13 Range： 0.2～999.9s 5.0s
estimate time
When the output frequency up to the upper limit frequency (F11.15)but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will add pump after the
judging time defined by F12.08.
When the output frequency down to the lower limit frequency (F11.15) but the
pressure still not meeting the requirement, the system will reduce pump after the
judging time defined by F12.13.
F12.14 Reserved
179
7.14 Traverse, Fixed-length control Function Parameters Group:

F13
F13.00 Traverse function selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Range: unit digit: 0,1
tens digit: 0,1
F13.01 Traverse operating mode 0000
hundreds digit: 0,1
Unit digit: Start mode 1st
0: Auto start. The drive operates at the preset frequency of traverse for a
certain time thereafter enter traverse mode automatically.
1: Terminal manual mode. Choosing multi-function terminal(Xi= X1～
X8)as 56 function, when the terminal is enabled, the drive will enter traverse
mode. The drive will exit traverse operation and operate at the pre-set traverse
frequency when it’s disabled. C
Tens digit: Traverse amplitude AW mode choosing
0: Variable swing. Amplitude AW changes with the central frequency and
the change rate relate to the definition of F13.02.
N
1: Fixed swing. Traverse operating amplitude AW is determined by Upper
limit Frequency and F13.02.
Note: The traverse central frequency is set by the main frequency.
Hundreds digit: Restart mode
0: Restart at the initial state.
E
1: Restart at the memorized state before stopping

Thousands digit: Traverse state saving when power off.
This function is effective when the start mode is Restarting from the reserved
memory state, and saving operating state when power off.
0: Not save
1: Save
When in variable amplitude mode, the channel of central
frequency is confirmed by F01.06.During the traverse frequency
operation, the Acc and Dec time are controlled only by traverse
Note frequency circle F13.04 when adjusting the central frequency.
F13.02 Traverse frequency swing value Range: 0.0～50.0% 10.0%

Variable amplitude: AW= the central frequency ×F13.02
Fixed amplitude: AW=Upper limit frequency ×F13.02
180
The traverse operating frequency is restricted by the upper and

lower limit of frequency. Incorrectly setting the frequency will lead
Note to abnormal of traverse operation.
F13.03 Sudden-jump frequency Range:0.0～50.0% 2.0%

As shown in Fig.7-43, there is not a jitter frequency when F13.03=0.
F13.04 Traverse cycle Range:0.1～999.9s 10.0s
F13.04 defines a complete cycle of traverse operation which including rising and
falling processed.
Triangular wave rising Range:0.0～98.0%(Traverse
F13.05 50.0%
time cycle)
Definition traverse rising time=F13.04×F13.05 (s), the traverse falling time=
F13.04×(1-F13.05)(s).
Please refer to Fig.7-43
C
F13.06 Preset frequency of Traverse Range:0.00～400.00Hz
F13.06 defines the operating frequency of the Drive before entering traverse
operation.
Traverse preset frequency
0.00Hz
N
F13.07 Range:0.0～6000.0s 0.0s
waiting time
F13.07 defines the operating time of Preset frequency before entering Traverse
operation when auto-start mode is enabled.
If manual start mode is available, F13.07 is disabled.
Please refer to Fig.7-43 as below.
E
Hz Operating Fre.
Traverse amplitude
AW=Fset*F13.02
Upper Limit Freq
Central Freq +AW
Lower limit Freq -AW
a1
Preset Freq Jitter Freq
a1 =AW*F13.03
Time t
Rising time
Accelerate Traverse waiting Decelerate
time=F13.07 Traverse Cycle
according the Dec time
Run
Stop
Fig.7-43 Traverse operation
181
Range：0～65535
F13.08 Setup length 0
（m\cm\mm）
F13.09 Pulse No. of axis per circle Range：1～10000 1
F13.10 Axis perimeter Range：0.01～655.35cm 10.00cm

Percentage of remaining
F13.11 Range：0.00%～100.00% 0.00%
length
Length correction
F13.12 Range：0.001～10.000 1.000
coefficient
Set length, actual length and Numbers of pulses per cycle are used for fixed length
control. The Actual length is calculated by the number of pulses collected by
terminal Xi (i=1--8), set the Xi function code to 62 and length signal output.
actual length=(Actual number of pulses×F13.10×F13.12)/ F13.09, When the
actual record length(F00.02 = 39)>set length(F13.08), after the time defined by
F13.07, The "reach length" signal can be output via Yi and the relay output
terminal for 0.5 seconds.
C
When remaining length ratio< F13.11, The drive will run at the frequency defined
by F13.06 until the length is reached. With this function, the overshoot of the stop
can be prevented to increase the accuracy of the fixed length control. When this
parameter equals 0.00%, this function is invalid. (This function is valid only when
N
the current frequency is the primary auxiliary).
1) When F00.02=39, Actual length can be monitored by C-01in

running state. Count length function is available both V/F control
mode and Vector Control mode.
E
Note 2) Using X8 port as a fixed length count input, the maximum input
value is 4K .Using X1~X7 port as a fixed length count input, the
maximum input value is 50Hz .
units digit: Reserved

Record length when Tens digit: 0、1、2
F13.13 0000
the length is reached Hundreds digit: 0、1、2
Thousands digit: 0、1、2
Units digit: Reserved
Tens digit: Sets the unit of length
0: meter (m)
1: centimeter (cm)
2: millimeter (mm)
Hundreds digit: Actions when the length is reached
182
0: Continue running
1: Shut down according to stopping mode
2: Loop length control
Thousands digit: Software reset length (could be cleared by communication)
0: No operation
1: The current length is cleared
2: The current length and total length both cleared
F13.13 tens digit determines the unit of length in F13.08, 0=m, 1=cm, 2=mm.
According to the process requirements to select different units can increase the
accuracy of fixed-length control.
F13.13 Hundreds digit determine the action of the drive when reach the length. 0
= Continue running, 1 = Shut down according to stopping mode, 2 = Loop length
control. When 2 is selected, the frequency will run for 0 frequency and continue
for the next fixed time after the time defined by F13.04. This function is effective
only when the frequency is the main auxiliary reference, for example jogging,
priority is invalid.
C
PLC, process PID. This function is only available when the reference of a higher
F13.13 Thousands digit: The upper computer can change the current length and
the cumulative length by changing thousands digit of F13.13. Note that F13.13
N
can not be wrongly modify the other bits, such as F13.13 units, tens, hundreds
were 1,1,0, then F13.13 should be set to 0x1110 or 0x2110.When the
multi-function input terminal No. 63 is valid, both the current length and the
accumulated length are cleared.
Units digit: 0、1
Record length at
E
F13.14 Tens digit: 0、1 011

shutdown
Hundreds digit: 0、1
Units digit: Stops the current length
0: Automatically cleared
The current record length is automatically cleared at shutdown.
1: Length is maintained
The current record length remains unchanged during shutdown.
Tens digit: Power-down length memory setting
0: Not stored
1: Stored
This digit controls the current length of the power-down storage feature, but
the cumulative length of the power-down will be stored.
Hundreds digit: length calculation at shutdown
0: The length is not calculated
1: Calculate the length
183
When this digit is 1, the length calculation module will automatically calculate the
length according to the external pulse when the inverter is shutdown.
7.15 Vector Control parameters Group: F14

F14.00 Speed/Torque control selection Range: 0,1 0
0: Speed control mode
1: Torque control mode (this parameter is effective when set F00.24 as 1 or
2).
When the control mode is vector control with PG or without PG, the user can
select torque control or speed control by setting the parameter of F14.00 or
through control multi-function terminal which selected as No.65 function.
Speed loop high speed Range:0.1～40.0(Valid when
F14.01 20.0
proportional Gain F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop high speed Range:0.001～10.000s(Valid
F14.02 0.040s
integral time when F00.24=1 or 2)
F14.03
F14.04
proportional Gain
C
Speed loop low speed Range:0.1～80.0(Valid when
F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop low speed Range:0.001～10.000s(Valid
integral time when F00.24=1 or 2)
Speed loop parameter Range:0.00Hz～20.00Hz(Valid
20.0
0.020s
N
F14.05 5.00Hz
switching frequency when F00.24=1 or 2)
Through F14.01 to F14.05, you can set the proportional gain and integral time of
Speed loop regulator, so as to change the speed response characteristic under
vector control mode.
The system dynamic response of speed loop can be faster if the proportional gain
E
is increased or the integral time is decreased. However, if the proportional gain is

too large or the integral time is too small, the system tends to oscillate.
The suggested adjusting way as below:
When the default parameter is not suitable, please fine adjust the parameters based
on the default value. Proportional gain is usually adjusted first. Under the
condition that the system is immune from oscillation, proportional gain can be
increased as big as possible. Then adjust integral time so that the system responds
fast and will not be over adjusted.
The above parameters are valid for Closed-loop or Open-loop speed control mode,
invalid for V/F control and torque control mode.
Stable coefficient of low Range: 0～50(Valid when
F14.06 25
frequency generating F00.24=1 or 2)
When the motor connected to frequency inverter under a low frequency
generating status, Please adjusting this parameter appropriately.
184
For example, the frequency inverter will be unstable when drives a potential load
which is declining gradually. Increasing F14.06 will improve the stability of the
system.
Current loop proportional Range: 1～500(Valid when

F14.07 70
gain F00.24=1 or 2)
Range: 0.1～100.0ms(Valid
F14.08 Current loop integral time 4.0ms
when F00.24=1 or 2)
F14.07 and F14.08 are the PI regulator parameters of Current loop.
The system torque dynamic response can be faster if the Current loop proportional
gain P is increased or Current loop integral time constant Ti is decreased.
The system stability can be improved if the Current loop proportional gain P is
decreased or integral time constant Ti is increased.
In general, the above parameters don’t need change.
Motor-driven torque Range: 0～250.0%(Valid when
F14.09 160.0%
current limit value F00.24=1 ,2 and 3)
F14.10
Braking torque C
current limit value
Range: 0～250.0%(Valid when
F00.24=1 or 2)
160.0%
It is the range of output torque of speed loop defined by the positive torque and
negative torque limit. When the application needs quick acceleration and
N
deceleration, this parameter can be appropriately increased to meet the specific
requirements. However, if it’s too large, the drive tends to over-current.
In torque control mode, the range of actual torque output is restricted to the above
limit too.
Asynchronous motor
Range: 20.0～100.0%(Valid
E
F14.11 flux-weakening control 80.0%

when F00.24=1 or 2)
coefficient
Asynchronous motor Range: 10.0～80.0%(Valid
F14.12 10.0%
Min. flux coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)
Parameters of F14.11, F14.12 Used to correcting the weakening curve in
weakening field. The correction of the curve will improve the precision of speed
control during weakening field. The minimum field reference is the minimum
value of weakening field. And F14.12 is just available for Closed-loop vector
control mode.
Range: Unit digit: 0～8
Torque reference and
F14.13 Tens digit :0～8 000
limit channel selection
Hundreds digit: 0～8
Units digit: Torque provision channel selection
0: Digital setting
1:AI1 analog provision(0-10V or 4-20mA corresponds to 0～200.0% Rated
torque current of the motor)
185

3: Terminal UP/DOWN adjusting
4:Communication provision(Communication address：1D01) . (0～10000
corresponds to 0～200.0% Rated torque current of the motor )
7: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
8: Terminal width provision (Please choose the related function of X8)
The range of the above channels which from the Min value to the Max value
corresponds to 0.0～200% Rated torque current of motor.
Tens digit: Electric torque limit channel selection
0: Digital setting (determined by F14.09)
4: Reserved C
N
(X8 terminals need to select the appropriate function)
Note: The maximum value of 1~ 8 channels corresponds to F14.09
Hundreds digit: Braking torque limit channel selection
E
0: Digital setting (Determined by F14.10)

4: Reserved
Note: The maximum value of 1 ~ 8 channels corresponds to F14.10
When the torque limit value is modified by communication, the torque channel
must be set to digital setting (Tens or hundreds digit are 0). Torque limitation can
186
be performed by directly modifying F14.09 or F14.10 by communication. The

shutdown and power-down storage function are affected by F01.03 and F01.05
when terminal UP / DOWN is adjusted. If stop is not restored and power-down is
saved, F01.03 = 3 and F01.05 = 00 need to be set.
F14.14 Torque polarity setting Range: 0000～2112 00
Unit digit: Polarity of Torque reference

0: Positive
1: Negative
2: Defined by running command. While F14.13=2，and the ten's place of
F00.20 equals 0，the torque direction is determined by the polarity of AI2.
Tens digit: Polarity of Torque compensation
0: Same direction with torque reference
1: Opposite direction with torque reference
Hundreds digit: F14.21 compensation weakened when the motor locked rotor
0: Invalid C
1: Enable. This function prevents belt slippage caused by low frequency
compensation F14.21 set too large or torque set too large and motor locked
rotor.
Thousands digit: Torque control anti-reverse function
N
0: Invalid
1: Anti-reverse function is active continuously
2: Anti-reversal function enabled at startup. Only the start-up moment has
anti-reverse function.
E
The units digit and the tens digit of F14.14 determine the polarity of the given and
compensated torque. When AI2, EAI1, and EAI2 are selected, AI2, EAI1, and
EAI2 are set to bipolar control. The given polarity of the torque is determined by
the corresponding analog polarity, but not by unit digit of F14.14. The torque
given direction can be dynamically switched by multi-function keys at the same
time. It’s available changing the direction of torque provision through
multi-function key.
Range:0.0～200.0%(Valid
F14.15 Torque digital setting value 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
When F14.13=0，the value of torque provision is set by F14.15. A 100.0% value
of F14.15 corresponds to the rated current of motor. The actual output torque will
be decreased when the motor under a weaken field status. When choosing digital
setting, press up and down keypad can revise the torque value.
Forward speed limit channel
F14.16 Range: 0～8 0
selection in torque control mode
187
0: Digital setting
4: Communication provision(Communication address: 1D0A).
When positive torque provided, if the load torque is smaller than the output
torque, the motor’s rotational speed will rise forward continuously to the forward
frequency limit defined by limit channel (F14.16),so as to avoiding runaway of
the motor.
Reverse frequency limit channel
F14.17 Range: 0～8 0
selection in torque control mode
0: Digital setting
C
N
4: Communication provision(Communication address: 1D0B).
E
When negative torque provided, if the load torque is smaller than the output
torque, the motor’s rotational speed will rise reverse continuously to the reverse
frequency limit defined by limit channel (F14.17),so as to avoiding runaway of
the motor.
Forward Speed
Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.18 limit in Torque 50.00Hz
freq.(Valid when F00.24=1 or 2)
control mode
Reverse Speed limit
Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.19 in Torque control 50.00Hz
freq.(Valid when F00.24=1 or 2)
mode
When F14.16=0，F14.17=0，the related limit frequency of the positive torque or
negative torque are confirmed by F14.18 and F14.19.
Acc and Dec time of Range: 0.000～60.000s Valid
F14.20 0.100s
torque provision when F00.24=1 or 2)
188
The torque provision from the provision channel will form the final torque
provision after the Acc and Dec time of F14.20.Suitable value of F14.20 can avoid
vibration of the motor which caused by saltation of torque provision.
Range: 0.0～100.0% Valid
F14.21 Torque compensation 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
Tens digit of F14.14 and F14.21 determine the torque compensation polarity and
offset. Normally, it is not necessary to set the torque compensation when the
torque loss due to the mechanical loss of the motor is large. When the set value is
100%, it corresponds to the rated torque current of the motor. When the reference
torque is less than 1.1% of rated torque, the torque compensation value defined in
F14.21 is invalid.
Positive torque gain Range: 50.0～150.0% Valid
F14.22 100.0%
regulation coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)
Negative torque gain Range: 50.0～150.0% Valid
F14.23 100.0%
regulation coefficient when F00.24=1 or 2)
When choosing positive torque provision, adjusting F14.22 will correct the
unmatched.
C
matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are
When choosing negative torque provision, adjusting F14.23 will correct the
matching of the actual output torque and the torque provision if they are
N
unmatched.
Range: 0.0～300.0% (Valid
F14.24 Flux braking coefficient 0.0%
when F00.24=1 or 2)
Under open-loop and closed-loop speed control mode, increasing the strength of
the field can realize fast decreasing of the motor when stop. The energy generated
E
during the field braking process will be consumed in a form of heat inside of the
motor. As a result, the temperature of motor inside will increase when field
braking frequently. Please care about the temperature of the motor not over the
allowed maximum value. If an operation command be given during the process of
field braking, the field braking function will be canceled and the frequency
inverter will operate to the set frequency again. Please disable the field braking
function when using braking resistor.
Pre-excitation start-up Range: 0.1～3.0(Valid when
F14.25 0.5
time constant F00.24=1)
In SVC control mode, decrease the value of F14.25 appropriately will decrease
the start time of the motor, realizing fast start performance.
Speed loop proportional Range: 0.010～6.000(Valid
F14.26 0.500
gain when F00.24=3)
Speed loop integral time Range: 0.010～9.999(Valid
F14.27 0.360
constant when F00.24=3)
189
Adjusting F14.26 and F14.27 will change the responsive characteristic of Vector
control.
Motor stabilization Range: 10～300(Valid when
F14.28 100
coefficient F00.24=3)
When the motor which connected to the drive is vibration and not stable,
increasing F14.28 will get rid of the vibration.
Compensation gain of Range: 100.0～130.0%(Valid
F14.29 100.0%
vibration restrain when F00.24=3)
The compensation is 0 when F14.29=100%.Large enough of this value will lead
to over-current when start operation.
Torque compensation Range: 0.00Hz～Upper limit
F14.30 20.00Hz
limit frequency Freq(Valid when F00.24=1,2)
When the output frequency is bigger than the value of F14.30, the torque
compensation defined by F14.21 is 0.And the actual torque compensation will
linear decrease from 0Hz to the frequency of F14.30.
7.16 Motor parameters Group: F15
F15.00 Reserved
Asynchronous motor
C Depend on
N
F15.01 Range: 0.1～6553.5KW
rated power type
Asynchronous motor Depend on
F15.02 Range: 1～690V
rated voltage type
F15.03 Range: 0.1～6553.5A
rated current type
E

F15.04 Range: 0.00～600.00Hz
rated frequency type
F15.05 Range: 0～60000r/min
rated rotational speed type
Asynchronous motor
F15.06 Range: 1～7 2
Poles No.
Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V/F
control mode or vector control mode is adopted, otherwise it may be abnormal.
To achieve better V/F or vector control performance, motor auto-tuning is
required.
The motor auto-tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor
nameplate parameters.
Range: 0.001～65.535Ω(AC
Asynchronous drive power＜7.5KW) Depend on
F15.07 motor Stator
Range: 0.0001～6.5535Ω(Ac type
resistance
drive power≥7.5KW)
190
Range: 0.001～65.535Ω(AC
F15.08 motor Rotor
Range: 0.0001～6.5535Ω(Ac type
resistance
Range: 0.01～655.35mH(AC
F15.09 motor leakage
Range: 0.001～65.535mH (AC type
inductance
Range: 0.1～6553.5mH (AC
F15.10 motor mutual
Range: 0.01～655.35mH (AC type
inductance
Asynchronous
Depend on
F15.11 motor no-load Range: 0.01～655.35A
type
current
C
F15.07～F15.11 is the characteristic parameters of asynchronous motor, not
display on the nameplate, which need detected by auto-tuning. To achieved a
good control performance, please let the motor unload before start rotating
auto-tuning. For the asynchronous motor that cannot be disconnected from the
N
load, you can choose static auto-tuning or input the motor parameters manually.
Another way is just set F15.01 and used the default parameters in F15.01～
F15.11.Meantime,Choosing different type of G and P will also change the default
parameters in F15.01～F15.11.
F15.12
E
～ Reserved
F15.18
F15.19 Motor parameter auto-tuning selection Range: 0～3 0

0: No action
1: Static auto-tuning
It is applied to applications where the motor cannot be disconnected from the load
or the process is complicated. Values on the motor’s nameplate should be input
correctly before staring auto-tuning(F15.01-F15.06),Set F15.11 as 1 and
press ,back to monitoring mode, then press to start auto-tuning
which with a “tune” symbol on the keyboard.
After auto-tuning, the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected
values of the stator’s resistance, rotor’s resistance and the leakage inductance will
be saved in F15.07-F15.09.
191
In static auto-tuning mode, the value of No-load current and mutual inductive
reactance will not be detected. The user can input the related values with the
reference of the Motor factory data or the data on the motor test report. Without
related value, please adopt the Default value. Otherwise it may cause negative
influence on the performance of motor.
During the process of auto-tuning, any abnormal please press to stop
auto-tuning.
2: Rotating auto-tuning of Asynchronous motor
Rotating auto-tuning function is suitable for the applications which the load of
motor is lighter than 30% of the rated load or some kind of small inertia load.
Please try your best to disconnect the load of your motor and make the motor in
static or unload state so that auto-tuning the value of motor exactly.
Values on the motor’s nameplate should be input correctly before staring
auto-tuning(F15.01-F15.06),Set F15.19 as 2 and press ,back to monitoring
mode, then press to start auto-tuning which with a “tune” symbol on the
C
keyboard. When rotation setting after the motor line is connected, the motor runs
in the wrong direction (Negative for the device or the load is larger in the current
direction). You can set F01.16 hundreds digit to 1running reverse direction
rotation tuning. The F01.16 settings need to be manually restored after setting.
N
After auto-tuning, the Drive will exit process automatically and the detected
values of the stator’s resistance, rotor’s resistance, the leakage inductance,
No-load current and mutual inductive reactance will be saved in F15.07-F15.11.
During the process of auto-tuning, any abnormal please press to stop
auto-tuning.
E
3: Reserved
F15.20
～ Reserved
F15.22
7.17 Closed-loop encoder parameters Group: F16

F16.00 Zero-speed servo enabled Range:0,1 0
Zero-speed servo enabled
0：Zero-speed servo is invalid
1：Zero-speed servo is valid
While F16.00=1 or the terminal function 67 is valid, under the circumstance that
there is no run command and the motor speed is less than the lower limit F01.12,
the inverter is on the zero-speed control .
192
F16.01 Encoder line number Range: 0～10000 1024

This parameter should be set as same as the value of encoder installed on the axis
of motor, or it will lead to an offset between the monitor speed and the actual
speed of the motor.
Range: units digit:0,1
F16.02 Direction of encoder 00
tens digit:0～3
Units digit: Phase sequence of AB phase
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens digit: Set of point positioning and seeking position direction
0: Seeking position according to command direction.
1: Seeking position according to forward direction.
2: Seeking position according to reverse direction.
3: Seeking position according to random direction.
The above parameters define the Encoder pulses per revolution and AB phase
C
sequence of encoder, wrong phase sequence will lead to over-current alarm of the
drive.
Encoder fractional frequency
F16.03 coefficient Range: 0.001～60.000 1.000
N
This parameter can correct the actual speed of the motor when the encoder not
installed on the axis of motor.
For example, when the encoder installed on a reduction gears with a 10:1 ratio,
you should set F16.02 as 10.000 so that get a correct feedback of actual motor
speed.
E
Because of encoder usually install on the axis of motor in closed-loop vector

control mode, so there is no need setting this parameters in this mode.
F16.04 Encoder filtering coefficient Range: 5～100 15
In some occasion with strong interference, increasing the value of F16.04 properly
will weaken the vibration of the motor which because of the interference of the
encoder signal. Meantime, a too big and too small value of F16.04 will lead to the
vibration of the system.
Except for correct setting of F16 parameters Group, Correct

setting of F00.19 is also needed for a normal Closed-loop vector
Note control.
193
F16.05 Position control mode Range: 0～4 0

0:Position control is invalid。
1:Point positioning mode。
2:Recovery point positioning mode
3～4:Reserved
While F16.05=1 ， No.66 multi-function input terminal is valid, inverter is
positioned on the angle defined by F16.12 according to the position seeking mode
defined by the ten's place of F16.02. Under the mode of point positioning, if
losing the Z pulse, the inverter will alarm fault of E-40 (Z pulse losing)
While F16.05=2，No.69 multi-function input terminal is valid, under the non-jog
running command, the motor will run to the original location recorded by system,
the original location can be determined by the terminal function 68 or the first
power on.
Position control maximum
F16.06 Range: 0.01～100.00Hz 30.00Hz
frequency
F16.07
Position control minimum
frequency
C Range: 0.01～5.00Hz
Parameter of F16.06, F16.07 are not limited by F01.11, F01.12, F01.13.
F16.08
Creeping afterpulse count
before finishing the position
Range:0～60000
0.01Hz
30
N
Under the set of positioning control for the parameter, it is the pulse count that the
motor creeps at frequency of F16.07.
The parameter setting should be reasonable, if the setting value is too low, the
final positioning may overshoot, sequentially affect the ultimate positioning
E
precision; if the setting value is too high, the final positioning may switch from
the higher output frequency to the creeping frequency, sequentially cause the
vibration for motor and machine system. When the inertia is high but friction is
low, the setting value should be increased.
减速终了前脉冲数
Pulse count before deceleration end
t
目标值点
Target value point
Fig. 7-44 Afterpulse when deceleration is over at positioning
194
Positioning reaches to the

F16.09 Range:1～255 2
pulse range
The parameter is set as the positioning control, the positioning reaches within the
permissible error range of position to target setting value. If set F16.09=2，within
the ±2 pulses range of target position, it defaults the position has reached, see the
Fig. 7-45 Then terminal Y can output position reaching signal.
PSG
在此范围内，认为定位到达
Deem positioning reaches under this range
-A POS reaching +A
POS到达 t
time
时间点point
C
Fig. 7-45 Positioning reaches to the setting range
F16.10 Position control gain Range:1～5000
The bigger this parameter，the faster the location responds, but too higher setting
value may cause the system oscillation.
200
N
F16.11 PSG alteration point Range:0.01～30.00Hz 5.00Hz
The smaller this parameter, the faster the location responds, but too lower setting
value may cause the system oscillation.
Point positioning relative
F16.12 Range:0.00～360.00 degree 0.00
E
to Z-axis angle
Positioning control
F16.13 acceleration-deceleration Range:1～60000 200
time
The bigger this parameter，the faster the location responds, but too higher setting
value may cause the system oscillation. The unit of time is determined by the
F01.19, the factory default of F16.13 is 20.0s.
7.18 Reserved parameters Group1:F17

F17.00
～ Reserved
F17.20
195
7.19 Enhanced Control Functions Parameters Group: F18

Operation panel control
F18.00 Range: 0～15 0
frequency binding
F18.00 can bundle operation panel with frequency reference channels, to achieve
synchronous switching.
0: No bundling
1: Keyboard digital provision
4: Terminal UP/DOWN adjust setting
5: Communication provision (MODBUS and FieldBus used a same
storage registers)
8: High speed Pulse provision (Please choose the corresponding functions
of X8) C
9: Terminal pulse-width provision (Please choose the corresponding
functions of X8)
10: Terminal encoder provision (Defined by X1 and X2)
N
11～15:Reserved
Different control command channels can be bundled to the same frequency
reference channel. After success bundled, the bundled frequency reference
channel have a highest priority and just available for Main frequency bundling.
Terminal control frequency
F18.01 Range: 0～15 0
E
binding
Please refer to the description of F18.00
Communication control
F18.02 Range: 0～15 0
frequency binding
Please refer to the description of F18.00
Digital frequency integral tens digit: 0,1
F18.03 0000
function selection hundreds digit: 0、1
Units digit: Keyboard UP/DOWN Integration control
0: Integral function enabled
1: Integral function disabled
Tens digit: Terminal UP/DOWN Integration control
0: Integral function enabled
1: Integral function disabled
196
Hundreds digit: Keyboard shuttle knob enable (shuttle keyboard effective)

0: The shuttle knob is valid in the monitoring interface
1: The shuttle knob is invalid in the monitoring interface
This function should cooperate with 16 and 17 functions of multi-function
terminal.
Thousands digit: keypad adjustment of frequency classic mode selection
0: invalid
1: valid, adjustment range decided by F18.05
Keyboard UP/DOWN
F18.04 Range: 0.01～50.00Hz 0.10Hz
integral rate
When the keyboard UP/DOWN Integration is enabled, if keep adjusting the
frequency in the same direction, the Integration effect will be effective, and the
Integration rate is determined by F18.04.
This function is suitable for the applications that need adjusting frequency
quickly.
Keyboard no integral single
F18.05 Range: 0.01～10.00Hz 0.01Hz
step’s size setup
F18.06
Integral rate
C
When the keyboard UP/DOWN integral function disabled, the rate of adjusting
frequency fixed by the value of F18.05.
Terminal UP/DOWN
Range: 0.01～50.00Hz 0.20Hz
N
Terminal no integral single
F18.07 Range: 0.01～10.00Hz 0.10Hz
step’s size setup
Please refer to the functions of F18.04 and F18.05 for the functions of F18.06 and
F18.07.
F18.08 Droop control decline frequency Range: 0.00～10.00Hz 0.00Hz
E
When several drivers drive one load, the function can make the drives share the
load equally. When the load of one drive is heavier, the drive will reduce its
output frequency to shed part of the load.
This function is suitable for the share of several motors which with a common
load. The value of F18.08 is the maximum reduced frequency when the drive
reaches the rated power.
F18.09 Setup accumulate power on time Range: 0～65535h 0
F18.10 Setup accumulate run time Range: 0～65535h 0
When the actual accumulate operation time reach to the set accumulated operation
time (F18.10), the drive will output an indication signal. Please refer to the
description of F09.00～F09.03.
F18.09 defined the expected accumulated time of power on from Ex factory.
Power-on time and accumulated run time can be checked by

Note monitoring parameters group C.
197
F18.11 Timing run function enable Range: 0,1 0

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
F18.12 Timing run stop time Range: 0.1～6500.0Min 2.0Min
When F18.11 Timing operation function enabled, the driver will start the timer
with inverter start.
The drive will stop automatically and the multi-function Yi (Set Yi as the 33
function) will output an indicator signal when reach to the set stop time.
The timer of inverter start form 0 every times, the user can
monitor the current operation time through the F0 Group.
Note
F18.13 Currently run arrival time Range: 0.0～6500.0Min 1.0Min

When the actual operation time reach to this time, the multi-function Yi (choose
reached”.
F18.14
under monitor mode
C
Yi as 34 function) will output an indicator signal of “Currently operation time
Keyboard UP/DOWN selection

Range: 0～6
0: Keyboard frequency provision frequency adjusting
0
N
1: PID digital reference value adjusting
2～6:Reserved
When F18.14 =1, UP/DOWN is used to adjust the PID digital reference value in
Monitor Mode merely.
When F18.14 =0, UP/DOWN is used to adjust the frequency value not only in
E
Monitor Mode when choose frequency digital reference channel.

V/F vibration restrain end Range: 0.00Hz～upper
F18.15 50.00Hz
frequency limit frequency
In V/F Control mode, when the output frequency of inverter is bigger than the
limit frequency，the suppression of F03.12 will be disabled. Adjusting F18.15 can
restrain the shake phenomenon of motor in a large range.
Range: Unit digit: 0、1
Tens digit: 0、1
Advanced control Hundreds digit: 0、1
F18.16 0001
functions Thousands digit: 0、1
(This parameter is valid when F00.24
= 1 or 2)
When F18.16 tens digit is 0, the torque limit is set according to the rated current
of the inverter. When this bit is 1, it is limited according to the rated torque
current of the motor. Take the electric torque as an example: F14.13 tens digit = 1
198
(AI1 given), F14.09 = 150.0%, inverter rated current In = 100A, motor rated
current Im (F15.01) = 90, motor no-load current Io (F15.11) = 30A. When unit
digit of F18.16=0, AI1 maximum, the maximum output current of the inverter =
In * F14.09 = 150A.When unit digit of F18.16=1, AI1 maximum, the maximum
output current of the inverter=Sqrt ((F14.09 × Sqrt (Im ×Im-Io × Io)) 2 + Io2) =
130A.
When hundreds digit of F18.16 is 1, enable below the lower limit frequency fast
traverse function. When a hoist load occurs when the hook phenomenon, you can
open this function, and appropriately improve the F01.12 parameters, can
effectively solve this problem.
When thousands digit of F18.16 is 1, the PWM will be blocked when the torque is
less than 1.1% and the motor speed is less than 2Hz in no speed torque control
mode, and the motor is in the free state. This function is valid when F00.24 = 1.
Cooling fan control Range: units digit: 0～2
F18.17 00
selection tens digit: 0,1
0:Smart fan
C
Units digit:fan control mode
1:Inverter is running all the time after power on

2:No running for fan, but it starts automatically when the temperature is
N
higher than 75 degree.
Tens digit:Speed regulation fan control mode.
0:Smart PWM Speed regulation
1:Running at highest speed.
Under the smart control, after stopping the inverter, if the detection temperature is
E
lower than 35 degree, the fan stop running automatically in 20s.
F18.18 No speed vector slip gain Range: 50%～200% 100%

For speed sensorless vector control (F00.24 = 1), this parameter is used to adjust
the speed accuracy of the motor: when the speed of the motor is low, the
parameter is increased and vice versa.
Low-order of total power
F18.19 Range: 0～9999 0
consumption
High-order of total power
F18.20 Range: 0～65535 0
consumption
Correction factor of power
F18.21 Range: 50.0%～200.0% 100.0%
consumption calculation
F18.19 and F18.20 show the total amount of power consumed by the load and the
inverter. Similarly, C-x can be set to 59 and 60 to monitor the amount of power
consumption by the keyboard. Where F18.20 parameter minimum unit represents
199
10000KWH, for example F18.19 = 1000, F18.20 = 4, the total power

consumption = 4 × 10000 + 1000 = 41000KWH.
Users can also set F18.19 and F18.20 to 0 to restart the calculation of the power
consumption; if the calculated power consumption are not correct, the F18.21
parameter can be adjusted, so that the calculated power consumption correspond
to actual consumption.
V/F separate control voltage
F18.22 Range:0～8 1
reference channel.
0: Digital setting (determined by 18.23)
4: Reserved
7: High-speed pulse setting C
N
Note: The maximum value of 0 ~ 8 channels correspond to the motor rated
voltage
When F03.00 = 5, and F00.24 = 0, then running VF separation control. The
frequency is given by the original way, the voltage is determined by the F18.22,
you can choose digital set, analog set, the terminal UP / DOWN set, etc., can also
E
be directly modified by communication F18.23 to achieve communication set.

General induction heating, inverter power, torque motor could be controlled by
this way.
V/F separate control
F18.23 Range: 0.0%～100.0% 0.0%
voltage digital reference
V/F separate control voltage digital reference. 100.0% corresponds to the rated
voltage of the motor.
F18.24 Low frequency slip gain Range: 30～300% 1%
This parameter when F00.24=1 valid, properly to adjust the parameter to improve
the precision of low frequency rotation speed.
200
7.20 Protective Relevant Function Parameters Group:F19

Range: 0.0～20.0s
Power off restart waiting
F19.00 (0 indicates disabled this 0.0s
time
function）
When the power is off, then power-on, whether this inverter will start
automatically after a waiting time.
When F19.00=0.0s, after the power off then power-on, inverter will not start
automatic. F19.00≠0.0s, after the power off then power-on again, if all is ready,
inverter will run automatically with the start method defined by F02.00 after
waiting the time defined by F19.00.
Conditions for repower-on after power-off: it should be in the
running status before power-off; there’s no fault and running signal
maintained when power-on again; there’s no other factors which
Note
affect normal starting.
F19.02
C
F19.01 Fault self-recovery times
Fault self-recovery interval

time
Range: 0～10
(0 indicates no self-recovery
function)
Range: 0.5～20.0s
0
5.0s
N
When the inverter is running, because of fluctuation of load, faults may happen in
some case and it will top to output. In order not to stop the operation of equipment,
choosing the recovery functions No alarm, stop in stopping mode. Inverter will
recovery to run with speed-checking restart style, within the setting time, if inverter
E
cannot run, then fault protection will begin, stop running. No alarm, when the self
recovery times of fault are set to 0, self recovery function stops.
1. When using fault self recovery function, and make sure the
equipment is permitted and inverter do not enter fault.
2.Self recovery function is not effective on fault Protection caused by
! power-on terminal protection, clock fault, overload and over-heated,
output short-circuit, short circuit to ground ,and lack-voltage during
running.
3. When F19.00≠0,open stop and restart function. We can start this
equipment without operators, so be careful to use this function.
Motor overload protection

F19.03 Range: 0～2 2
action selection
When the AC motors is overloaded , this mode of Protection will happen.
201
0: Alarm, continue operation; It happens with only warning, no motor

overload Protection characteristic (used cautiously, at this time, inverter has
nothing to do with load motor for overload protection;
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode;
2: Fault, Free stop. When it is overloaded , the output of inverter is block ,
this AC motor free stop .
Motor overload protection Range: 10.0～2000.0%
F19.04 100.0%
coefficient （Motor rated current）
To protect the loading motors with different types from overloading effectively,
make sure that the parameter F15.03 (motor rated current) is set according to the
motor nameplate.
The motor overloading time can be adjusted by adjusting F19.04, As shown in
Fig.7-46, when the output current of motor equals 150% of motor's rated current,
and continues for the time determined by 4min*F19.04, then alarm for motor
overloading protection. If F19.04=120.0% ， then the overloading time is
过载时间
Overloading time
80min
C
4min*120.0%=4.8min. The minimum overloading time of motor is 5s.
N
40min
15min
6min
E
4min
2.5min
2min
90s
60s
20s
115% 125% 135% 145% 155% 165% 175% 185% 195% 230% Rated
电机额定 current
percentage
电流百分比 of motor
Fig.7-46 Electronic thermal relay protection

This adjustable value can base on the user’s setting. In the same condition, if the
AC motor is overloaded and need the fast protection, then decrease F19.04, or else
increase.
Inverter overload pre-alarm
F19.05 Range: 0,1 0
detection selection
0: Detection all the time. during the working process of inverter , it still
work after detecting overload situation.
1: Enable only constant speed detection. Only the inverter work in a
constant speed mode, it still works after detecting overload situation.
202
Inverter overload pre-alarm Range: 20～180%

F19.06 130%
detection level (Inverter rated current)
Inverter overload pre-alarm
F19.07 Range: 0.0～20.0s 5.0s
delay time
If output current higher parameter F19.06,the set electrical level will go though
delay time of F19.07,open collector will output enabled signal (please refer to
fig7-47 and parameter list F09.00~F09.03).
Warning level Output current

(F19.06)
Yi
valid valid
Motor underload
C
F19.07 F19.07
Fig.7-47 Overload alarm

Range: 0.0～120.0%
Time
N
F19.08 50.0%
alarm detection level (Motor rated current）
Motor underload
F19.09 Range：0.1～60.0s 2.0s
alarm detection time
The output current Inverter will lower than Underload alarm detection level
F19.08 (definite the value, comparing to motor rating current ) , and the last time
E
will over motor underload alarm detection level time F19.09,then Yi will output
underload alarm Signal .
Motor underload Range: units digit: 0～2
F19.10 00
alarm detection action tens digit: 0～2
Units digit: detection selection.
0: No detection.
1: The operation has been detected all the time. This detection is enabled
during the running process of inverter.
2: Detect in constant speed mode only. This detection is enabled during the
constant speed mode only.
Tens digit: action selection.
0: when it’s in alarm, continue operation. inverter will only warn when
detecting motor is underload alarm
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, Free stop .The inverter will detect motor is in underload alarm, and
203
it will lock PWM output, the motor will stop with free rotation.
Input & output phase loss,
tens digit: 0,1
F19.11 short circuit detection 1111
hundreds digit: 0,1
action
Units digit: input phase failure protect
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect that the input is lacked one phase,
alarm in input lacked, alarm, and free stop.
Tens digit: output phase failure protection
0 : No detection.
1:Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect that the output is lacked one phase,
alarm in input lacked, then Free stop.
Hundreds digit: power-on will detect Short circuit protection.
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop. When inverter is power-on, the output to earth is
C
short-circuiting. At this time, the fault of short-circuiting to earth while power on
is alarmed, the inverter freely stops.
mode.
Thousands digit: The detection to earth Short circuit protection in the running
N
0: No detection.
1: Fault, Free stop. When inverter is power-on, the output to earth is
short-circuiting during the running process. At this time, the fault of
short-circuiting to earth while running is alarmed, the inverter freely stops.
E
F19.12 Overvoltage stall selection Range: 0,1 1

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled
Overvoltage stall protection
F19.13 Range: 100～150% 125%
voltage
During deceleration, the motor’s decelerate rate may be lower than that of drive’s
output frequency due to the load inertia. At this time, the motor will feed the
energy back to the drive, resulting in the voltage rise on the drive's DC bus. If no
measures taken, the drive will trip due to over voltage.
During the deceleration, the drive detects the bus voltage and compares it with the
over voltage point at stall defined by F19.13. If the bus voltage exceeds the stall
over-voltage point, the output frequency of the inverter will stop decreasing.
When the bus voltage become lower than the point, then run slowly, as shown in
Fig. 7-48.
204
Overvoltage
point at stall
Time
Output freq.
Time
Fig. 7-48 Over-voltage at stall
Automatic current limit
F19.14 Range: 50～230% 170%
level
Frequency decline rate of
F19.15 Range: 0.00～99.99Hz/s 10.00Hz/s
automatic current limit
Automatic current limit
F19.16
action selection
0: Constant speed disabled.
1: Constant speed enabled.
C Range: 0,1 0
Auto current limiting function is used to limit the load current smaller than the
N
value defined by F19.14 in real time. Therefore the drive will not trip due to surge
over-current. This function is especially useful for the applications with big load
inertia or big change of load.
F19.14 defines the threshold of auto current limiting. It is a percentage of the
drive’s rated current.
E
F19.15 defines the decrease rate of output frequency when the drive is in auto
current limiting status.
If F19.15 is set too small, overload fault may occur. If it is set too big, the
frequency will change too sharply and therefore, the drive may be in generating
status for longtime, which may result in overvoltage protection.
Auto current limiting function is always active in Acc or Dec process. Whether
the function is active in constant speed operating process is decided by F19.16.
F19.16=0 Auto current limiting function is disabled inconstant speed operating
process;
F19.16=1 Auto current limiting function is enabled inconstant speed operating
process;
In auto current limiting process, the drive’s output frequency may change;
therefore, it is recommended not to enable the function when the drive’s output
frequency is required stable.
205
F19.17 Rapid current-limiting coefficient Range: 150%～250% 230%

The rapid current limit function can reduce the AC drive's over-current faults at
maximum, guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the AC drive. If the AC drive is
in a rapid current limit state for a long time, the AC drive may be overheated or
overloaded for further protection.
The lower the setting of the F19.17, the more sensitive the rapid current limit is.
When the F19.17 equals 250%, the rapid current limit function is invalid.
Motor run section selection
F19.18 Range: 0,1 0
0: disabled
1: enabled
Frequency droop rate when
F19.19 Range: 0.00～99.99Hz/s 10.00Hz/s
instant power off
Voltage rebound estimate
F19.20 Range: 0.00～10.00s 0.10s
time when instant power off
F19.21
F19.22
Action estimate voltage
C
Allowed the longest off time
Range: 60～100%
Range: 0.30～5.00s
80%
2.00s
N
Bus voltage
F19.20
F19.21
E
Time
Run freq.
Deceleration Acceleration Time

time time
Run freq
F19.22 Time
Fig 7-49 AC drive action diagram upon instantaneous power failure
206
Upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the DC bus voltage of
the AC drive reduces. This function enables the AC drive to compensate the DC
bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output
frequency so as to keep the AC drive running continuously.
If F19.18 = 1, upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the AC
drive decelerates. Once the bus voltage resumes to normal, the AC drive
accelerates to the set frequency. If the bus voltage remains normal for the time
exceeding the value set inF19.20, it is considered that the bus voltage resumes to
normal.
When instantaneous power failure happens, if the time is exceed the time of
F19.22 definite, inverter No alarm, stop in stopping mode Free stop.
Terminal external device
F19.23 Range: 0～2 2
fault action selection
0: Alarm, continue operation .When inverter checked that Terminal of the
external is no alarm, stop in stopping mode enabled, it will alarm, then run
C
continue. Under this mode, the inverter will do nothing with Terminal of the
external in No alarm, stop in stopping mode, so please cautiously use.
1: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode. When Inverter detect terminal
outside fault is enabled, alarm, and then press Stop in stopping mode.
N
2: Fault, Free stop .When inverter detect terminal external fault is enabled,
alarm for external equipment fault, and free stop.
Power on terminal protection
F19.24 Range: 0,1 0
selection
0: Disabled.
E
1: Enabled.
When setting power down and then restart function is enabled, this function is
disabled. When the running command channel is terminal command, and when
power-on and detection run the command is enabled, it will get terminal
protection with faults, this function only is enabled for terminal FWD/REV
function.
F19.25 Provide lost detection value Range: 0～100% 0%
F19.26 Provide lost detection time Range: 0.0～500.0s 0.5s
When setting PID is lower than F19.25 definition continuous(setting the Max. as
base), and the constant time is over than the time that F19.26 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost, inverter will run base on F19.31 Units place set.PID
loss detection show on fig 7-50.
F19.27 Feedback lost detection value Range: 0～100% 12%
F19.28 Feedback lost detection time Range: 0.0～500.0s 0.5s
207
When the feedback value of PID is lower than F19.27 definite(setting the input as
base, and the constant time is over than the time that F19.28 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost.
Inverter will run base on F19.31 Tens place set.PID loss detection show on fig
7-50.
Deviation magnitude
F19.29 Range: 0～100% 50%
abnormal detection value
Deviation magnitude
F19.30 Range: 0.0～500.0s 0.5s
abnormal detection time
When the Error amount of PID is higher than F19.29 definite(setting the input as
base, and the constant time is over than the time that F19.30 definition detected,
then PID setting will lost. inverter will run base on F19.31 hundred’s place
set.PID loss detection show on fig 7-50.
Close loop value
(setting, feedback, error value)
The detection
value
C
N
Less than detection time No detection more than detection time
No alarm when detection Failure alarm when detection
E
Time
Fig. 7-50 Closed loop detection timing diagram

Protection action
F19.31 tens digit: 0~3 000
selection 1
hundreds digit: 0~3
This parameter definite the Internal PID controls the action selection of the setting
loss and the fault Error amount. When it’s set as 0 OR 1, inverter will have no
response. And with no protection selection, users should set this parameter basing
on the actual applications.
Units digit: setting PID lost motion detection.
0: no detection.
1: Alarm, continue operation
3: Fault, Free stop.
Tens digit: PID feedback for lost motion detection.
208
0: no detection.
1: Alarm, continue operation.
2: Alarm, Stop according to the stop mode.
Hundreds digit: The amount of error fault for PID detection operation
0: no detection.

Protection action tens digit: 0~2
F19.32 1200
selection 2 hundreds digit: 0~2
This parameter definite the communication fault, E2PROM fault, Contactor fault
C
and lack-voltage when it’s in No alarm, stop in stopping mode for the action
selection of inverter. When it’s set as 0, during the fault situation, inverter will
only alarm. And with no protection selection, users should set this parameter
basing on the actual applications.
N
Units digit: communication fault action, including communication replay and
fault.
2: Fault, free stop .
E
Tens digit: E2PROM fault action selection.

1: Alarm, stop according to the stop mode
2: Fault, free stop.
Hundreds digit: Contactor fault action selection.
1: Alarm, stop according to the stop mode
Thousands digit: running lack-Voltage fault display action selection.
0: no detection.
F19.33 Reserved
F19.34 Reserved
209
Fault indication and clock Range: units digit: 0,1

F19.35 00
during the period of recovery tens digit: 0,1
Units digit: During automatic reset of fault display selection.
0: Action. During automatic reset, Yi and Relay of will update display the
Signal based on the internal state.
1: No action. During automatic reset, Yi and Relay display Signal No action.
Tens digit: Lock function selection, to realize display before power-off.
0: disabled.
1: enabled. When this function is enabled, if the inverter shows the fault
before the last time power down, then the inverter will display the fault last time
fault state, make sure that users will know about the inverter’s potential faults.
Continuous run frequency
F19.36 Range: 0～3 0
selection when alarm
This parameter defines the run frequency when users choose “Alarm, continues to
run” for the inverter’s failure.
C
0: running at the current setting frequency.
1: running at the upper limiting frequency.
2: running at the lower limit frequency.
3: running at the fault Alternate frequency.
Abnormal standby Range: 0.00Hz~upper limit
N
F19.37 10.00Hz
frequency frequency
This parameter definite the alternative running frequency when inverter fault ,
user can use it along with parameterF19.36.
Disconnection testing Range: 0.0～8.0s
F19.38 0.0s
time of encoder (No detection while at 0）
E
When the inverter runs with the closed-loop vector mode，the detection starts
while the run frequency is higher than 1Hz, when the A,B-phase signal of the
encoder continues for the time set in F19.38, and no feedback has been received,
then the inverter alarms the fault of E-37 and freely stop.
Overspeed detection Range: 0.0～120.0%
F19.39 120.0%
value (equals upper limit frequency)
Overspeed detection Range: 0.00～20.00s
F19.40 0.00s
time (no detection while at 0)
Under the open-loop or the closed-loop vector mode, when it was detected that the
motor rotational speed is higher than the setting value of F19.39, and after the
continue time of F19.40’s setting value, the inverter alarms fault of E-38 and
freely stop. No detection when F19.40 equals 0, but detection is still available
when F19.39 equals 0.
210
Detection value of too Range: 0.0～50.0%

F19.41 10.0%
large speed deviation (equals upper limit frequency)
Detection time of too Range: 0.00～20.00s
F19.42 0.00s
large speed deviation （no detection while at 0）
Under the open-loop or the closed-loop vector running mode, when it was
detected that the difference of motor rotational speed and setting rotational speed
equals the setting value of F19.41, and after the continue time of F19.42’s setting
value, the inverter alarms fault of E-39 and freely stop. No detection when F19.42
equals 0, but detection is still available when F19.41 equals 0.
Overvoltage suppression
F19.43 Range: 0.0～100.0% 90.0%
coefficient
The bigger value of F19.43, the more obvious the suppression will be, but the load
response will be slow, the parameter is available when F00.24=1 or 2.
When the load fluctuation is strong, the devices like crusher, punch, pipe file
the parameter is needed.

F19.44 Reserved
C
machine and the equipment with clutch will be over-voltage easily, so increasing
N
E
211
7.21 Internal Virtual Input Output Node Parameter Group: F20

F20.00 Virtual input VDI1 function selection Range: 0～90 0
VDI1 to VDI5 have the same functions as Xi terminals on the control board and
can be used for digital input. For more details, see description of F08.18 to F08.25.
The realization of the function set by internal virtual terminal must be based on
the available terminal function.
F20.05 Virtual output VDO1 function selection Range: 0～60 0
F20.06 Virtual output VDO2 function selection Range: 0～60 0
C
F20.07 Virtual output VDO3 function selection
Range: 0～60
Range: 0～60
Range: 0～60
0
0
0
N
VDO functions are similar to the Yi functions on the control board. The VDO can
be used together with VDIx to implement some simple logic control.
If VDO function is set to non-0, the function setting and use of VDOx are the
same as the output of parameter of Yi. Please refer to descriptions in group F09.
Virtual output VDO1 open
F20.10 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
E
delay time
F20.11 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.12 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.13 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.14 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
Virtual output VDO1 close
F20.15 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.16 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.17 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.18 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
212

F20.19 Range: 0.00～600.00s 0.00s
delay time
F20.10~ F20.19 definite the time of open up and shut down terminal
VDO1~VDO5 definite is the delay time of internal level from open up to shut
down.
F20.20 Virtual input VDI enable control Range: 00～FF 00
Parameter F20.20 is to control VDI1~VDI5 is enable. F20.20(BIT0-BIT4) is
according to the enable unit VDI1~VDI5,0 stands for disabled , 1 stands for
enable. The relations are below:
tens units
BIT0: VDI1 enable control unit
C BIT0:VDI5 enable control unit
F20.21 Virtual input VDI status digital setup Range: 00～FF 00

Virtual input terminal VDI state is determined by the VDI F20.21 definite virtual
N
input VDI state Digital and virtual output terminal VDO state, the relation
between them is logical OR.
Parameter F20.21 BIT0-BIT4 is according to VDI1-VDI5 state, 0 stands for
disabled state, 1 stands for enabled state.
E
F20.22 Virtual input: output connection Range: 00～FF 00

Bit0 : The connection of VDI1 and VDO1
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
213
0 : positive logic.
1 : negative logic.
Parameter F20.22 definite logical relation if the virtual output terminal, Bit0~Bit4
is according to logical relation setting of VDI1~VDI5 and VDO1~VDO5 , 0
stands for positive logic , 1 stands for negative logic.
Parameter F20.21 definition VDI state , the Digital setting will not
influence by F20.22.
Note
7.22 Reserved parameter group 2:F21

F21.00
～ Reserved
F21.21

F22.00
～
F22.17
Reserved
C
N
F23.00
～ Reserved
F23.17
E

F24.00
～ Reserved
F24.13
214
7.26 User Definition Display Parameter Group: F25

F25.00 User function code 1 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
F25.11
C
F25.10 User function code 11
User function code 12
F25.12 User function code 13
Range: F00.00～F25.xx
25.00
25.00
25.00
N
E

F25.20 User function code21 Range: F00.00～F25.xx 25.00
215

This parameter is the User-defined parameter, user can choose the at most 30 from
F0 to F30 that are reflect into F25, in order to check and alter more convenient.
Use F25.00 setting the first function code parameter that users plan to. then use
F25.01 setting the second function code parameter that users plan to, so after the
maximum 30 User-defined parameter that can define is finished, then setting
F00.00=3(user list view, press .If users want to drop out user-defined
parameter mode, setting F00.00≠3,then press.
For example: user plan to set three User-defined parameter :F02.01,F03.02 和
F04.00 , following the steps below :
⑴Use F25.00 to set the first function code parameter02.01, press ;
⑵Use F25.01 to set the second function code parameter03.02, press ;
⑷Set F00.00=3(user list view, press

C
⑶Use F25.02 to set the third function code parameter04.00, press
).
.
After the setting is finished , if users do not change F00.00 function code, when
enter function code display state, the operation panel will display
N
F00.00,F02.01,F03.02 and F04.00 only, if the user do not want to display
User-defined parameter, setting F00.00 to the display expected mode.
1. xx represent function code.

2.F25.xx represent no reflection.
Note
E
When the setting function parameter is not available into the

range of EN500/EN600 permit, setting the User-defined parameter
Note will not make effective.
216
7.27 Fault Record Function Parameter Group: F26

F26.00 The last fault record Range: 0～50 0
F26.01 The last two fault records Range: 0～50 0
F26.02 The last three fault records Range: 0～50 0
F26.03 The last four fault records Range: 0～50 0
0:No fault.
1～26: E-01～E-26 fault.
27～29: Reserved.
30～40: E-30～E-40 fault.
41～50: Reserved.
F26.00~F26.03 definite the four times previous four code of faults and the two
times previous fault for the voltage, current terminal and etc of inverter , users
base on fault code and refer to fault function& fault handle process, then getting
F26.04
F26.05
last one fault
C
the results for different types of fault and reasons.
Setup frequency at the
Output frequency at the

last one fault
Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
frequency
Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
frequency
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
N
Output current at the last
F26.06 Range: 0.0～6553.5A 0.0A
one fault
DC bus voltage at the last
F26.07 Range: 0.0～6553.5V 0.0V
one fault
Module temperature at
F26.08 Range: 0～125℃ 0℃
the last one fault
E

F26.09 0
the last one fault
F26.10 Range: 0～65535min 0min
the last one fault
Setup frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.11 0.00Hz
last two fault frequency
Output frequency at the Range:0.00Hz～upper limit
F26.12 0.00Hz
last two fault frequency
Output current at the last
F26.13 Range: 0.0～6553.5A 0.0A
two fault
DC busbar voltage at the
F26.14 Range: 0.0～6553.5V 0.0V
last two fault
Module temperature at the
F26.15 Range: 0～125℃ 0℃
last two fault
F26.16 0
the last two fault
217

F26.17 Range: 0～65535min 0min
the last two fault
F26.04~F26.17 record the running state of fault for the first and second time
before, when Input terminal state at the fault, the terminal state is the whole
terminal state after the time delay, including the standard input terminal state and
expanded input terminal state .When Virtual terminal communication is set as the
terminal panel point , the standard Input terminal state is determined by the actual
physical input terminal and Virtual terminal communication .please refer to the
details of the Input terminal state :
Bit0:X1(Standard input terminal 1). 1: valid;0: invalid
C
Bit8:EX1(Extended input terminal 1). 1: valid;0: invalid
N
BIT13:EX6(Extended input terminal 6). 1: valid;0: invalid
E
218
7.28 Password and Manufacturer Function Parameter Group:

F27
F27.00 User password Range: 00000～65535 00000
User password setting function is used for preventing unauthorized persons from
checking and modifying the functional parameters.
Set F27.00 to 00000 if the user password function is unnecessary.
If user password function is necessary, input a 5-digitnone-zero figure, and press
to confirm. The password is effective at once.
To change the password:
Press and input the primary password, selectF27.00 (F27.00＝00000 at the
moment), then input new password and press to confirm. The password is
effective at once.
To cancel the password：
Press into the state of verification, and enter the original correct 5-digit
C
password into the state of parameter editing, then select F27.00 (F27.00=00000 at
the moment), and directly press to confirm, the password can be canceled
Please memorize the password. Seeking advice from manufacturer

N
in case it is lost.
Note
F27.01 Manufacturer password Range: 00000～65535 00000

Factory setting function, the user can't modify.
E
219
8 Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Failure and countermeasure
Possible failure types in EN500/EN600 are shown in Table 8-1, the fault types
including fault and alarm two kinds. Such as if inverter fault display E-XX, while
the corresponding alarm is displayed in A-XX. Once the inverter failure , fault types
are stored in the F26 fault recording parameter group, and if alarm, alarm status has
been revealed, until the alarm source release, alarm status are not logged to the F26
parameter group. Some failure code is reserved for intelligent automatic diagnosis
function which will be executed continuously in future. When failure takes place in
the inverter, the user should check according to note of these table first and record
failure phenomena detailedly. Please contact our after-sale service and technical
support Department or agent in your local place when technical service is needed.
Table 8-1 Failure type and the countermeasure
Failure
Failure type Possible reason Countermeasure
code
C
Accelerating time is too Prolong accelerating time
short
Improper V/F curve

Adjust V/F curve setting，adjust
manual torque boost or change to
automatic torque boost
N
Overcurrent during Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function
E-01 accelerating
process Low power source voltage Check input power supply
Too small power of the
Choose inverter with high-power
inverter
Output phase lose under Check whether the motor wiring is
E
vector control in good condition

Decelerating time is too Prolong decelerating time
short
Increase braking power of external
Overcurrent during Have potential energy load
energy consumption braking
E-02 decelerating or big Inertia load
subassembly
process
Power of inverter is a bit
small
Load change suddenly or Check or reduce saltation of the
have unwonted phenomena load
Overcurrent during Acc./Dec. time is set to too Prolong accelerating /decelerating

E-03 constant speed short time properly
process low power source voltage Check input power supply
Power of inverter is a bit
small
Overvoltage Unwonted input voltage Check input power supply
E-04 during accelerating
process Acc. time is set to too short Prolong accelerating time properly
220
8 Troubleshooting
Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function

Decelerating time is too
Prolong decelerating time
Overvoltage during short
E-05 decelerating Increase braking power of external
process Have potential energy load
energy consumption braking
or big inertia load
subassembly
Unwonted input voltage Check input power supply
Acc/Dec time is set to too Prolong accelerating decelerating

Overvoltage during short time properly
E-06 constant speed
process Input voltage change
Assemble reactor
abnormally
Use energy consumption
Load inertia is a bit big
subassembly
Inverter control
Check input power supply or look
E-07 power supply Unwonted input voltage
for service
overvoltage
Low-voltage when
E-08 Input voltage is too low Check the input voltage
running
Inverter overload
C
Acc time is set to too short
big
improper V/F curve

Prolong accelerating time
DC injection braking is too Reduce DC injection braking
current，prolong braking time
Adjust V/F curve and torque boost

N
E-09
protection
Restart rotating motor Set speed checking restart function
power source voltage is too
check power source voltage
low
Load is too big Choose inverter with high-power
Improper V/F curve Adjust V/F curve and torque boost
E
Power source voltage is too

check power source voltage
low
General motor run at low Can choose frequency conversion
E-10 Motor overload speed with big load motor for long time low speed run
（A-10） protection
Motor overload protection to set motor overload protection
factor set incorrectly factor correctly
Motor blocked up or load
change too suddenly and Check the load
quickly
The operating current of Confirm whether the parameters
inverter less than underload F19.08, F19.09 setting are
E-11 Motor underload threshold reasonable
（A-11） protection
Checking whether the load divorced
load divorced from motor
from motor
The input phase The three-phase input Check the three-phase input power
E-12
lose power supply is abnormal line is off or poor contact
221
8 Troubleshooting
Power supply board Look for service from manufacturer

anomaly or agent
Look for service from manufacturer

The control board anomaly
or agent
Anomaly wire between
Check the motor wire
motor and inverter
When the motor runs
Check whether the motor
inverter three-phase output
The output three-phase winding is balance
E-13 unbalanced
phase lose
Power supply board Look for service from manufacturer
anomaly or agent
or agent
Transient overcurrent of the Refer to countermeasure for
inverter overcurrent
phase to phase short circuit or
earthing short circuit of wiring again
output 3 phase
Air-path blocked or fan
To clear air-path or replace the fan
damaged
E-14
Inverting module
protection
C
Ambient temperature is too
high
Connecting wire or insert
on control board loose
Unwonted current wave
Lower ambient temperature
Check and connect the wire again
caused by missing output Check wiring

N
phase etc.
Assistant power supply
damaged and drive voltage
or agent
lacking
Unwonted control board
or agent
E
Motor short circuit to

The replacement of cable or motor
ground
Short circuit to
E-15 ground when Hall component is damaged
operation or the hall wiring is poor or Look for service from manufacturer
the current detection circuit or agent
is abnormal
Motor short circuit to

Change the cable or motor
ground
Short circuit to The power supplier of the
E-16 ground when inverter and the motor Change the cable or motor wiring
power on wiring are reversed
Hall component is damaged Look for service from manufacturer
or the hall wiring is poor or agent
Continuous alarm on A-17 Cleaning or to improve the
E-17 for more than 30 minutes ventilation duct
Inverter overheat
（A-17） Cleaning or to improve the
Duct blockage
ventilation duct
222
8 Troubleshooting
To improve the ventilation

The ambient temperature is
conditions, decreasing the carrier
too high
frequency
Fan damage Change new one
E-18 External device Sudden stop terminal for Open external failure terminal after
（A-18） failure external failure closed external failure is settled
Connecting wire or insert
Check and connect the wire again
on control board loose
Assistant power supply Look for service from manufacturer
Current detecting damaged or agent
E-19
circuit failure Look for service from manufacturer
Hall component damaged
or agent
Unwonted amplifying Look for service from manufacturer
circuit or agent
The interruption protection

of CPU is triggered, but
Press "STOP/RESET" button to
External none of the actual
E-20 reset or add external power supply
interference failure overcurrent, overvoltage
filter from power input side
and short circuit signals
have been detected
E-21
Internal
interference failure
C Power off and restart, if the failure
Internal disturbance serious persists, seek the manufacturer or
PID given loss threshold

dealer service
N
To reset the relevant parameters
setting is not reasonable
E-22 External given
PID given loss Check external given wiring
（A-22） disconnection
or agent
PID feedback loss threshold
To reset the relevant parameters
E
setting is not reasonable

E-23 Feedback signal Check external feedback signal
PID feedback loss
（A-23） disconnection wiring
or agent
PID error abnormal
detection threshold setting To reset the relevant parameters
E-24 PID error is not reasonable
（A-24） amount abnormal
or agent
Start terminal Terminal command Check the external input terminal
E-25
protection effective when power on . state
Baud rate set improperly set Baud rate properly
E-26 Communication Serial port communication Press “STOP/RESET” key to reset，

（A-26） failure error look for service
Failure warning parameter
Modify F05.04, F05.05
set improperly
223
8 Troubleshooting
Check if upper device work and

Upper device doesn’t work
wiring is correct
E-27 Reserved
E-28 Reserved
E-29 Reserved
E2PROM read Mistake take place when Reset by pressing “STOP/RESET”
E-30
and write read or write control Look for service from manufacturer
（A-30）
wrongly parameter or agent
Temperature Temperature sensor fault
or agent
E-31 detecting
disconnection The temperature detection Look for service from manufacturer
circuit anomaly or agent
Parameter setting not
set parameter correctly according
according to the motor
to the motor nameplate
nameplate
E-32 Self tuning failure
current anomaly when
Select inverter match the motor
tuning
Motor wiring error Check the motor three-phase wiring
E-33 Power board anomaly
（A-33）
Contactor anomaly
C
Contactor anomaly
E-34 The factory fault 1 Debugging use in factory
E-35 The factory fault 2 Debugging use in factory
The bus
Poor cooling environment
or agent
Replace contactor
Improve the inverter heat

dissipation environment
N
E-36 The inverter capacity is too
capacitor Select inverter match motor
（A-36） small
overheating
Bus capacitance cooling fan Replace the bus capacitor cooling
is damaged fan
Encoder Damaged encoder or poor
E-37 Check the wiring or the encoder
disconnection wiring
Short acceleration time Prolong the acceleration time
E
Low inverter power Select high-power inverter

Overspeed
E-38 Overspeed detect parameter
protection Set the parameter properly
F19.39 and F19.40 is set
according to the situation
improperly
Short Acceleration/
Prolong the acceleration time
deceleration time
Large speed Low inverter power Select high-power inverter
E-39 deviation Over velocity
protection misalignment. Parameter Set the parameter properly
F19.41 and F19.42 is set according to the situation
improperly
Z signal wire of motor
Fault of Z pulse Check the Z signal wire of motor
E-40 coder is unconnected or
loses coder.
loose.
AI1 or AI2 detection of the
physical quantity is not Control the AI1 or AI2
E-41 Analog channel
within a reasonable range, measurement of physical quantities
disconnected
or AI1 or AI2 circuit reasonably, check AI1 or AI2 wiring
contact bad
224
8 Troubleshooting
E-42
～ Reserved
E-50
The main and
auxiliary
F01.00 and F01.03 cannot be set to
given frequency
A-51 Parameter setting error the same channel (9: terminal
channel
encoder given except)
exclusiveness
alarm
Terminal
Terminal function
function
A-52 parameters Check the terminal function settings
exclusiveness
setting repeatedly
alarm
Operation limit Please contact supplier
A-53 Limit run time
alarm
Press key for more than 2s
LOCH1. Keypad lock Keypad lock
to unlock the keypad.
1, Alarm fault of E-16, the inverter must be power off for reset.
Note
C
2, For the faults of over-current, short-circuit to ground while
running, inverter can reset after 2s’s delay
3, When alarm fault of E-09, the reset time of inverter types over
75kw (including 75kw) is 10s; for 55kw (including 55kw), the time is
4s.
N
8.2 Failure record lookup
This series inverter can record latest 4 failure code and inverter run parameter of the
last 2 times failure, refer to these information can redound to finding out reason of
E
the failure.
Failure information is all stored in F26 group parameter，please enter into F26 group
parameter to see about information by referring to keypad operation method.
Code Content Code Content
Input terminal state at previous
F26.00 Previous one failure record F26.09
failure
F26.01 Previous two failure record F26.10 Running time at previous failure
F26.02 Previous three failure record F26.11 Set freq. at previous 2 failure
F26.03 Previous four failure record F26.12 Output freq. at previous 2 failure
Output current at previous 2
F26.04 Set freq. at previous failure F26.13
failure
F26.05 Output freq. at previous failure F26.14 DC bus volt. at previous 2 failure
Module temp. at previous 2
F26.06 Output current at previous failure F26.15
failure
225
8 Troubleshooting
Input terminal state of previous 2

F26.07 DC bus volt. at previous failure F26.16
failure
Running time of previous 2
F26.08 Module temp. at previous failure F26.17
failure
8.3 Failure reset
1. Before reset you must find out reason of failure downright and
eliminate it,
otherwise may cause permanent damage to the inverter.
2. If can’t reset or failure takes place again after resetting, should
look for reason and continuous resetting will damage the inverter.
3. Reset should take place 5 minutes later after overload, overheat
! protection action.
4. For the fault of E-14, the reset is invalid, the motor wiring should
be checked after power off, and restart the inverter.
C
5. When there is a fault of E-16 after power on, do not directly run
the inverter after reset, and need to check whether the input，out
wiring are reversed.
N
To resume normal running when failure takes place in the inverter, you can choose
following any kind of operation:
(1) After you set any terminal of X1~X8 to be inputted by external RESET, it
will be reset after connected to COM.
(2) When failure code is displayed，press key after confirmed that it
E
can be restoration.
(3) Communication reset. Please refer to annex description.
(4) Cut off power supply.
8.4 Alarm reset

When an alarm occurs, must eliminate alarm source which cause alarm, otherwise
the alarm cannot be eliminated, also cannot be reset by reset button.
226
9 Maintenance
9 Maintenance
9.1 Routine maintenance
When you use this series you must assemble and operate it according to demand
listed in this “service manual” strictly. During run state, temperature, humidity,
vibration and aging parts will affect it, which may cause failure of the inverter. To
avoid this, it is recommended to perform routine inspections and maintenance.
Table 9-1 Daily inspection and maintenance items
Period
Inspection item
Daily Periodic
Daily cleaning:
(1)Inverter should be maintained in a clean state
√ (2)Clean up the dust on the surface of inverter, prevent the dust into the
inverter internal (especially metal dust).
(3)Clean up the oil stain of cooling fan
√
√
√
C
Check the air duct, and regularly clean.
Check whether the screws is loose
Check whether the inverter is corrode

N
√ Whether inverter installation environment changes
√ Whether the inverter cooling fan is working properly
√ Whether the inverter is overheating
√ When running whether voice of motor abnormal change.

E
√ Whether occur abnormal vibration when motor running
√ Check wiring terminals have arc trace
√ The main circuit insulation test

Recommend to inspect with following instrument:
Input voltage: electric voltmeter；output voltage: rectifying voltmeter；input output
current: pincers ammeter.
9.2 Inspection and replacement of damageable parts

Some component parts in the inverter will be abraded or bear descending
performance for long-term usage，to assure that the inverter can run stably and
reliably, it is recommended to perform defending maintenance and replace
corresponding parts if necessary.
227
9 Maintenance
(1) Cooling fan

Abnormal noise, even oscillation may take place if the fan have wearing bearing,
aging blade, here replacement of the fan should be considered.
(2) Filter electrolyte capacitance

When frequent-changing load causes increasing pulsant current and aging
electrolyte under high ambient temperature, the electrolyte capacitance may be
damaged and here should replace it.
9.3 Repair guarantee

(1) We provide the free maintenance within warranty time if any failure or
damage under normal usage, the warranty time can be seen in the warranty card,
we will charge some when exceed warranty time.
(2) We will take some upkeep if one of following situations takes place within
period of repair guarantee.
C
a. If did not use the inverter according to service manual strictly or did not use it
under ambient demanded in service manual, which cause failure.
b. Failure caused by applying the inverter to non-normal function;
c. Failure caused by self-repair, refit which is not already allowed;
d. Damage caused by bad keeping, falling down from high place or other extrinsic
N
factor after purchasing the inverter;
e. Failure caused by natural disaster or its reason such as unwonted voltage,
thunderbolt, water fog, fire, salt corroding, gas corroding, earthquake and storm
etc.;
E
f. Make bold to tear up product logo (such as: nameplate etc.); Body serial number
don’t accord with that in repair guarantee card.
(3) We calculate service fee based on actual cost, which is subject to contract if
any.
(4) You can contact the agent and also our company directly if you have questions.
After repair guarantee period, we shall also provide lifetime charged repair service
for our products.
Our company will also provide lifetime repair service with fee for
inverter which is not within period of repair guarantee.
Note
228
9 Maintenance
9.4 Storage
The user must pay attention to following points for temporary storage and
long-term storage after purchasing the inverter:
(1) Avoid storing the inverter in high temperature, moist place and place of dust,
metal powder and assure good ventilation.
(2) Longtime storage will cause low quality of electrolyte capacitance, so must
assure that it’s electrified for one time within 1 year and electrification time is not
shorter than 1 hour and input voltage must be increased to rated value gradually
by voltage regulator of 250w, meanwhile the inverter should be cut off from the
motor.
C
N
E
229
Appendix A Modbus communication protocol

A.1 Summary
We provide general RS485 communication interface in our inverters for the user.
Through this communication interface upper device (such as HMI, PC, PLC
controller and etc.) can perform centralized monitor to the inverter (such as to set
inverter parameter, control run of inverter, read work state of the inverter).
This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizing
above-mentioned function, please read it earnestly and program according to it so
that realize long-distance and network control to the inverter.
A.2 Communication net buildup mode
mainframe is PC or mainframe is PLC
RS232
module
RS485
C
232-485 conversion
N
EN600 EN600 EN500 EN500
Fig.A-1 net buildup graph

E
A.3 Communication mode

At present, EN500/EN600 inverter can be used only as Slave device in RS485 net.
Can realize communication between inverters through PC, PLC or HMI if it’s
needed. Specific communication mode is as mentioned below:
(1) PC or PLC as mainframe，inverter as Slave device, point-to-point
communication between mainframe and Slave device.
(2) Slave device don’t response when mainframe send out command by broadcast
address.
(3) User can set local address, baud rate and data format of the inverter through
Slave device keypad or serial communication mode.
(4) EN500/EN600 provides the RS485 interface.
(5) Default mode: Asynchronous serial，semiduplex transport mode. There are
RTU and ASII two mode . Default format and transport rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps.
230
A.4 Transmission mode

Asynchronous serial, semiduplex transport mode. Default format and transport
rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps. The detail setting parameter, please refer to the F05 group
function mode.
(Remark: the parameter is valid under the Modbus communication, the other
parameter comply with the original service manual)
F05.00 Protocol 0:Modbus protocol 1 0 ×
selection 1:Reserved
2:Profibus protocol(expansion is valid)
3:CanLink protocol(expansion is valid)
4:CANopen protocol(expansion is valid)
5:free protocol 1(revision all the parameter of
EN500/EN600 is valid)
6: free protocol 2(only revising part parameter
of EN500/EN600 is valid)
Remark: expansion card is needed when select
2,3,4 communication
F05.01 Baud rate
setting C
Units digit: free protocol and Modbus Baud
rate selection
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
1 005 ×
N
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
F05.02 Data format Units digit: free protocol and Modbus protocol 00 ×
E
Data format
0:1-8-1 format，no checkout，RTU
1:1-8-1 format，Odd Parity，RTU
2:1-8-1 format，Even Parity，RTU
3:1-7-1 format，no checkout，ASCII
4:1-7-1 format，Odd Parity，ASCII
5:1-7-1 format，Even Parity，ASCII
F05.03 Local address 0～247，00 is broadcast address 1 1 ×
A.5 Data communication structure
A.5.1 Data frame format
Using RTU mode, messages are sent at least 3.5 character time interval pause.
The first transmitted field is device address, the character you can transfer is
hexadecimal 0x00 ~ 0xFF. Network equipment Continuously monitor the bus,
including pauses. When the address field is received, all equipment determine
whether it is sent to their own. when the last character of the packet transfer is
complete, at least a 3.5 character times pause mean the end of the message. A new
231
message can begin after this pause.

The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous flow. If a new
message start transmitting in less than 3.5 character times after a message and
then receiving device will consider it a continuation of the previous message. This
will cause an error, because in the final CRC field value can not be right.
RTU frame format as the table below:
Frame Header 3.5 characters time pause

Slave address Slave address:0~247
03H:read slave parameter
Communication command code
06H:write slave parameter
Data content DATA The contents of packet:
Data content DATA Parameter address(16bit);
Number of parameter or bytes of parameter
…… value;
…… Parameter value(16bit)
CRC check value low byte
CRC check value high byte
Closing Flag
C 16bit Unsigned check value
3.5 characters time pause
Regarding generation method of CRC check value, please refer to Section A.9.
ASCII frame format as the table below:
N
Frame Header ‘:’(0x3A)
Slave address Hi Slave address: Combined by 2 ASCII code
Slave address Lo 8 bit slave address 0~247
Command code: 8 bit command code
Command code Hi
combined by 2 ASCII code
03H:read slave parameter
Command code Lo
E
06H:write slave parameter

Data content DATA The contents of data packet:
N pieces of 8bit data content combined by 2*N
Data content DATA
pieces of ASCII code
……
……
LRC CHK Hi LRC check value includes 2 pieces of ASCII
LRC CHK Lo code
Closing Flag Hi Closing Flag Hi = CR(0x0D)
Closing Flag Lo Closing Flag Lo = LF(0x0A)
A.5.2 Host read slave parameter
Command code 03H. Host can read one or more parameter( up to ten) by
initiating a communication transaction .
E.g., read 2 contiguous inverter parameter values from the address 0000H of
inverter whose address is 01, the contents of host command :
232
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Parameters initial address high byte 00H
Parameters initial address low byte 00H
Number of parameter high byte 00H
Number of parameter low byte 02H
CRC check value low byte C4
CRC check value high byte OB
The contents of slave reply:
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Parameter value bytes 04H
Address 0000H content high byte 00H
Address 0000H content low byte 00H
C
CRC check value low byte
CRC check value high byte
A.5.3 Host write slave parameter
BA
F2
Command code 06H. Host can write an parameter by initiating a

N
communication transaction .
E.g.,The decimal system 5000 (1388H) written to the inverter 0101H address
whose slave address is 02，host command including:
ADR 02H
CMD 06H
E
Parameter address high byte 01H

Parameter address low byte 01H
Parameter value high byte 13H
Parameter value low byte 88H
CRC check value low byte D4
CRC check value high byte 93
The contents of slave reply:
ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Parameter address high byte 01H
Parameter address low byte 01H
CRC check value low byte D4
CRC check value high byte 93
233
A. 6 Data communication address allocation

A.6.1 Function code F00-F26 group communication address
Inverter function parameter’s MODBUS communication address addressing
process follows PPnn way: PP means high byte of the address, corresponding to
function parameter’s group number; nn means low byte of the address,
corresponding to function code parameter’s group internal code. For example:
F3.21 function code’s communication address is 0315H, 03H is the hex form of
group number 3, 15H is the hex form of group internal code 21.
F00.00~F26.17 communication address is 0000H~1A11H, F26 group fault record
parameter start address is 1A00H.
A.6.2 control command and status word communication address
Variable Communicat Reading-writin
Command data or response value meaning
Name ion address g attribute
1: reserved
Run
command
word
1 E 00H
C
Reading and
writing
2: Jog stop command
3: forward JOG run
4: reversal JOG run
5: run
6: stop
N
7: forward run
8: reversal run
9: fault reset
10: reserved
Serial F01.02 while hundreds place=0: 5000
E
port Reading and represents 50.00Hz

1E 01H
value writing F01.02 while hundreds place=1: 10000
setting represents F01.11
BIT0: bus voltage set
BIT1: the ordinary run command effectively
BIT2: JOG command effectively
BIT3: Running
BIT4: the current running direction is reverse
BIT5: the operating instructions is reverse
direction
BIT6: deceleration braking
Inverter
1E 02H Reading only BIT7: acceleration
status
BIT8: deceleration
BIT9: alarm
BIT10: fault
BIT11: current limit
BIT12: fault self recovery
BIT13: self tuning
BIT14: Free stop State
BIT15: speed tracking start
234
Alarm 0: no alarm
1E 03H Reading only
code 1 ~ 50: the current alarm code
Modbus communication address: 1E01 is the given address of

Frequency-Communication mode; 1D01 is the given address of
Torque-Communication mode; 1D00 is the given address of
Note
PID-Communication mode.
A.6.3 Monitor parameter communication address

Communication read-write
Variable name Command data or response value
address attribute
C-00 1C00H Reading Monitoring parameters 1
C-05
A.6.4 Inside hidden parameters
Variable name
C
1C05H
Communicatio
n address
Reading
read-write
attribute
Monitoring parameters 6
means of command data or response

value
N
PID Communication Range: 0～1000(1000 represents
1D00H read-write
presetting value 10.00V)
Torque
Range:0～2000(2000 represents
communication 1D01H read-write
200.0% rated motor torque)
presetting value
Communication AO1 Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D02H read-write
E
given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)

Communication AO2 Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D03H read-write
given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
Communication Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
1D04H read-write
EAO1 given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
1D05H read-write
EAO2 given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
1D06H read-write
DO given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
1D07H read-write
EDO given value 10.00V or 20.00mA)
BIT0:Y1
BIT1:Y2
BIT2:Y3
The communication
BIT3: Y4
output terminal given 1D08H read-write
value BIT4: RLY1
BIT5: EY1
BIT6: EY2
BIT7: EY3
235
BIT8: EY4
BIT9: ERLY1
BIT10: ERLY2
Communication 1D09H BIT0:CX1
virtual input terminal read-write …
given value BIT7: CX8
Positive toque 1D0AH Range: 0～60000(60000 represents
read-write
limited frequency 600.00Hz)
Negative torque 1D0BH Range: 0～60000(60000 represents
read-write
limited frequency 600.00Hz)
Range: 0～4000(4000 represents
PID feedback voltage 1D0CH read-write
10.00V)
Reserved 1D0DH /
A.7 Communication error processing
Inverter receiving data packet detection error, it finds reading&writing parameter
address or parameter value invalid, so reply to the host with communication error
response packet. Communication error response packet (host command code
ADR
CMD
C
+80H) as command code, with 1 byte error code.
Format for communication error response packet as follows:
01H
83H/86H
N
01H~06H (for details, please check below
Communication error code
table)
Low byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating
High byte of CRC checksum Obtain by calculating
E
Meaning for each communication error code value as follows:

Communication error
Communication error type Priority
code value
0x01 CRC checksum error 1
0x02 Command code illegal 2
0x03 Register address visited illegal 3
0x04 Value to register illegal 4
0x05 Not allow to modify parameters 5
0x06 Register number read illegal 6
A.8 Data frames examples
A.8.1 RTU Mode
236
237
CRC CRC CRC CRC
E1
E1
E2
E0
E0
84
74
74
high bit High bit high bit high bit
CRC CRC CRC CRC
4F
4F
D3
D3
0F
0F
23
79
low bit Low bit low bit low bit
Data Low Data Low Data low Data low
05
05
06
06
88
88
01
01
byte byte byte
Data Data
C Data
byte
Data
00
00
00
00
13
13
00
00
High byte High byte High byte High byte
Register Register Register Register
(Respond value
00
00
address
N
byte quantity)
00
00
01
01
02
address address address
Low byte Low byte Low byte Low byte
3. Set #1 inverter given value to 50.00Hz
02
Register Register Register Register
1E
1E
address
1E
1E
1E
1E
1E
address address address
4. Read #1 inverter running state

High byte High byte High byte High byte
E
1. Start #1 inverter running
06
06
Order
2. Stop #1 inverter running

Order code Order
06
06
06
06
03
03
Order code
code code
Slave Slave Slave Slave
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
Address Inverter Inverter Inverter
Address Address Address
command
command
command
command
respond
respond
respond
respond
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
frames
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Data
host
host
host
host
Data Field Data Field Data Field
Field
A.8.2 ACSII Mode

Host read Slave，command code: 03
The host frame
The host frame format
Slave address
Slave address
Frame begin
Command
Command
Checkout
checkout
Register
Register
Register
Register
Register
Register
Register
Register
number
number
number
number
address
address
address
address
symbol
symbol
Ending
code
code
Send
1 2 2 4 4 2 2
byte
Remark:
 Begin symbol:
The lower computer judge the frame header of ASCII based on this.
It is:’:’
 Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0~247.
C
Thereinto, 0 is broadcast address. Broadcast address can control all
N
the lined Slave simultaneously，and the Slave will not send back
any Data to the host. That means the Slave only accept and do not
send.
Modbus protocol without host address.
 Command code:
E
Reading the command of parameter or data from inverter ，the

value is:’0’’3’.
 Register address:
The internal memory address of inverter function parameter is of 4
byte, which is ASCII mode transformed from Hexadecimal.
Corresponding relation between specific parameters and
memory address can be seen in the later table.
 Register number:
The number of parameters read by a frame, it is 4 byte. It is ASCII
mode transformed from Hexadecimal.
 Checksum:
From “slave address” to the character before checksum, the LRC
checksum of the character string. Function terminal can be seen on
the end of the text.
238
 Ending code: enter，line break. is:0x0D,0x0A

Response frame
Frame begin Response frame format
Ending code
Data string
Command
Command
checksum
checksum
Data byte
Data byte
address
address
symbol
Slave
Slave
value
code
code
Send
1 2 2 2 N*2 2 2
byte
remark:
 Begin code:
The lower computer judge the frame of ASCII frame. This is :’:’
 Slave address:
Single inverter ID code，range:0～247.
C
Thereinto, address 0 is broadcast address. Broadcast address can
control all the lined Slave simultaneously，and the Slave will not
send back any Data to the host. That means the Slave only accept
and do not send.
N
Modbus protocol is without host address.
 Command code:
The command of reading parameter or data from inverter, the value
is:’0’’3’.
E
 Data byte:
The number of parameters read by a frame. It is 4 byte, which is
ASCII mode transformed from hexadecimal.
 Data string value:
The detail return Data，the length of Data string is the register
address “Data byte”, which is ASCII mode transformed from
hexadecimal. Range: 4~40 byte
 Checksum:
checksum of the character string.
The function terminal can be seen in the later text.
 Ending symbol: enter, line break. Is 0x0D,0x0A
The followings are the example of command frame and return frame,
all the Data are ASCII character.
239
 Inquiry frame:
: 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 F A \n\r
(The detail introduction of every byte)
“:”: beginning symbol
0 1: Slave address
0 3:read the command
0 0 0 1:storage address of reading parameter
0 0 0 1:the number of reading the parameter
F A:{ 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1} for LRC checksum.
0xFA = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x03 + 0x00 + 0x01 + 0x00 + 0x01)
 Response frame:
: 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 0 3 3 C 7 \n\r
0 1: Slave address
0 3:read the command
0 2:The byte length of return parameter Data.
0 0 3 3:return parameter，current storage value
C 7:{ 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 0 3 3} for LRC checksum.
C
N
0xC7 = 0x100 – (0x01 + 0x03 + 0x02 + 0x00 + 0x33)
The main frame writes slave address single register, command code: 06
The host frame
The host frame format
E Slave address
Slave address
Slave address
Frame begin
Command
Checkout
checkout
Register
Register
Register
Register
address
address
address
address
symbol
symbol
Ending
code
Data
Data
Data
Data
Send
byte 1 2 2 4 4 2 2
Remark:
 Slave address:
Thereinto, address 00 is broadcast address.
 Command code:
Read parameter from inverter or command of Data, the value is:06
The storage address of inverter function parameter, is double byte.
240
The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back.
The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be
seen in the later excel.
 Data:
The new value of revised parameter.
 Checksum:
Response frame
Response frame format
Slave address
Slave address
Frame begin
Command
Command
Checkout
Register
Register
Register
Register
Checkout
address
address
address
address
symbol
symbol
Ending
code
code
Data
Data
Data
Data
Send
byte
Remark:
1
 Slave address:
2 21
C 4 4 2 2
N
Thereinto, address 00 is broadcast address.
 Command code:
Read parameter from inverter or command of Data, the value is:06
E
The storage address of inverter function parameter, is double byte.
The high byte is in the front and the low byte is in the back.
The detail relation between parameter and storage address can be
seen in the later excel.
 Data:
The new value of revised parameter.
 Checksum:
The followings are the example of command frame and return frame, all the
Data are ASCII character.
 Inquiry frame:
: 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8 5 C \n\r
241

0 1: Slave address
0 6:write command
0 1 0 1:storage address of writing parameter
1 3 8 8:the value of writing parameter
5 C:{ 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8} for LRC checksum.
0x5C = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x06 + 0x01 + 0x01 + 0x13 + 0x88)
 Response frame:
: 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8 5 C \n\r
(Detail introduction of every byte)
0 1: Slave address
0 6:write command
0 1 0 1:storage address of writing parameter
C
1 3 8 8:the value of writing parameter
5 C:{ 0 1 0 6 0 1 0 1 1 3 8 8} for LRC checksum.
0x5C = 0x100 - (0x01 + 0x06 + 0x01 + 0x01 + 0x13 + 0x88)
N
1. ASCII frame realizes transform by that 8Bit hexadecimal is
divided as different 2 character of 4, and then grouped ashexadecimal
of one 8Bit when reaching the destination.
2. Frame header, add“:”, frame footer adds“\n\r” the enter line
break character.
E
3. The valid character in the protocol is: :, 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,

D,E,F and hexadecimal 0DH, lower case ASCII letter a, b, c, d, e, f is
Note invalid
4. The subject data volume is the 2 times as RTU, checksum adopt
LRC check.
5.For the other information, please refer to the official standard
protocol when need.
242
A.9 CRC checkout mode

CRC checkout value calculating function written by C language is as follows:
unsigned int cal_crc_value (unsigned char *pval, unsigned char len)
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
unsigned int i;
while(len--)
{
crc_value ^= *pval++;
for(i=0; i<8; i++)
{
if(crc_value & 0x0001)
{
}
else
C
crc_value >>= 1;
crc_value ^= 0xA001;
N
{
crc_value >>= 1;
}
}
}
E
return(crc_value);
}
243
Appendix B Free-port communication protocol

B. 1 Summarization
We provide the customer with general RS485/RS232 communication interface in
our EN500/EN600 series frequency inverter. For the users, through the
communication interface upper device (such as PC, PLC controller etc.) can
perform centralized monitor to the inverter (such as setting inverter parameter,
controlling run of inverter, reading work state of the inverter) and also
long-distance control keypad can be connected to realize diverse operating
requirement of the user.
This communication protocol is interface criterion file designed for realizing
above-mentioned function, please read it earnestly and program according to it so
that realize long-distance and network control to the inverter.
B. 2 Protocol content and description
B.2.1 Communication net buildup mode
Mainframe is PC
RS232
232-485
or C Mainframe is PC or EN500/EN600 mainframe
N
conversion module
RS485
EN600 EN600 EN500 EN500

E
Fig.B-1 net buildup graph

B.2.2 Communication mode
At present, EN500/EN600 inverter can be used as not only auxiliary device but
also mainframe device in RS485, if the inverter is used as auxiliary device,
master device can be completed by PC, PLC or human interface, and if used as
mainframe device, the main- auxiliary control of the inverter can be complement
by it, Specific communication mode is as mentioned below:
(1) PC or PLC as mainframe, inverter as auxiliary device, point-to-point
communication between mainframe and auxiliary device.
(2) Auxiliary device don’t response when mainframe send out command by
broadcast address.
(3) User can set local address, baud rate and data format of the inverter through
auxiliary device keypad.
244
(4) Auxiliary device report current failure information to mainframe in the last
response frame.
(5) EN500/EN600 provides RS485 interface.
B.2.3 Transport mode
Asynchronous serial, semiduplex transport mode. Default format and transport
rate: 8-N-1, 9600bps.For specific parameter setting please see description for F05
group function code.
(Remark: The definition for this parameter is only effective under free –port
communication mode, and definition for other parameters are the same as
original)
F05.00 Protocol 0:Modbus protocol 1 0 ×
selection 1:reserved
2:Profibus protocol(extension effective)
3:CanLink protocol(extension effective)
4:CANopen protocol(extension effective)
5:freedom protocol 1(can modify all function
F05.01 Baud rate

C
parameters of EN500/EN600)
6:freedom protocol 2 (can only modify part of
function parameter of EN500/EN600)
Remark: expansion card is needed if select protocol
2, 3, 4
Units digit: freedom protocol and Modbus baud rate 1 005 ×
N
configuration selection
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
E
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
F05.02 Data format Units digit: freedom protocol and Modbus protocol 00 ×
data format
0:1-8-1 format, no checkout, RTU
1:1-8-1 format, even checkout, RTU
2:1-8-1 format, odd checkout, RTU
3:1-7-1 format, no checkout, ASCII
4:1-7-1 format, even checkout, ASCII
5:1-7-1 format, odd checkout, ASCII
F05.03 Local address 0～247, 00 is master station address 1 1 ×
245
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
18
frame end end frame end end

1
1
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
checkout sum checkout sum

checkout sum checkout checkout sum Checkout
4
4
checkout sum area area
checkout sum
checkout sum checkout sum
Fig.B-2 command/response frame format

set data
C Auxiliary device response frame format
run data
Main device command frame format
set data Setting run data Run data

4
4
set data data area area
run data
set data run data
command index
N
9
command index
9
command index
8
Index command index
8
4
Index area
4
area
B.2.4 Data command frame format
assistant index
7
failure index
7
assistant index
6
failure index
6
5
main device command command

E
auxiliary device response
2
response
2
main device command area area
4
auxiliary device response
4
auxiliary device address
3
3
address
2
address
2
2
2
frame head head
1
1
frame head head
1
Sending
Sending
Sending
Sending
order
byte
order
byte
Definition Definition
246
Remark:
(1) “Setting data area” and “run data area” may not be existent in some
command/data frame format, so in protocol command list it’s marked with
“nothing”.
(2) In protocol effective character set is: ~, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
A, B, C, D, E, F and hex data 0DH, ASCII lowercase a, b, c, d,
e, f are invalid.
(3) Effective command frame length is 14 or 18 byte.
B.2.5 Explanation and description for format
(1) Frame head
It’s character“~” (namely hex 7E), single byte.
(2) Auxiliary device address
Data meanings: local address of auxiliary device, double byte. ASCII format.
Inverter factory default is 01.
(3) Mainframe command/auxiliary device respond
C
Data meanings: mainframe send out command and auxiliary device respond to the
command. Double byte, ASCII format.
Response code function classification:
Species 1>: command code=“10”, mainframe ask auxiliary device to report
N
current preparation state and control situation.
Table B-1 Command code meanings for response frame response area
Response Meanings
code Preparation state of Control from mainframe To set frequency is
ASCII auxiliary device is allowed allowed
E
10 Haven’t get ready No meaning

11 Get ready Allow Allow
12 Get ready Allow Allow
13 Get ready Don’t allow Don’t allow
14 Get ready Don’t allow Don’t allow
20 Frame error
Species 2>: command code=“11”~“15”, 5 kinds of function command which

mainframe send to auxiliary device, for detail please see protocol command list.
247
Table B-2 Response code meanings for response frame command index area
Response
code Meanings of response code Description
ASCII
Auxiliary device communication and
control is normal ； function code
00
modification is effective；password is
correct.
(1) frame checkout error；
(2)“command area” data overrun； When this response code is reported,
(3)“index area” data overrun； data of “command area”, “index area”
20
(4)frame length error/non ASCII byte and “running data area” are not
exist in area except frame head, frame reported.
end.
(1) control to auxiliary device is
Whether report this response code relate
ineffective；
to current set state of auxiliary device.
(2) ineffective function code parameter
When report data of area”, “index
30 modification；
area” and “run data area” are reported
(3)“setting/running data” area data
overrun.
(4) password error.
C
(4) Auxiliary index/command index/failure index
according to protocol
requirement.
Data meanings: include auxiliary index byte and command index byte.
For mainframe, auxiliary index, command index are used for cooperating
N
mainframe command in realizing specific function.
For auxiliary device, auxiliary index, command index are used for reporting
failure state code, command index are reported without modification
Data type: hex, 4 byte, ASCII format.
E
Command index occupy 2 low byte, data range: “00”~“FF”.

Auxiliary index occupy 2 high byte, data range: “00”~“FF”.
Auxiliary device failure state occupy “auxiliary index’’ byte, see table B-3.
Table B-3 Free-port1 failure type description
Failure Failure
Description Description
code(decimal) code(decimal)
Overcurrent during Current detecting circuit
1 19
accelerating process failure
Overcurrent during External interference
2 20
decelerating process failure
Overcurrent during Internal interference
3 21
constant speed process failure
Overvoltage during
4 22 PID provision loss
accelerating process
Overvoltage during
5 23 PID feedback loss
decelerating process
Overvoltage during PID error amount
6 24
constant speed process exception
248
7 Overvoltage while halting 25 Startup terminal protection

Under voltage during RS485 communication
8 26
running process failure
Inverter overload
9 27 Reserved
protection
10 Motor overload protection 28 Reserved
Motor underload
11 29 Reserved
protection
E2PROM read and write
12 Input phase missing 30
wrongly
Temperature detection
13 Output phase missing 31
breakage
Inverting module
14 32 Self-tuning failure
protection
Short circuit to earth
15 33 Contactor exception
during running process
Short circuit to earth
16 34 Interior failure 1
17
18
C
during electrifying process
Inverter over heating
External device failure

N
Free-port 2 failure type description
Failure Failure
Description Description
code(decimal) code(decimal)
Overcurrent during Inverting module
1 13
accelerating process protection
E
Overcurrent during
2 14 External device failure
Overcurrent during Current detecting circuit
3 15
constant speed process failure
Overvoltage during RS485 communication
4 16
accelerating process failure
Overvoltage during
5 17 Reserved
Overvoltage during
6 18 Reserved
constant speed process
Control power supply
7 19 Under voltage
overvoltage
8 Inverter overload 20 System interference
9 Motor overload 21 Reserved
10 Inverter over heating 22 Reserved
249
E2PROM read and write

11 Reserved 23
wrongly
12 Reserved
(5) Checkout sum

Data meanings: frame checkout, 4 byte, ASCII.
Calculation method: accumulative sum of ASCII code value of all byte from
“auxiliary device address ”to“ run data”.
(6) Frame end
Hex 0D, single byte.
B.2.6 Protocol command list

Frame 7E and frame end 0D, address, checkout sum, ASCII character format
are omitted in following description.
Table B-4 Free-port 1 protocol command table
C Run data setting range
example, such as PC control

(C language cluster format ,
auxiliary device is set to 01)
Auxiliary index
operation of inverter
Mainframe sending
Run data precision

Mainframe order
Order index
Description
Decimal
Name
Hex
Hex
N Hex
Look up auxiliary motor state 10 00 00 no ~010A00000192\r 1

E
Main setting frequency 11 00 00 no ~010B00000193\r 0.01Hz

Auxiliary setting
11 00 01 no ~010B00010194\r 0.01Hz
frequency
Setting frequency 11 00 02 no ~010B00020195\r 0.01Hz
Output frequency 11 00 03 no ~010B00030196\r 0.01Hz
Read parameter of auxiliary motor
Output current 11 00 04 no ~010B00040197\r 0.1A

Output voltage 11 00 05 no ~010B00050198\r 1V
DC bus-bar voltage 11 00 06 no ~010B00060199\r 0.1V
Load motor revolving
11 00 07 no ~010B0007019A\r 1RPM
speed
Load motor linear speed 11 00 08 no ~010B0008019B\r no
Inverter temperature 11 00 09 no ~010B0009019C\r 1℃
Runtime 11 00 0A no ~010B000A01A4\r 0.1min
Current accumulative
11 00 0B no ~010B000B01A5\r 1h
runtime
Current accumulative
11 00 0C no ~010B000C01A6\r 1h
power-on time
Inverter state 11 00 0D no ~010B000D01A7\r no
Input terminal state 11 00 0E no ~010B000E01A8\r no
250
Output terminal state 11 00 0F no ~010B000F01A9\r no

Expand output terminal state 11 00 10 no ~010B00100194\r no
Expanding input terminal state 11 00 11 no ~010B00110195\r no
Communicational virtual input
11 00 12 no ~010B00120196\r no
terminal state
Internal virtual input node state 11 00 13 no ~010B00130197\r no
Analog input AI1 11 00 14 no ~010B00140198\r no
Analog input AI2 11 00 15 no ~010B00150199\r no
Expanding analog input
11 00 16 no ~010B0016019A\r no
EAI1
Expanding analog input
11 00 17 no ~010B0017019B\r no
EAI2
Analog AO1
11 00 18 no ~010B0018019C\r no
output
Analog AO2 output 11 00 19 no ~010B0019019D\r no
Expanding analog EAO1
11 00 1A no ~010B001A01A5\r no
output
Expanding analog EAO2
11 00 1B no ~010B001B01A6\r no
output
External pulse input
frequency
Reserved
Process PID provision
Process PID feedback
C
11
11
11
00
00
00
1C
1E
1F
no
no
no
~010B001C01A7\r
~010B001E01A9\r
~010B001F02AA\r
1Hz
0.01V
0.01V
N
Process PID error 11 00 20 no ~010B00200195\r 0.01V
Process PID output 11 00 21 no ~010B00210196\r 0.01Hz
Simple PLC current
11 00 22 no ~010B00220197\r no
segments
External multi-section
11 00 23 no ~010B00230198\r no
speed current segments
E
Provision pressure for 0.001Mp

11 00 24 no ~010B00240199\r
constant pressure water a
Feedback pressure for 0.001Mp
11 00 25 no ~010B0025019A\r
constant pressure water a
Relay state for constant
11 00 26 no ~010B0026019B\r no
pressure water
Current length 11 00 27 no ~010B0027019C\r no
Accumulative length 11 00 28 no ~010B0028019D\r no
Current internal count 11 00 29 no ~010B0029019E\r no
Current internal time 11 00 2A no ~010B002A01A6\r no
Setting channel for run
11 00 2B no ~010B002B01A7\r no
command
Main frequency provision
11 00 2C no ~010B002C01A8\r no
channel
Auxiliary frequency
11 00 2D no ~010B002D01A9\r no
provision channel
Inverter rated current 11 00 2E no ~010B002E01AA\r 0.1A
Inverter rated voltage 11 00 2F no ~010B002F01AB\r 1V
Inverter rated power 11 00 30 no ~010B00300196\r 0.1KW
251
Reserved
Reserved
Frequency after
acceleration and 11 00 33 no ~010B00330199\r 0.01Hz
deceleration
Motor rotor frequency 11 00 34 no ~010B0034019A\r 0.01Hz
Current provision torque 11 00 35 no ~010B0035019B\r 0.1%
Current output torque 11 00 36 no ~010B0036019C\r 0.1%
Current torque current 11 00 37 no ~010B0037019D\r 0.1A
Current flux current 11 00 38 no ~010B0038019E\r 0.1A
Auxiliary device run
12 00 00 no ~010C00000194\r no
command
Set current run frequency Set freq.
0Hz~high ~010C00010FA002
provision of auxiliary 12 00 01 0.01Hz =40.00Hz
limit freq 7C\r
device
Auxiliary
Auxiliary device run with 0Hz~high ~010C00020FA002 device run
12 00 02 0.01Hz
run frequency provision limit freq 7D\r Set freq.
=40.00Hz
Auxiliary device forward
run
C
12 00 03 no ~010C00030197\r no
Run control and adjusting function
Auxiliary device reverse

12 00 04 no ~010C00040198\r no
run
Forward run
N
0Hz~ high ~010C00050FA002 boot-strap
run with run frequency 12 00 05 0.01Hz
limit freq 80\r Set freq.
provision
=40.00Hz
Reverse run
0Hz~ high ~010C00060FA002 boot-strap
run with run frequency 12 00 06 0.01Hz
limit freq 81\r Set freq.
provision
E
=40.00Hz
Auxiliary device stop 12 00 07 no ~010C0007019B\r no
Auxiliary device jog run 12 00 08 no ~010C0008019C\r no

12 00 09 no ~010C0009019D\r no
jog run
12 00 0A no ~010C000A01A5\r no
jog run
Auxiliary device stop run 12 00 0B no ~010C000B01A6\r no
Auxiliary device failure
12 00 0C no ~010C000C01A7\r no
restoration
version query
Software
order
Query auxiliary device

15 00 00 no ~010F00000197\r 1
software version
252
Free-Port 2 protocol command table
inverter (C language cluster

Run data setting range hex
format , auxiliary device is

Mainframe order decimal
example, such as PC
control operation of
Auxiliary index hex
Mainframe sending
Run data precision

Order index Hex
Description
set to 01)
Name
look up auxiliary motor state 10 00 00 no ~010A00000192\r 1

command 12 00 00 no ~010C00000194\r no
Set current run freq. of 0Hz~

auxiliary device 12 00 01 high limit ~010C00010FA0027C\r 0.01Hz
freq
with run frequency
provision
Auxiliary device
forward run
12
12
C 00
00
02
03
0Hz~
high limit ~010C00020FA0027D\r
freq
no ~010C00030197\r
0.01Hz
no
N
12 00 04 no ~010C00040198\r no
run
Run
Auxiliary device 0Hz~
control
forward run with run 12 00 05 high limit ~010C00050FA00280\r 0.01Hz
and
frequency provision freq
adjusting
Auxiliary device reverse 0Hz~
function
run with run frequency 12 00 06 high limit ~010C00060FA00281\r 0.01Hz
E
provision freq
Auxiliary device stop 12 00 07 no ~010C0007019B\r no
Auxiliary device jog run 12 00 08 no ~010C0008019C\r no
Auxiliary device
12 00 09 no ~010C0009019D\r no
forward jog run
12 00 0A no ~010C000A01A5\r no
jog run
Auxiliary device stop
12 00 0B no ~010C000B01A6\r no
run
Auxiliary device failure
12 00 0C no ~010C000C01A7\r no
restoration
version query
Software
order
Query auxiliary device

15 00 00 no ~010F00000197\r 1
software version
253
Table B-5 read auxiliary device function code parameter

Read auxiliary device function code parameter: all function code parameter except user
Function
password and manufacturer password
definition
except user password and manufacturer password
Frame Order Checkout Frame

Meanings Address Order Run data
head index sum end
Mainframe See
7EH ADDR 13 4 BCC 0DH
order remark
Byte quantity 1 2 2 4 0 4 1
Auxiliary Function
See
device 7EH ADDR 06 code BCC 0DH
remark
respond parameter
Command index=combination of function code group number and hex code of function
code number. For instance:
If want to read parameter of F0.05 function code, order index=0005；
If want to read parameter of F2.11 function code, order index =020B；
C
If want to read parameter of F2.15 function code, order index =020F；
If want to read parameter of F2.13 function code, order index =020D；
Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No.
Function code
Decimal Hex
Function code
Decimal Hex
N
group No group No
F00 0 00H F0E 14 0EH
F01 1 01H F0F 15 0FH
F02 2 02H F10 16 10H
F03 3 03H F11 17 11H

E
remark
F04 4 04H F12 18 12H
F05 5 05H F13 19 13H
F06 6 06H F14 20 14H
F07 7 07H F15 21 15H
F08 8 08H F16 22 16H
F09 9 09H F17 23 17H
F0A 10 0AH F18 24 18H
F0B 11 0BH F19 25 19H
F0C 12 0CH F1A 26 1AH
F0D 13 0DH F1B 27 1BH
Virtual data 0~FFFF (namely 0~65535)
Please input correct “user password” before you set user function code parameter.
254
Table B-6 set auxiliary device function code parameter

Function Set auxiliary device function code parameter: all function code parameter except user password
definition and manufacturer password
Frame Order Checkout

Meanings Address Order Run data Frame end
head index sum
Mainframe
7EH ADDR 14 See remark 4 BCC 0DH
order
Auxiliary Function
device 7EH ADDR 06 See remark code BCC 0DH
respond parameter
Command index=combination of function code group number and hex code of function code
number. For instance:
If want to read parameter of F00.05 function code, order index=0005；
If want to read parameter of F02.11 function code, order index =020B；
If want to read parameter of F02.15 function code, order index =020F；
group No
F00
Decimal
0
C
If want to read parameter of F02.13 function code, order index =020D；
Corresponding relation between decimal and hex value of function code group No.
Function code
Hex
00H
Function code
group No
F0E
Decimal
14
Hex
0EH
N
F01 1 01H F0F 15 0FH
F02 2 02H F10 16 10H
Remark F03 3 03H F11 17 11H
F04 4 04H F12 18 12H

E
F05 5 05H F13 19 13H

F06 6 06H F14 20 14H
F07 7 07H F15 21 15H
F08 8 08H F16 22 16H
F09 9 09H F17 23 17H
F0A 10 0AH F18 24 18H
F0B 11 0BH F19 25 19H
F0C 12 0CH F1A 26 1AH

F0D 13 0DH F1B 27 1BH
Virtual data 0～FFFF(namely 0～65535)
255
Appendix C Keyboard
Appendix C Keyboard
C.1 Keyboard selection:
NO. Type Details Remark
Local LED single-display digital potentiometer
1 EN-LED3-D Standard
keyboard（with the function of parameter copy）
Local LED double-display digital potentiometer
2 EN-LED4-D Optional
keyboard（with the function of parameter copy）
Local LCD Keyboard（with the function of parameter
3 EN-LCD1 Optional
copy）
Remote Control LCD Keyboard（with the function of
4 EN-LCD2 Optional
parameter copy）
5 EN-LED1 Local LED single-display keyboard Optional
At present, Our has 4 kinds of optional keyboards for our customers’ selection,
they are EN-LED4-D,EN-LCD1,EN-LCD2 and EN-LED1. Their outer dimension
and installation size are the same as the standard keyboard EN-LED3-D. For more
detailed dimension, please refer to “Keyboard Operation and Outer Size of
C
Keyboard installing box” in Chapter 2.
1. EN-LED3-D, EN-LED4-D,EN-LCD1,EN-LCD2 are four kinds of

keyboard that with the function of parameter copy.
2. Using the function of parameter copy could through operating
N
Note
parameter F00.27
C.2 LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard

Local LED double-display digital potentiometer keyboard type: EN-LED4-D
E
C.2.1 Keyboard Layout

LED1显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light(LED1)
LED1显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light(LED1) LED1显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light(LED1)
模式指示灯
数码显示（LED1）
Digital display(LED1)
Digital display(LED2)
数码显示（LED2）
Voltage indicator light(LED2)
LED2显示电压指示单位（V）参数百分比（%）
Parameter percent(%)
LED2显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light(LED2) LED2显示每分钟转速指示单位（r/min）
Speed(r/min)/Freq(Hz)indicator light LED2
递增键
Increase key （LED2显示频率指示单位（Hz））
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key 数字电位器
Digital potentiometer
移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key 确认/数据键 key
Confirm/Data
递减键 key
Decrease
反转/点动键
Reverse/Jog key 停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key
Fig.C-1 EN-LED4-D Operating Keyboard Layout

256
Appendix C Keyboard
C.2.2 Description for keyboard functions, LED digital tubes and indicator
lights
LED double -display digital potentiometer keyboard consists of two 5-digit digital
tube screens,8 buttons, a digital potentiometer and 10 indicator lights.
If need more details about function definition of the 8 buttons, LED digital tubes,
digital potentiometer and specification of the indicator lights, then please refer to
“Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.
LED2 digital tube supervision is set by parameter F00.25.

Note
C.3 LCD keyboard

C.3.1 LCD keyboard series:
(1) Local LCD keyboard type: EN-LCD1
Failure alarm indicator light
C
(2) Remote control LCD keyboard type: EN-LCD2
变频器正转指示灯
N
模式指示灯
LCD显示屏
LCD screen
递增键
E
Increase key
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key 确认/数据键
Confirm/Data key
多功能键
Multiple function key 移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key
递减键
Decrease key
Reverse/Jog
反转/点动键 key 停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key
Fig.C-2 Keyboard Layout Sketch (EN-LCD1, EN-LCD2)

C.3.3 Keyboard Function, LCD Display and Spec. of Indicator Lights
LCD keyboard consists of a LCD screen, 9 buttons and 4 indicator lights
LCD screen: To display Function Setting, Running Supervision, Failure
Supervision Code and Parameter.
Multi-function key: The specific function keys decided by tens digit of F00.15 see
F00.15 parameter descriptions.
For more details about function definition of the 8 buttons and specification of the
indicator lights, please refer to “Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.
257
Appendix C Keyboard
C.3.4 Operating Spec. of LCD Display Keyboard

⑴ Initialization status of LCD keyboard when power on
When the keyboard is power on, “Key Board” is displayed in the form of
animation:
Keyboard
Fig.C-3 Initialization Display when Power On

⑵ Operation of switching to firstly menu (Fig. C-4):
F00:System Parameter Group F00:System Parameter Group
F01:Basic Running Group
F02:Start Stop Brake Group
F03: V/F Control Group

C F01:Basic Running Group
F02: Start Stop Brake Group

N
Press Press
F00:System Parameter Group F26:Fault Record Group
F01:Basic Running Group

E
F02: Start Stop Brake Group
Press Press
F01:Basic Running Group Press F01:Basic Running Group
F02:Start Stop Brake Group F02: Start Stop Brake Group
F03: V/F Control Group F03: V/F Control Group
Fig.C-4 Power on initialized display
258
Appendix C Keyboard
When set F00.00=2, Senior Menu parameters F00~F27 can be displayed, 28

groups in total. Operation methods are shown as Fig. C-4.
⑶ Display and operation of secondary menu:

When you are in the Firstly Menu, choose a parameter group, then press
“ENTER/DATA” key and you will enter into the Secondary Menu. Take
Parameter F00.00 for example:
F00:System Parameter Group Parameter Group Display
F01:Basic Running Group F0000=2
F02:Start Stop Brake Group 2：Senior List Mode
F03: V/F Control Group Range 0~3
ENTER/DATA
F00:System Parameter Group
00: Parameter Group Display

C
ENTER/DATA F0000=0
Press increase button
Parameter Group Display

N
01:C00 display when operation 0：Basic List Mode
02: C01 display when operation Range 0~3

E
Fig.C-5 Example of Secondary Menu Operation
259
Appendix C Keyboard
⑷ Function Parameter Operation

Function parameter operation includes the parameter checking, revise and storage
of parameters. Before the operating the inverter, parameters should be set
correctly. Operation methods are shown as Fig. C-6:
Frequency Setting Motor Control Mode
C00 050.00 Hz F0024=1
Frequency Setting 1:Speedless Vector Control
050.00 Hz Range： 0～2
ESC/MENU Press increase button
F00:System Parameter Group Motor Control Mode
F01:Basic Running Group F0024= 0

C
F02:Start Stop Brake Group 0:V/F Control
Range： 0～2
N
ENTER/DATA ENTER/DATA
00: Parameter Group Display Press 24: Motor Control Mode

E
01:C00 display when operation 25:Supervision 2 selection
02:C01 display when operation 26:Busbar voltage coefficient
Fig.C-6 Example of function parameter editing
260
Appendix C Keyboard
⑸ Fault query status

When fault alarm occurs, customers can enter the fault query status:
Fault Alarm！
E13
Output Phase Loss
ESC/MENU
F26:Fault Record Parameter
00:The Last Fault Record
C
01:The Last Two Fault Record
02: The Last Three Fault Record
ENTER/DATA
N
The Last Fault Record
F2600＝13
E
13：Output Phase Loss
Range 00～50
Fig.C-7 Fault query status
261
Appendix C Keyboard
C.4 LED single-display keyboard

The type of local single-display keyboard：EN-LED1。
显示电压指示单位（V）
Voltage indicator light
显示电流指示单位（A）
Current indicator light 显示频率指示单位（Hz）
Frequency indicator light
模式指示灯
递增键
Increase key
编程/退出键
Exit/Program key 确认/数据键
Confirm/Data key
多功能键
Multiple function
反转/点动键
Reverse/Jog
key
key
C 移位/监控键
Shift/Supervision key
递减键
Decrease key
停止/复位键
Stop/Reset key
正转运行键
Forward run key
N
Fig.C-8 EN-LED1 Operation keyboard layout
C.4.2 Keyboard function, LED Nixie tube and indicator light description
LED single-display keyboard is composed of a 5-digit nixie tube display、9 keys
and 6 indicator lights.
E
Multi-function key: The specific function keys decided by tens digit of F00.15 see
F00.15 parameter descriptions.
For more details about function definition of the 8 buttons and specification of the
indicator lights, please refer to “Keyboard Function Specifications” in Chapter 5.
1.Key position of EN-LED1, EL-LCD1, EN-LCD2 is different

from those standard keyboard, please note the key position of
these three keyboards.
2.For EN-LED1, EN-LCD1, EN-LCD2 these keyboards, the
Note deblocking way is different from the standard keyboards, the
deblocking way is to press or press for more than 2
seconds.
262
Appendix C Keyboard
C.5 Communication Component

The maximum electric distance between keyboard EN-LED3-D, EN-LED4-D,
EN-LCD1, EN-LED1 and local inverter is 2m.
RS485 communication mode is adopted between inverter and remote keyboard
EN-LCD2, only an ordinary cable is needed to connect each other, and their
maximum electric distance can be 1000m. When the communication with each
other is main-auxiliary mode, namely take remote keyboard as main device and
inverter as auxiliary device. The terminals of the connection cable are made by
crystal ends, so it is easy to maintain. Power needs customers’ outer leading，the
voltage range is from 10V to 24V，the demand current is 150mA，1mm2 of PVC
insulate copper wire is suggested to connect.
Following function can be realized by remote keyboard:
(1) Can control run, stop, jog, failure reset, change setting frequency, modify
function parameter and run direction of auxiliary device.
(2) Can identify the type of auxiliary device. Can monitor the running frequency,
C
setting frequency, output voltage, output current, analog closed loop feedback,
analog closed loop setting and exterior counting value of auxiliary device.
N
E
263
Appendix D Communication extension card

D.1 Communication card selection:
At the present, there are four kinds of communication card can be selected for.
Serial
Type Description Remark
No.
PROFIBUS-DP communication card (use
1 EN-PR01 Optional
in 15KW and the below )
PROFIBUS-DP communication card (use
2 EN-PR02 Optional
in 15KW the above)
3 EN-CAN1 CANopen communication card Optional
4 EN-CAN2 CANlink communication card Optional
D.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card
D.2.1 PROFIBUS introduction
(1)PROFIBUS (short for Process Field Bus ),PROFIBUS is an international and
C
open field bus standard independent with manufacturer. It can be support for
many equipment manufacturers, with good compatibility. It’s widely used in
Manufacturing Automation, automation of process industry, and other buildings,
transportation, electric power automation field.
N
(2)PROFIBUS can realize exchanging the data between all kinds of element of
automation, all of this equipment can exchange the information though the same
port. But the transmission rate is different .all the automatic equipment can
exchange the information though the same port, but with the different rates, so
PROFIBUS should offer different types for the speed rates selection. it is made up
E
with PROFIBUS-DP(Distributed peripheral ),

PROFIBUS-PA,PROFIBUS-FMS.
(3)PROFIBUS (RS485), the first layer realize the balanced data transmission,
wire a bus segment one Bus segment is shielded twisted pair cable, both ends of
the segments have a terminating resistor. Transmission mode to half duplex,
asynchronous, synchronous gap-free data exchange basis, the physical layer
supports fibre, the data frame 11, and the transfer rate: 9.6Kbit / sec-12Mbit / sec.
Bus length range from 100 to 1200 meters
(4)Between same-level controller and PC communications (token passing
procedure), to ensure adequate opportunity to deal with their communication tasks
in a determined time. Complex PLC and PC with a simple division formula I / O
communications, you must quickly and with minimal protocol overhead (master -
slave program)
264
D.2.2 The external form of PROFIBUS-DP and terminal definition

description
JP2
JP3
C
N
J2
J3
E
Fig D-1 PROFIBUS-DP outline dimensional drawing

Table D-1 Terminal function description
Terminal
Name Description Remark
date
Use it on 15KW
USB form adapter USB connection factory and distribution to
J2 frequency inverter or
plugs DB9 adapter cable
below
Use it on 15KW
DB9 communication signal connection
J3 frequency inverter or
communication port interface,9-pin DB9 female.
the above
Board-level When you install this plug docking with the
JP2
docking connector main control board CN2
265
(1)J3 Plug pin definition :
5 1
9 6
PIN PIN
data data
1 bit bare 6 VCC
2 bit bare 7 bit bare
3 Communication signal A 8 communication signal B
4 bit bare 9 bit bare
5 GND - -
(2)J2 Plug pin definition ：
2 4
1 3
C
N
PIN PIN
data data
1 Communication signal A 3 GND
2 Communication signal B 4 VCC
E
(3)J2 switch wiring

Direction B
Right右端插头
plug Direction B B向
B向
Direction A 左端插头
A向 Direction
A向 A
Left plug
1 6
3 4
1 2
9
5
Table D-2 The left end plug and The right end plug PIN data
The left end plug The right end plug The left end plug The right end plug
PIN data PIN data PIN data PIN data
- 1 4 6
- 2 - 7
1 3 2 8
- 4 - 9
3 5 - -
266
D.3 CANopen communication card

D.3.1 CANopen introduction
CANopen is an architecture in the control area network (Controller Area Network,
CAN) on the high-level communication agreements, including communication
equipment sub-sub-agreements and agreements, often used in embedded systems,
industrial control is a commonly used fieldbus. CANopen implements the network
layer and above the agreement OSI model. CANopen standard includes
addressing scheme, several small communication sub-agreements
D.3.2 Equipment model

Communication agreement on other modules communication processing and
network communication unit needed to start and reset the device has a state
machine control. State machine include: Initialization, Pre-operational,
Operational, Stopped.
D.3.3 Object Dictionary C

Object Dictionary (OD: Object Dictionary) is an ordered group of objects; each
object using an index value of 16 is addressed, in order to allow access to the data
structure of a single element, while the definition of an eight sub-indexes.
N
D.3.4 Communication
(1)Communication objects: Management packets, Service Data Objects (SDO),
process data objects (PDO), the pre-definition packet or special function object
(2)Communication model: master/slave model, client/server model,
E
producer/consumer model
D.3.5 Agreement
(1) NMT Agreement (network management, network management): Status
Agreement definition of the state machine change commands (such as starting or
stopping the equipment), to detect remote device bootup and failure scenarios.
(2) Heartbeat Agreement: nodes in the network to monitor and confirm it is
working properly.
(3) SDO agreement: between devices used to transfer large low-priority data,
typically used to configure devices on the CANopen network.
(4) PDO Agreement: 8 bytes or less used to transmit data, no other agreement
preset (which means data has been pre-definition).
267
D.3.6 CANopen form and terminal definition description
C
N
E
Fig D-2 CANopen outline dimensional drawing

Terminal
number
Communication By the client device connected to the CAN
CN1
wiring terminal bus communication
When you install this plug docking with
J1 Signal port
the main control board CN2
Terminal resistor Connect J2, then terminal resistor connect
J2
access entry to bus
(1)CN1 pin definition
PIN data Definition PIN data Definition
1 signal CANL 3 COM
2 signal CANH - -
268
D.4 CANlink communication card

D.4.1 CANlink introduction
The physical layer CANlink card is CAN bus, only supports CAN2.0B extended
frame. Since the control signal CANlink card connected directly to the main board,
compared with CANOPEN card, with high transmission efficiency, real-time,
stability and other characteristics, the maximum transfer rate of 1Mbps. CAN bus
data transmission using a differential signal, with strong anti-interference,
transmission distance and other characteristics, the communication rate 5Kbps
below, the farthest reach 10Km, at 1Mbps baud rate up to 30m.
CANlink protocol is self-definition protocols, support for modifications and
inverter terminal parameters monitoring.
D.4.2 CANlink card figure and terminal definition description
C
N
E
Fig D-3 CANlink Dimensions

269

Terminal
Number
Communication wiring By the client device connected to the
CN1
terminal CAN bus communication
When you install this plug docking with
J1 Signal port
the main control board CN2
Terminal resistor access Connect J2, then terminal resistor
J2
entry connect to bus
(1) The definition of CN1 pin.
PIN data Definition PIN data Definition
1 Signal CANL 3 COM
2 Signal CANH - -
C
N
E
270
Appendix E Universal encoder expansion card

E.1 The selection of encoder expansion card：
Universal encoder expansion card (PG card), As an option to use, it is the
necessary option for closed loop vector control inverter.
No. Model Description Remark
Differentiator input PG card, encoder
1 EN-PG01 input signal not isolated (suitable for all Optional
series machine)
Differentiator input PG card, encoder
input signal through the optocoupler
2 EN-PG02 Optional
isolation, stronger anti-interference ability
(suitable for all series machine)
Oc input PG card, encoder input signal
3 EN-PG03 Optional
through the optocoupler isolation
C
E.2 EN-PG01,EN-PG02 shape and terminal definitions
N
CN1
E
CN2
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
Fig.E-1 EN-PG01, EN-PG02 Outline dimension drawing
271
Table E-1 Terminal function description

Terminal
number
Board and board When installing the plug and the main
CN1
Butt socket control board CN2 docking
CN2 The user interface The encoder uses
(1) CN2 Terminal definitions

Terminal
PIN data Description
labeling
1 PE Shielding terminal
Power supply (GND of EN-PG01 and GND of control panel
3 GND is connect. GND of EN-PG02 and GND of control panel
isolation)
4 VCC Provide 5V/300mA current toward outside
7
A-
A+
B-
C Encoder output signal A negative
Encoder output signal A positive
Encoder output signal B negative

N
8 B+ Encoder output signal B positive
9 Z- Encoder output signal Z negative
10 Z+ Encoder output signal Z positive
(2) PG card specification：

E
The user interface Terminal table
Spacing 3.81mm
The maximum rate 500kHz
Differentiator input signal amplitude ≤7V
272
E.3 EN-PG03 shape and terminal definitions
C
N
Fig.E-2 EN-PG03 Outline dimension drawing
Table E-2 Terminal function description
Terminal
number
Board and board When installing the plug and the main
CN1
E
Butt socket control board CN2 docking

CN2 The user interface The encoder uses
(1) CN2 Terminal definitions

Terminal
PIN data Description
labeling
3 A Encoder output signal A
Provide voltage of 12V externally(Only supply power for
4 12V
12V encoder)
5 B Encoder output signal B
6 24V Provide 24V/100mA current
7 Z Encoder output signal Z
8 COM Power ground
273
Appendix F Integration expansion card

F.1 Expansion card model selection：
No. Model Introductions Note
PROFIBUS-DP and OC output PG
1 EN-PRPGO1 integration expansion card（apply to Optional
5.5KW Inverter and above power）
F.2 EN-PRPG01 expansion card
F.2.1 PROFIBUS Info
Please refer to appendix D about the details of communication expansion card.
F.2.2 Outside view and terminal definition introduction
C
N
E
Fig. F-1 Outline drawing
274
Table F-1 Terminal function description

No. Name Description
Communication signal connecting interface，9-pin DP9
J3 DP9 D type joint
female
JP2 Board level docking port Connect this plug with CN2 on the control board
JP3 Program download interface Used by manufacturer
CN1 User interface To connect encoder
（1）J3 plug pin definition:
5 1
9 6
Pin No. Definition Pin No. Definition
3
Vacancy
Vacancy
Communication signal A
C 6
8
Power VCC
Vacancy
Communication signal B
N
4 Vacancy 9 Vacancy
5 Power ground (GND) - -
（2）CN1 terminal definition

E
Pin No. Terminal mark Description
2 12V Provide 12V voltage（only supply for 12V encoder）
3 24V Provide 24V/100mA current
4 COM Power ground (GND)
5 A Encoder output A signal
6 B Encoder output B signal
7 Z Encoder output Z signal
275
Appendix G Braking unit and braking resistance
Appendix G Braking unit and braking resistance

G .1 Braking unit and braking resistance
The motor’s electric potential energy will charge inverter’s capacitance up
reversely if speed of the motor descends too quickly or load of the motor wobbles
too quickly while the inverter is running, which will increase the voltage upon
power modules suddenly and is easy to make the inverter damaged. The inverter
will control it according to load size and performance. You only need to connect
external braking resistance to realize timely energy discharge when the braking
function is needed. To connect external resistance is a kind of energy consumption
braking mode, as all the energy is consumed by the braking resistance.
EN600-2S0037, EN600-4T0007G/0015P ～ EN600-4T0150G/0185P has been
configured the built-in braking unit for EN600-2S0004 ～ EN600-2S0022,
EN600-4T0185G/0220P～EN600-4T0550G/0750P, the built-in braking unit is
optional.
When braking function needed, please connect external braking resistance
according to below table.
Built-in
C
Configuration table of braking unit and braking resistor configuration as
well as circumscribed braking resistor
Built-in Add Power of braking Power of braking
N
Frequency inverter type braking braking braking Quantity resistor（50% resistor（10%
unit resistor resistor braking rate） braking rate）
EN600-2S0004 Optional 无 ≥150Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥200W
EN600-2S0007 Optional 无 ≥100Ω 1PCS ≥1.5KW ≥250W
E

EN600-2S0037 Built-in 无 ≥30Ω 1PCS ≥5KW ≥1KW
EN600-4T0007G/0015P Built-in No ≥300Ω 1PCS ≥1KW ≥250W
EN600-4T0055G/0075P Built-in No ≥80Ω 1PCS ≥3.8KW ≥750W
EN600-4T0075G/0110P Built-in No ≥80Ω 1PCS ≥3.8KW ≥750W
EN600-4T0110G/0150P Built-in No ≥50Ω 1PCS ≥5KW ≥1KW
EN600-4T0150G/0185P Built-in No ≥40Ω 1PCS ≥7.5KW ≥1.5KW
EN600-4T0185G/0220P Optional No ≥27Ω 1PCS ≥9KW ≥1.8KW
276
Appendix F Braking unit and braking resistance
EN600-4T0300G/0370P Optional No ≥19Ω 1PCS ≥15KW ≥3KW

EN600-4T0370G/0450P Optional No ≥16.8Ω 1PCS ≥18.5KW ≥3.7KW
C
N
E
277

En500-600 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

En500-600 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En500-600 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Print version: V4.

EN500/EN600 series hi-performance flux vector inverter adopt advanced control

We reserve our right to notice you if we change contents of this manual.

3.1.2 Installation direction and space ………………………………16

5.2.1 Keypad layout …………………………………………………42

7.18 Reserved parameters Group1:F17……………………………………195

D.2 PROFIBUS-DP communication card ………………………………264

1 Safety information and use notice points

Symbol Symbol description

It may cause human death, serious injury or heavy property loss

(1) Forbid to connect AC power source to output terminal U,V,W,

may cause a electric shock or inverter damage.

(1) Forbid to connect control terminals except TA, TB, TC to AC

1.2 Application range

considered, when motor run over rated frequency.

(10)When inverter usage site altitude over1000 meters，inverter should derate

After wiring finish, short-circuit U,V,W

Fig.1-1 motor insulation check Fig.1-2 capacitor at output side forbidden

1.4 Scraping handling notice:

Notices when handling with scrapped inverter and components:

2 Inverter type and specification

2.4 Inverter type explanation

380V EN500-4T0750G/0900P 150/176 75/90

EN500-4T5000G/5600P 870/940 500/560

2.5 Appearance and parts name explanation

Control cable inlet

Fig.2-3 EN600 Parts name sketch

Input & output

Fig.2-4 EN500 Parts name sketch

2.6 Outer size

Table 2-2 EN500 mounting size

2.7.2 Base outer dimension

Fig.2-7 Mounting size of keypad Fig.2-8 Hole size of keypad

1. EN-LCD2 long-distance keypad outer lead, do not support

2.9 Product technic index and spec

3 phase 380V Grade：3 phase 380V, 50Hz/60Hz

G type：150% of rated current for 1 minute;

Digital setting：max. frequency×±0.01%；Analog setting：max.

Run command channel and frequency specified channel can bind

Channel 2 for analog input channel, AI1 can choose 4～20mA or

voltage, output current can be displayed

Protection grade IP20

Cooling mode Forced air cooling and natural

Installation mode Wall hanging and cabinet installation

To get a perfect usage performance of the inverter, Please check and

It is necessary to select right type, otherwise it may cause motor

3 Installation and wiring

a：15KW & down power b：18.5KW & up power

Fig.3-2 mounting of multiple inverters

3.2 Parts disassembly and installation

of inverter, then press the fixed shrapnel on the top

Fig.3-4 metal cover disassemble and assembly

3.4.1 for grounding wiring.

⑴Before wiring, assure power supply is cut off completely for 10

Fig.3-7 main loop simple wiring

Table 3-1 parameter recommended for air switch（breaker), contactor and

EN500-4T1600G/2000P 500 500 150 150 1.5

3.4.1 Connection between inverter and fitting parts

hoosing optionally EMI filter to